PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing 9.1 PeopleBook
SKU fscm91spog-b0311
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Trademark Notice
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
License Restrictions Warranty/Consequential Damages Disclaimer
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.
Warranty Disclaimer
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S.
Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007).
Oracle USA, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.
Hazardous Applications Notice
This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of this software. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications.
Third Party Content, Products, and Services Disclaimer
This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content, products and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content, products or services.
PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Processes
PeopleSoft Purchasing Integrations
Understanding User-Definable Fields
Setting Up User-Definable Fields
Understanding Business Units in PeopleSoft Purchasing
Establishing PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units
............................................................................. 13
..................................................................................... 15
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Contents
Creating PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units
.................................................................................... 17
Creating Business Unit Options
Defining Transaction Document Autonumbering Options
Establishing Change Options and Approval Rules
.................................................................... 35
....................................................................................... 36
Defining Requisition Change Options and Approval Requirements
Establishing Purchasing Processing Options
..................................................... 43
................................................................................................ 46
Defining Transaction Dispatch Methods
................................................................................................ 52
Defining Purchasing Item Categories
Defining Vendor Sourcing Priorities for Item Categories
Defining Purchasing Item Attributes
..................................................................... 73
Entering Purchasing Item Specifications
............................................................................................... 81
iv Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Defining Purchasing Item Vendor UOM and Pricing Information
Entering Item Vendor UOM Conversion Rate Changes
........................................................ 91
........................................................................ 94
Updating Purchase Orders with Item Vendor UOM Conversion Rate Changes
Updating Item Vendor Unit-of-Measure Conversion Rates
................................... 96
......................................................................... 98
Assigning Miscellaneous Charges and Templates to Items and Categories
Setting Up Item Vendor Price Adjustment Rules
.......................................... 99
....................................................................................... 101
Updating Standard Prices and Business Unit Standard Prices
.................................................................... 104
Using Standard Price and Business Unit Standard Price Updating Online
Using Standard Price and Business Unit Price Batch Updating
.......................................... 106
.......................................................... 108
Defining Priority Vendors by Item Ship To Location
.......................................................................... 110
Understanding Miscellaneous Charges
Defining Miscellaneous Charge Defaults
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
v
Contents
Understanding the PeopleSoft Purchasing Default Hierarchy
Purchasing Transaction Default Hierarchy
.................................................................... 149
.......................................................................................... 149
Understanding the UOM Conversion Hierarchy
........................................................................................ 161
vi Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
High-Level Controls Implementation: Item Ship To Vendor Location and Item Region Vendor Location
Mid-Level Control Implementation: Ship To Vendor Location and Region Vendor Location Vendor
Understanding Commitment Control in PeopleSoft Purchasing
Delivered Source Transaction Types for Purchasing
................................................................ 179
........................................................................... 180
Commitment Control Budget Processor Process in PeopleSoft Purchasing
........................................ 182
Commitment Control and PeopleSoft Purchasing Close Processes
Budget Checking Receipt Accruals
..................................................... 189
Running Entry Events After Partial or Final Liquidation
.................................................................... 195
Budget Checking Requisitions Using Online Pages
Budget Checking Purchase Orders
............................................................................ 197
Budget Checking Purchase Orders Using the Commitment Control Budget Processor Process ......... 199
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
vii
Contents
Budget Checking Procurement Cards Using the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions
Creating a Data Set for Retrieval by the Purchase Order Rollover Workbench
Selecting and Qualifying Purchase Orders for Rollover
.................................. 207
...................................................................... 210
Reviewing Purchase Order Details
Running the PO Rollover1 Process
Understanding Entry Events in PeopleSoft Purchasing
Setting Up PeopleSoft Purchasing Entry Events
.............................................................................. 225
........................................................................................ 229
viii Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Understanding the Procurement Card Business Process
Common Elements Used in This Chapter
............................................................................. 238
............................................................................................ 239
Assigning Proxy Roles for Different Procurement Cards
Setting Up Universal SpeedCharts
.................................................................... 248
Assigning Universal SpeedCharts to Multiple Procurement Cards
..................................................... 250
Viewing Cardholder Personal Data
Defining Procurement Card Issuers
Maintaining a List of Preferred Vendors
.............................................................................................. 264
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
ix
Contents
Running the ProCard Data Loader Application Engine Process (PO_CCPCRDSTG)
Handling Statement Staging Errors
Entering Statement Line Tax Information
........................................................................................... 291
x Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Viewing and Resolving Procurement Card Transaction Amount Disputes
......................................... 300
Understanding Vendor Rebate Agreement Statuses
Understanding Vendor Rebate Rule Types
................................................................................... 313
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xi
Contents
Understanding the Rebate Accrual Process
................................................................................................ 345
Associating to, Dissociating from, and Modifying Associated Vendor Rebate Agreements Line by Line to
Pages Used to Manually Associate to, Dissociate from, and Modify Associated Vendor Rebate
Associating, Dissociating, and Modifying Vendor Rebate Agreements Line by Line to Purchase Orders
Understanding the Claims Management Business Process for Vendor Rebates
........................................ 367
Generating Vendor Rebate Claims
Printing a Vendor Rebate Claim
Notifying Rebate Managers of Claims
Using the Claims Management Workbench
............................................................................................... 377
Using the Claims Management Workbench
Reconciling Payments for Vendor Rebates
......................................................................................... 378
................................................................................................ 384
Maintaining Claim Distributions
xii Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Understanding the Vendor Rebate Analysis Workbench
........................................................................... 401
Establishing Vendor Rebate Allocations
Viewing Not Received Purchase Order Information
Extracting Vendor Rebate Analysis to a File
........................................................................... 419
....................................................................................... 420
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xiii
Contents
xiv
Entering Requisition Header Defaults
Applying Changes to Default Values in Requisition Header, Line, Schedule, and Distribution Fields
.
Entering Requisition Header Comments
.............................................................................................. 458
Viewing Currency Exchange Rate Information
................................................................................... 461
Viewing Qualifying Item Vendors
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Entering Requisition Line Information
................................................................................................ 467
Entering Requisition Line Details
Viewing Catalog Category Hierarchies
Viewing Buyer Contact Information
................................................................................................ 483
Creating Requisition Schedules
Entering VAT Schedule Information
Understanding Using Pegging With Requisitions in PeopleSoft Purchasing
...................................... 498
Printing Requisition Templates
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xv
Contents
Understanding the Purchasing Requisition Loader Application Engine Process (PO_REQLOAD)
Defining Purchasing Requisition Loader System Sources
................................................................... 516
Reviewing and Correcting Purchasing Requisition Loader Process Data Errors
Viewing and Entering Requisition Comments
................................ 527
..................................................................................... 528
Entering or Editing Override Address Information
Updating Direct Shipment Information
.............................................................................. 529
Understanding the Direct Shipments Update Application Engine Process (PO_REQDROP) ............. 529
Running the Direct Shipments Update Process
Purging Requisition Load Requests
.................................................................................... 531
Understanding the Purge Requisition Load Request Application Engine Process (PO_RLRQPRG) .. 531
xvi Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Running the Close Requisitions Process
.............................................................................................. 581
Entering Requisition Inquiry Selection Criteria
Viewing Requisition Information
Viewing Requisition Line Details
................................................................................... 590
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xvii
Contents
Viewing Requisition Schedule Details
Viewing Requisition Distribution Details
............................................................................................ 596
Viewing Requisition-to-Purchase Order Information
Viewing Requisition-to-Receipt Information
.......................................................................... 596
....................................................................................... 597
Viewing Requisition-to-MSR Information
Using the Requisition Workbench
.......................................................................................... 597
Viewing Requisition Workbench Information
Reviewing Requisition Accounting Line Entries
..................................................................................... 604
....................................................................................... 605
Reviewing Requisition Accounting Line Entries
Reviewing Requisition Entry Event Journal Entries
................................................................................. 606
.................................................................................. 608
Understanding RFQs in PeopleSoft Purchasing
Establishing Vendor Quote Groups
......................................................................................... 609
Adding Item Vendors to the Dispatch Vendor List
Selecting Vendors for RFQ Dispatch
.............................................................................. 621
xviii Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
SUT Processing on the Purchase Order
VAT Processing on the Purchase Order
PeopleSoft Maintenance Management Work Order Processing on the Purchase Order
............................ 658
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xix
Contents
Understanding the Purchase Order Business Process
Common Elements Used in This Chapter
................................................................................. 671
............................................................................................ 676
Understanding How the System Assigns Purchase Order IDs When Reserving Purchase Orders ....... 681
Entering Purchase Order Header Information
...................................................................................... 691
Maintaining Procurement Card Information
Entering Purchase Order Header VAT Details
........................................................................................ 715
.................................................................................... 715
Entering Purchase Order Dispatch Options
Viewing Purchase Order Dispatch History
......................................................................................... 716
.......................................................................................... 717
Entering Purchase Order Line Information
Entering Purchase Order Line Details
.......................................................................................... 721
Selecting Miscellaneous Charges to Apply to Purchase Order Lines
Creating Purchase Order Schedules
.................................................. 738
Entering Purchase Order Schedule One-time Address Information
Entering Schedule SUT Information
.................................................... 751
xx Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Entering Distribution Information
Viewing Distribution SUT Details
Resourcing Requisitions Associated With a Purchase Order After Successful Cancelation of a Purchase
Initiating Budget Checking After Successful Cancelation of a Purchase Order
.................................. 783
Comparing Purchase Order and EDX POA Line Details
Reviewing EDX POA Schedule Information
..................................................................... 795
....................................................................................... 795
Comparing Purchase Order and EDX POA Schedule Details
Creating and Viewing Purchase Order Backorders
............................................................. 796
.................................................................................... 796
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxi
Contents
Primary Sourcing Staging Tables
Maintaining Procurement Card Information
........................................................................................ 825
Reviewing Purchase Order Header Staging Details
Automatically Selecting Requisitions for Sourcing
............................................................................. 829
.................................................................................... 830
Running the AutoSelect Requisitions Process
..................................................................................... 832
Defining Vendor Priority and Vendor Location by Region
Defining Vendor Order Locations
................................................................. 836
Loading Staged Purchase Order Requests from PeopleSoft Supply Planning and Manufacturing
Understanding the PO Stage Load Process
.......................................................................................... 837
Page Used to Load Staged Purchase Order Requests from PeopleSoft Supply Planning and
Reviewing, Approving, and Applying Planning Messages
Running the PO Stage Load Application Engine Process
.................................................................. 838
.................................................................... 839
Page Used to Build Inventory Demand Transactions
Running the PO Calculations Process
.......................................................................... 844
Understanding the PO Calculations Process
Understanding Sourcing Methods
........................................................................................ 844
Running the PO Calculations Process
xxii Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Viewing and Modifying Staged Row Details
Viewing Eligible Vendors for Staged Rows
...................................................................................... 867
........................................................................................ 871
Viewing Purchase Order Value Adjustments
Viewing Purchase Order VAT Information
....................................................................................... 874
......................................................................................... 875
Viewing Flexible Sourcing Vendor Selection Results
Viewing Planned Purchase Order Information
......................................................................... 876
.................................................................................... 878
Creating Purchase Orders Using the Create Purchase Orders Process
Understanding the Create Purchase Orders Process
....................................................... 880
............................................................................. 880
Running the Cumulative Sourcing Update Process
Purging Purchasing Staging Tables
............................................................................. 886
Manually Constructing the Purchasing Staging Tables
.............................................................................. 889
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxiii
Contents xxiv
Understanding Purchase Order Dispatch
Defining Change Order and Sequence Numbers
Setting Up Purchase Order Change Templates
................................................................................. 954
........................................................................................... 957
Reviewing Processing Rules for the Change Purchase Order Process
Generating Purchase Order Change Orders Online
....................................................... 966
.................................................................................... 969
Page Used to Load Change Orders Received Using EDXs or Supplier-Facing Online Acknowledgements
Understanding the Purchase Order and Purchase Order Change Order Acknowledgement EIP ......... 972
Pages Used to Use the Purchase Order and Purchase Order Change Order Acknowledgement EIP ... 972
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Running the Change Purchase Order Process
...................................................................................... 986
Running the PO_POCHGPRG Process
Viewing Purchase Order Change History
................................................................................................ 988
Understanding the Close Purchase Orders Process
................................................................................... 1003
Describing Close Purchase Order Changes to Purchase Order Statuses
Purchase Order Closure and the Fully Received Status
............................................ 1010
..................................................................... 1011
Running the Close Purchase Orders Process
...................................................................................... 1013
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxv
Contents
Pages Used to View Purchase Order Document Tolerance Information
Reviewing Purchase Order Accounting Line Entries
........................................... 1028
............................................................................... 1029
xxvi
Understanding the Receiving Business Process
........................................................................................ 1037
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Entering Receipt Header Information
Viewing Inventory Item Storage Details
Searching for Available Storage Locations
............................................................................................ 1081
........................................................................................ 1082
Viewing Return-To-Vendor Details
Modifying Receipt ChartField Values
............................................................................................... 1089
Accessing ASR Purchase Order Header Details
................................................................................ 1094
Initiating Receiving Using EDC
Receiving an Entire Purchase Order Using EDC
Receiving a Purchase Order Line Using EDC
............................................................................... 1098
................................................................................... 1099
Receiving a Purchase Order Schedule Using EDC
Ending an EDC Receiving Transaction
............................................................................ 1099
............................................................................................. 1099
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxvii
Contents
Publishing the Purchase Order Expected Receipt EIP
Using the Purchase Order Receipt Notification EIP
....................................................................... 1105
................................................................................. 1105
Setting Up the Purchase Order Receipt Notification EIP
Processing the Purchase Order Receipt Notification EIP
.................................................................. 1106
.................................................................. 1107
Loading EDC Transactions Using the Receive Load Process
Loading ASR Transactions Using the Receive Load Process
........................................................... 1110
............................................................ 1110
Working with Landed Costs on Receipts
Viewing Voucher Details for Landed Costs
...................................................................................... 1118
xxviii Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Common Elements Used in This Chapter
Setting Up RTV Processing Options
.......................................................................................... 1151
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxix
Contents
Selecting Receipt Lines for Item Returns
.......................................................................................... 1168
Selecting Purchase Order Distribution Return Details
Selecting Receipt Distribution Return Details
....................................................................... 1172
................................................................................... 1173
xxx Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Viewing Requisition Document Status
.............................................................................................. 1212
Viewing Purchase Order Document Status
Viewing Receipt Document Status
........................................................................................ 1213
Generating Procurement History
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxxi
Contents
Understanding the Procurement History Update Application Engine Process (FS_PRCRUPD) ....... 1223
xxxii Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
Correcting GPO Item Load Errors
Approving GPO Items for Loading
Running the GPO Manufacturer Price Load Process
Correcting Item Manufacturer GPO Errors
......................................................................... 1263
........................................................................................ 1263
Viewing Item Manufacturer GPO Prices
Calculating Distributor Prices
........................................................................................... 1264
Running the GPO Distributor Price Load Application Engine Process (PO_GPOVND_PR) .......... 1267
Pages Used to Process Custom Duty, Excise Duty, and Sales Tax/VAT in the Sourcing Business Process
Processing Custom Duty, Excise Duty, and Sales Tax/VAT in the PO Calculations Application Engine
Viewing Purchase Order Excise Duty and Sales Tax/VAT Detail Information in the Sourcing Workbench
Processing Custom Duties, Excise Duties, and Sales Tax/VAT in the Create Purchase Orders Application
Purging Excise Duties and Sales Tax/VAT in the Purchasing Staging Tables Using the Purge Stage
Accessing Purchase Order Schedule Excise Duty and Sales Tax/VAT Details
Processing Customs Duty on Online Purchase Orders
................................ 1283
............................................................................. 1289
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxxiii
Contents
Pages Used to Process Customs Duty on Online Purchase Orders
Entering Purchase Order Line Customs Duty Details
.................................................... 1289
........................................................................ 1291
Entering Purchase Order Schedule Customs Duty Details
Accessing Purchase Order Schedule Customs Duty Details
................................................................ 1292
.............................................................. 1293
Page Used to Dispatch and Print Excise Duty and Sales Tax/VAT Information on Purchase Orders
Processing Custom Duty, Excise Duty, and Sales Tax/VAT in Purchase Order Change Orders
Page Used to Process Custom Duty, Excise Duty, and Sales Tax/VAT in Purchase Order Change Orders
Using the Return-To-Vendor (RTV) Excise Adjustment Business Process
............................................. 1301
Selecting BOE Lines for Receipt
Running the Receiver Interface Push Process with Customs Duty
Creating Internal Vendor Excise Invoices Against a BOE
.......................................................... 1321
....................................................................... 1321
xxxiv Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
PO_POROLLEXP - PO Rollover Exception List Sort by PO
PORC100 - Advanced Shipment Receipt (ASR)
........................................................... 1359
............................................................................... 1360
PORC920 - Receipt Item Usage Labels
PORC930 - Device Tracking Receipts
............................................................................................. 1361
............................................................................................... 1362
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxxv
Contents
PORQ010 - Requisition Print SQR
POS8001 - Procurement Budgetary Activity
POS8002 - Requisition Budgetary Activity
..................................................................................... 1365
....................................................................................... 1366
POX4006 - Expediting Report by Buyer
POX4007 - Expediting Report by Vendor
........................................................................................... 1368
......................................................................................... 1368
POX4008 - Expediting Report by Due Date
POX4030 - PO Detail Listing By PO Date
...................................................................................... 1368
....................................................................................... 1368
POX4031 - PO Detail Listing By Vendor
POX4032 - PO Detail Listing By Buyer
......................................................................................... 1368
............................................................................................ 1369
POX4100 - PO To Requisition XREF
............................................................................................... 1369
POX5010 - Receiver Shipto Detail
POX5020 - Receiver Account Detail
POY5020 - Receiver Account Detail
POY5030 - Receipt Delivery Detail
POY5035 - Shop Floor Receipt Delivery
POY5050 - Return To Vendor Detail
.......................................................................................... 1371
xxxvi Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
This preface discusses:
•
•
•
•
•
PeopleSoft products.
PeopleSoft application fundamentals.
Pages with deferred processing.
PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing default hierarchies.
Common elements in this PeopleBook.
is not documented with the process or task in which it is used, then it either requires no additional explanation or is documented with the common elements for the section, chapter, or PeopleBook.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This PeopleBook refers to these products:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Cost Management.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Mobile Inventory Management
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Collaborative Supply Management.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise eProcurement.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise eSupplier Connection.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Supply Planning Multisite Material Planner and PeopleSoft Enterprise
Supply Planning Advanced Multisite Planner.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Manufacturing.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Flow Production.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Engineering.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Inventory.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Order Management.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxxvii
Preface
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Project Costing.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Product Configurator.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Quality.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Receivables.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Strategic Sourcing.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise CRM Call Center Applications.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Integrated FieldService.
The PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing PeopleBook provides you with implementation and processing information for the Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing system. However, additional, essential information describing the setup and design of the system resides in companion documentation. The companion documentation consists of important topics that apply to many or all of the Oracle's PeopleSoft applications across the Financials, Enterprise Service Automation, and Supply Chain Management product lines. You should be familiar with the contents of these PeopleBooks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following companion PeopleBooks contain information that applies specifically to Oracle's PeopleSoft
Enterprise Purchasing:
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing Items PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Enterprise Mobile Inventory Management PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-To-Settle Common Information PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Working With Third-Party Applications PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Enterprise Supply Chain Management Integrations PeopleBook
PeopleSoft Enterprise SCM Electronic Data Interchange Messaging PeopleBook
xxxviii Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Preface
Several pages in Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing operate in deferred processing mode. Most fields on these pages are not updated or validated until you save the page or refresh it by clicking a button, link, or tab. This delayed processing has various implications for the field values on the page, for example, if a field contains a default value, any value you enter before the system updates the page overrides the default.
Another implication is that the system updates quantity balances or totals only when you save or otherwise refresh the page.
Oracle's PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing application defaulting behavior is discussed in the Using Default
Hierarchies chapter. The information in this chapter replaces default documentation at the field level and provides the same information efficiently in a central location.
In the chapter, we provide charts of transaction and item default sources, as well as explanations of multicurrency pricing calculation, unit of measure assignment and conversion, and vendor and vendor location selection.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A companion PeopleBook called PeopleBooks and the PeopleSoft Online Library contains general information, including:
Understanding the PeopleSoft online library and related documentation.
How to send PeopleSoft documentation comments and suggestions to Oracle.
How to access hosted PeopleBooks, downloadable HTML PeopleBooks, and downloadable PDF
PeopleBooks as well as documentation updates.
Understanding PeopleBook structure.
Typographical conventions and visual cues used in PeopleBooks.
ISO country codes and currency codes.
PeopleBooks that are common across multiple applications.
Common elements used in PeopleBooks.
Navigating the PeopleBooks interface and searching the PeopleSoft online library.
Displaying and printing screen shots and graphics in PeopleBooks.
How to manage the locally installed PeopleSoft online library, including web site folders.
Understanding documentation integration and how to integrate customized documentation into the library.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xxxix
Preface
•
Application abbreviations found in application fields.
You can find PeopleBooks and the PeopleSoft Online Library in the online PeopleBooks Library for your
PeopleTools release.
Free-flow text up to 30 characters.
Date on which a table row becomes effective; the date that an action begins. For example, if you want to close out a ledger on June 30, the effective date for the ledger closing would be July 1. This date also determines when you can view and change the information. Pages or panels and batch processes that use the information use the current row.
The language in which you want the field labels and report headings of your reports to print. The field values appear as you enter them.
Language also refers to the language spoken by an employee, applicant, or nonemployee.
(group box)
Designates the appropriate frequency in the Process Frequency group box:
Once executes the request the next time the batch process runs. After the batch process runs, the process frequency is automatically set to Don't Run.
Always executes the request every time the batch process runs.
Don't Run ignores the request when the batch process runs.
This link takes you to the Process List page, where you can view the status of submitted process requests.
The report identifier.
This link takes you to the Report List page, where you can view report content, check the status of a report, and see content detail messages (which show you a description of the report and the distribution list).
Select to have a report print in the language defined for the recipient of the report.
A request identification that represents a set of selection criteria for a report or process.
This button takes you to the Process Scheduler request page, where you can specify the location where a process or job runs and the process output format.
xl Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Preface
Each run control you create receives a unique run control ID. When you select a process from a menu, a search dialog box appears, asking for a run control ID. If you're in Add mode, enter a new ID for the run control you're about to define. If you're in Update/Display mode, enter an existing run control ID or click the
Search button and select from the list of available run control IDs.
Free-flow text up to 15 characters.
Select to have a report print in the language that you specify in the Language field.
Your options in this field are Active or Inactive. By linking status and effective date, you can retain historical information and plan future implementation. For auditing purposes, PeopleSoft encourages inactivating data that is no longer in use instead of deleting it.
The system identifier for the individual who generates a transaction.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
xli
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
1
This chapter provides an overview of PeopleSoft Purchasing business processes and discusses:
•
•
PeopleSoft Purchasing integrations.
PeopleSoft Purchasing implementation.
The PeopleSoft Purchasing business processes include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Requests for quotes
Procurement cards
Procurement contracts
Vendor rebates
Online and batch requisition creation
Requisition change orders
Requisition reconciliation
Online and batch purchase order creation
Purchase order change orders
Purchase order reconciliation
Receiving
Inspections
Returns to vendors
Procurement analysis
We cover these business processes in the business process chapters in this PeopleBook.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
3
4
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Purchasing Chapter 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PeopleSoft Purchasing integrates with the following PeopleSoft applications:
•
•
•
•
PeopleSoft Asset Management
PeopleSoft eProcurement
PeopleSoft eSupplier Connection
PeopleSoft Supply Planning Multisite Material Planner, Supply Planning Advanced Multisite Planner, and Manufacturing
PeopleSoft Flow Production
PeopleSoft General Ledger
PeopleSoft Inventory
PeopleSoft Mobile Inventory Management
PeopleSoft Maintenance Management
PeopleSoft Order Management
PeopleSoft Payables
PeopleSoft Project Costing
PeopleSoft Product Configurator
PeopleSoft Quality
PeopleSoft Receivables
PeopleSoft Strategic Sourcing
PeopleSoft Supplier Contract Management
We cover integration considerations in the implementation chapters in this PeopleBook.
Supplemental information about third-party application integrations is located on the My Oracle Support website.
PeopleSoft Asset Management
A direct link with PeopleSoft Asset Management streamlines the entry of asset information. Seamless interaction between PeopleSoft Purchasing, PeopleSoft Asset Management, and PeopleSoft Payables enables you to pass asset information from both Purchasing and Payables using a common process, capitalization of assets at point of receipt, and process modifications to existing assets.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Purchasing
PeopleSoft eProcurement
Close integration between PeopleSoft eProcurement and PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to share common control data, such as item definitions for both PeopleSoft eProcurement and PeopleSoft Purchasing. It enables you to create requisitions, purchase orders, receipts, and other transactions that will be stored in shared tables.
The combination offers a complete solution for direct, indirect, service, and project purchases in an integrated environment.
PeopleSoft eSupplier Connection
Self-service Web transactions enable you to give your vendors access to address and contact information, saving your employees time and effort. With PeopleSoft eSupplier Connection, you can also give vendors view access for review purposes to account balances, invoices, orders, payments, receipts, schedule information, and kanban requests. Security features make it easy for vendors to grant appropriate access to their own employees, removing the administrative burden from your employees. At the same time, your employees retain the power to maintain vendor employees, if necessary. Of course, you always control which vendors have access to your PeopleSoft site and which data they can view and change.
PeopleSoft Supply Planning Multisite Material Planner, Supply Planning Advanced Multisite
Planner, and Manufacturing
PeopleSoft Supply Planning Multisite Material Planner, Supply Planning Advanced Multisite Planner, and
Manufacturing send purchase orders and change orders directly to the PeopleSoft Purchasing database tables.
Orders for subcontracted services from your shop floor, planned orders, and requisitioned items can be processed identically, and yet you can still distinguish them and set up separate processing rules for each type.
PeopleSoft Flow Production
PeopleSoft Purchasing and Flow Production work together to provide a powerful automated tool for signaling replenishment and moving material within the supply chain. This is achieved by effectively communicating production and material replenishment signals by a variety of methods, such as creating and scanning kanban cards and labels, routing replenishment requests, or triggering replenishment through completions.
PeopleSoft General Ledger
Commitment Control, a subsystem of PeopleSoft General Ledger, is an optional feature for PeopleSoft
Purchasing that enables you to control commitments and expenditures by checking them against predefined, authorized budgets. This feature can be activated for specific products and business units. Commitment
Control can be used to automatically check pre-encumbrances, encumbrances, and expenditures against control budgets. It can detect and notify you of pending budget exceptions, and also freeze the affected transactions. It can also take into consideration the budget tolerances and revenue types that you want the system to use to increase expenditure limits.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
5
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Purchasing Chapter 1
PeopleSoft Purchasing and General Ledger also support period-end, on-demand receipt accrual, also known as flow-through receipt accrual. When you use the PeopleSoft Payables Matching module, this process backs out previous transactions before new transactions can be generated. The original transactions for which reversals have just been created are flagged as canceled. Then the process generates new transactions for receipts that qualify for accrual and creates new transactions in the staging record for each receipt line.
Finally, encumbrance transactions are generated for the current period and reversal transactions are generated for the next period. When you run the Receipt Accrual process at the end of each accounting period, the process accrues unbilled receipt amounts in a receipt accrual liability account and debits identical amounts from the designated expense accounts. PeopleSoft Purchasing supports period-end receipt accrual for expensed items where you have received the goods from the vendor, but the vendor has not yet invoiced your company. It also supports receipt accrual for expensed items, where a non-purchase order receipt has been entered. You can control whether the system accrues for one of the scenarios, both scenarios, or not at all.
PeopleSoft Inventory
The close integration between PeopleSoft Purchasing and PeopleSoft Inventory enables you to share common item definitions and set up items from one menu for both PeopleSoft Purchasing and PeopleSoft Inventory. It enables you to create replenishment requests based on defined inventory levels; create material stock requests to fill purchase requests; update inventory upon receipt of goods; and include the miscellaneous charges (such as freight, duty, and tax) for a purchase in the item's inventory cost calculations. PeopleSoft's extensive consignment inventory feature enables you to implement this strategy across your enterprise. Inventory receipts can be recorded, holding the recognition of ownership until after the goods are consumed from your inventory.
Integration with PeopleSoft Inventory means that you can include the landed cost charges in the item's cost.
Landed cost charges can include expenses such as freight, insurance, duty, and handling. You can create cost templates that specify which cost charges to attach to any combination of item, item category, vendor, vendor location, ship-to ID, and purchasing business unit. In PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can also directly associate cost templates and individual charges with a purchase order header or purchase order schedule.
Using the Pegging workbench, you can optionally tie item demand to supply provided by a specific requisition or purchase order. Multiple demand lines can be satisfied by a single schedule or, alternatively, multiple schedules may be used to satisfy a single demand. The pegging workbench can also be accessed from within the Requisition and Purchase Order maintenance pages. Once the tie between the specific purchase order or requisition is made, notifications are sent to the appropriate owners whenever changes to either the supply or the demand are made.
PeopleSoft Mobile Inventory Management
PeopleSoft Purchasing integrates with PeopleSoft Mobile Inventory Management to create receipts and purchase order deliveries using mobile devices, such as hand held devices, phones or bar code readers. The
Mobile Inventory Management application provides tools to integrate mobile devices to the PeopleSoft
Supply Chain Management system.
Purchasing information collected using mobile devices is transmitted to and recorded in the Purchasing system. Using mobile devices, you can receive inventory or non-inventory items, with or without associated purchase orders. Receipts with a purchase order can be for items that will be stocked in inventory or for items that will go directly to par locations or go directly to various departments. A receipt without a purchase order
(ad hoc receipt) can be interfaced to the same products as a purchase order receipt.
After receiving the stock, you can use the Mobile Delivery task flow in Mobile Inventory Management to record the final destination for delivered items, view location and ship to information relevant to the delivery of the items, and to whom the items were delivered. Delivery information exists at the receipt distribution level and originates from either a requisition or purchase order.
6 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Purchasing
PeopleSoft Maintenance Management
PeopleSoft Purchasing integrates with PeopleSoft Maintenance Management to acquire parts and services needed for the maintenance and repair of assets.
Requisitions and purchase orders can be created to acquire parts and services for a work order that is created in PeopleSoft Maintenance Management. The work order link to the requisition or purchase order is maintained through out the procurement life cycle. As parts are received notification is sent to the appropriate maintenance personnel. In addition, once work is complete on the work order, excess parts can be returned to the supplier.
PeopleSoft Order Management
Through the requisition loader process, PeopleSoft Order Management sends direct ship orders, and changes to those orders, to PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Within Sales Order entry, users will also have the option of sourcing the demand directly from PeopleSoft
Purchasing. When demand for an item on a sales order is created, the Customer Service Representative will have the option of tying the demand to existing supply from a requisition or purchase order or to create a new purchase order to fulfil the demand. When a new PO is created, the CSR may optionally preselect the vendor.
Once this link is made, the purchased items can either be drop shipped directly to the customer site or received into inventory and shipped at a later time. When changes to either the demand or the supply are made, notifications are sent so the appropriate documents can be updated.
PeopleSoft Payables
The interaction of PeopleSoft Purchasing and PeopleSoft Payables data and processing enables you to match vouchers with all purchase order and receiver details, and to generate payments without waiting for invoices, using the Evaluated Receipt Settlement matching process. In addition, the PeopleSoft Payables voucher build process automatically generates invoices from Return to Vendor transactions and Procurement Card statements created in PeopleSoft Purchasing to streamline and centralize voucher creation. With instant access to all related current and historical procurement data, the procurement analysis tools enable you to view trends or track one item across all of procurement.
PeopleSoft Purchasing purchase order contracts and PeopleSoft Payables vouchers components are combined in one place within the system, providing full contract functionality through a single user interface.
In addition, vendor rebate claims are sent to PeopleSoft Payables for settlement (to net the vendor balance in the next pay-cycle) or for rebate and VAT accounting entries posting depending on the rebate agreement settlement method. Vendor rebate claims are sent to PeopleSoft Payables as an adjustment voucher using the
Process Claims Driver process. The Process Claims Driver process then initiates the Claim Settlement
Process for AP process (claim settlement process for account payables process). Then when an adjustment voucher is created PeopleSoft Payables sends that information back to PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Plus, prepayment vouchers can be sent from PeopleSoft Purchasing to the voucher staging tables when loading procurement card statements if you so choose. These prepayment vouchers include the procurement card transactions associated with a purchase order.
PeopleSoft Project Costing
PeopleSoft Purchasing creates requisitions based on project activity requests in PeopleSoft Project Costing and returns ordered materials transactions to Project Costing as committed costs.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
7
8
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Purchasing Chapter 1
PeopleSoft Product Configurator
PeopleSoft Purchasing can place requisitions and purchase orders, as well as, receive requests from Order
Management for configured items.
PeopleSoft Quality
Direct integration with PeopleSoft Quality enables you to maintain detailed quality data, such as defect descriptions, required measurements, and cause/action information. Vendors, items, lot numbers, and serial numbers are passed to PeopleSoft Quality. By using the integration between PeopleSoft Purchasing and
Quality, you can do extensive statistical and graphical analyses on receiving inspection data, including Pareto diagrams, control charting, and distribution analysis.
PeopleSoft Receivables
Vendor rebate claims with a settlement method of check, credit memo, direct debit, draft, or electronic funds transfer are sent to PeopleSoft Receivables for expected payment as a pending item using the Process Claims
Driver process. The Process Claims Driver process then initiates the Claim Settlement Process for AR process
(claim settlement process for account receivables process). Then when payment is received for these pending items PeopleSoft Receivables sends that payment information back to PeopleSoft Purchasing.
PeopleSoft Strategic Sourcing
With PeopleSoft Strategic Sourcing, requisitions created from PeopleSoft Purchasing can be converted into sourcing events to gather competitive pricing, analyze bids, and award to the most qualified bidders. Once an event is awarded, either Purchase Orders or Vendor Contracts can be automatically created in PeopleSoft
Purchasing to leverage the pricing arrangements and terms negotiated during the execution of the event.
PeopleSoft Supplier Contract Management
Using PeopleSoft Supplier Contract Management with Purchasing, contract specialists can create authored contract documents that can be associated to transaction information contained in purchase orders or requisitions. When using Supplier Contract Management with procurement contracts the system can also track contract compliance using contract agreement capability as well as spend notifications at the header, line, and category levels.
PeopleSoft Setup Manager enables you to review a list of setup tasks for your organization for the products that you are implementing. The setup tasks include the components that you must set up, listed in the order in which you must enter data into the component tables, and links to the corresponding PeopleBook documentation.
PeopleSoft Purchasing also provides component interfaces to help you load data from your existing system into PeopleSoft Purchasing tables. Use the Excel to Component Interface utility with the component interfaces to populate the tables.
This table lists all of the components that have component interfaces:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1
Component
ITM_MFG_UPN
ITM_SHIPTO_VNDR
LOCATION_TBL
PURCH_ITEM_ATTR
REQUESTOR_TBL
Component Interface
ITM_MFG_UPN_CI
ITM_SHIPTO_VNDR_CI
LOCATION_TBL_CI
PURCH_ITEM_ATTR_CI
REQUESTOR_TBL_CI
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Purchasing
Reference
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing
Items 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with
Items," Using Universal Item
Identifiers.
See Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing
Item Information," Selecting Vendors
Based on Item Ship To and Item
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-
Settle Common Information 9.1
PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Ship To
Locations.
See Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing
Purchasing Item Attributes, page 74.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-
Settle Common Information 9.1
PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Requesters.
Other Sources of Information
In the planning phase of your implementation, take advantage of all PeopleSoft sources of information, including the installation guides, table-loading sequences, data models, and business process maps. A complete list of these resources appears in the preface in the PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals
PeopleBook, with information about where to find the most current version of each.
See Also
"PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing Preface," page xxxvii
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Setup Manager
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Component Interfaces
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
9
This chapter provides an overview of user-definable fields and discusses how to set up user-definable fields.
Build process.
PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to define fields that can be attached to purchasing documents and passed through the system without affecting PeopleSoft Purchasing functions. You can populate user-defined fields using the PeopleSoft Application Designer or add them to browser pages for the end users. Because the structural design is provided, you do not need to extensively modify the system to take advantage of this feature.
System defined subrecords are available at header, line, schedule, and distribution levels in PeopleSoft
Purchasing. Each subrecord is delivered with a one-character field that can be edited, modified, and renamed to suit your needs. You can also add fields that you create to the subrecords.
The data from each level of a document's subrecord flows to downstream documents. For example, if you source a requisition to a purchase order, the subrecord for each level on the requisition carries over to the purchase order accordingly.
from multiple documents. For example, you may copy a new purchase order from existing requisitions.
Because you can copy lines from multiple requisitions to a single purchase order, the system does not copy the header subrecord from the requisition.
There are six subrecords for adding user-definable fields to purchasing transactions:
Subrecord Type
Header Subrecord
Line Subrecord
Schedule Subrecord
Distribution Subrecord
Receiving Subrecord
Subrecord Name
PUR_USR_HDR_SBR
PUR_USR_LIN_SBR
PUR_USR_SHP_SBR
PUR_USR_DST_SBR
PUR_USR_RV_SBR
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
11
Using User-Definable Fields Chapter 2
Subrecord Type
RTV Subrecord (return to vendor subrecord)
Subrecord Name
PUR_USR_RTV_SBR
To compile a listing of all of the PeopleSoft records that include these subrecords, you can use this sample
SQL to query the PeopleSoft database:
SELECT A.RECNAME, A.FIELDNAME, B.RECTYPE, B.OBJECTOWNERID
FROM PSRECFIELD A, PSRECDEFN B
WHERE A.RECNAME = B.RECNAME
AND A.FIELDNAME IN('PUR_USR_HDR_SBR', 'PUR_USR_LIN_SBR', 'PUR_USR_SHP_SBR', 'PUR_
⇒
USR_DST_SBR', 'PUR_USR_RV_SBR', 'PUR_USR_RTV_SBR')
Use PeopleSoft Application Designer to use the delivered fields, as well as to modify them or add new fields to the delivered subrecords.
You can add the fields to the pages and display them in the PeopleSoft Purchasing browser pages, or use them only behind the scenes. You can also populate the fields behind the scenes and then display them on the browser pages.
application data that already exists in the tables.
Only those with technical knowledge of PeopleSoft Application Designer and PeopleCode should modify or add to the delivered subrecords.
To compile a list of tables that must be altered by a data base administrator, you can use this sample SQL statement, altering the criteria "A.FIELDNAME =" to reference the subrecord modified. This SQL lists the tables and views for the Header subrecord, PUR_USR_HDR_SBR:
SELECT A.RECNAME, A.FIELDNAME, B.RECTYPE, B.OBJECTOWNERID
FROM PSRECFIELD A, PSRECDEFN B
WHERE A.RECNAME = B.RECNAME
AND A.FIELDNAME = 'PUR_USR_HDR_SBR'
AND B.RECTYPE IN (0, 1, 7)
ORDER BY B.RECTYPE, A.RECNAME
See Also
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer Developer's Guide
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleCode Developer's Guide
12 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
This chapter provides an overview of business units in PeopleSoft Purchasing and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
Establish PeopleSoft Purchasing business units.
Establish change options and approval rules.
Establish purchasing processing options.
Prepare PeopleSoft Purchasing value-added tax (VAT) environments.
A business unit is an operational subset of an organization that tracks and maintains its own set of requisitions and purchase orders. Each business unit has its own way of storing information and its own processing guidelines. PeopleSoft Purchasing business units share vendor, purchase order, and receiving information with PeopleSoft Payables business units in the same setID.
After you determine how many business units that you need and how to organize them, define them in the
PeopleSoft Purchasing system.
to PeopleSoft Purchasing, can help you determine the best way to define business units for the PeopleSoft
Purchasing implementation. PeopleSoft implementation personnel can also help you define the appropriate business unit structure.
Some purchasing transactions use business units as key identifiers. For example, you cannot create a single purchase order that includes items that have different business unit requests. Each business unit that is requesting items generates a separate purchase order.
Define business units in this order:
1. Define generic PeopleSoft business units.
2. Define PeopleSoft General Ledger business units.
3. Link PeopleSoft business units to PeopleSoft Purchasing.
4. Specify requisition-processing and purchase order-processing information for PeopleSoft Purchasing business units.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
13
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
5. Link PeopleSoft General Ledger business units to PeopleSoft Purchasing for general ledger distribution needs.
Specifying Responsibility
You can establish separate business units to specify areas of responsibility. For example, a department may be responsible for purchasing a particular type of item. You can establish a business unit specifically for this department. Using strategically created business units enables you to group purchases for analysis. The business unit configuration can also help you maintain the required level of accounting control.
Interunit Accounting
PeopleSoft Purchasing interunit accounting enables you to track interunit purchases among PeopleSoft
General Ledger business units. If you require this, designate each of the organizational entities as a
PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit. If you've centralized the procurement practices, you can define one
PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit that can generate charges to each PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit.
PeopleSoft General Ledger Considerations
A PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit must be associated with a PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit, although this does not have to be a one-to-one relationship. You can place multiple PeopleSoft Purchasing business units under one PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit, or you can charge multiple PeopleSoft
General Ledger business units from one PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit. Often, the PeopleSoft
Purchasing business units will be the same as the PeopleSoft General Ledger business units.
PeopleSoft Payables Considerations
To pass accounting information from PeopleSoft Purchasing to PeopleSoft Payables and through to
PeopleSoft General Ledger, you must install PeopleSoft Payables and PeopleSoft Purchasing in the same database. This requirement also applies if you want to use the matching functionality that PeopleSoft software provides.
You don't need a one-to-one relationship between a PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit and a PeopleSoft
Payables business unit. One PeopleSoft Payables business unit can process data for many PeopleSoft
Purchasing business units, and multiple PeopleSoft Payables business units can create vouchers for one
PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit. However, you must configure these business units to share the same set of vendors.
Vendors
A business unit can be a subset of the organization, but from purchasing and accounts payable perspectives, a business unit can also represent a group of vendors.
If you have multiple companies or subsidiaries with unique sets of vendor requirements, consider establishing separate business units for each set of requirements. You can share a set of vendors across business units, but you cannot share subsets of vendors. Within a PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit, you can access all of the vendors in the set that is assigned to that business unit, but you can't exclude subsets of vendors in that set.
14 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Interunit and Intraunit Accounting and ChartField Inheritance"
PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables 9.1 PeopleBook, "Running the Matching Process"
To define the PeopleSoft Purchasing business units, use the Purchasing Business Unit component
(BUS_UNIT_PM).
This section discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create PeopleSoft Purchasing business units.
Define request for quote (RFQ) required rules.
Define standard comments.
Define matching options.
Define dispatch options.
Set up VAT defaults.
Copy VAT default setup.
Create business unit options.
Define transaction document autonumbering options.
Page Name
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition
Definition Name
BUS_UNIT_TBL_PM
RFQ Required Rule
(request for quote required rule)
RFQ_REQUIRED_RULE
Navigation
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition,
Business Unit Definition
Usage
Create PeopleSoft
Purchasing business units or update existing ones.
Click the Go To RFQ
Required Rule button on the
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition page.
Define and view details about the RFQ required rule.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
15
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
Page Name
Standard Comments
Matching Options
Define Dispatch Options BUS_UNIT_PM_IMAGE
Entry Event Defaults
Definition Name
BUS_UNIT_PM_COMNT
BUS_UNIT_PM_MATCH
BUS_UNIT_PM_EE
VAT Defaults Setup (value added tax defaults setup)
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
Copy VAT Defaults From
(copy value added tax defaults from)
VAT_DFLT_SRCH_COPY
Navigation
Click the Edit Comments link on the Purchasing
Definition - Business Unit
Definition page.
Usage
Define standard comments to print on dispatched purchase orders.
Click the Matching link on the Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition page.
Define matching rules.
Click the Define Dispatch
Options link on the
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition page.
Define file directory locations for images that you want to print on purchase orders.
Click the Entry Event
Defaults link on the
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition page.
Select default entry events at the business unit level.
Note. You can access this page if entry events are enabled.
•
•
Click the VAT Default link on the Purchasing
Definition - Business
Unit Definition page.
Enter VAT defaults for the requisition, purchase orders,
RFQs, and procurement cards.
Set Up
Financials/Supply
Chain, Common
Definitions, VAT and
Intrastat, Value Added
Tax, VAT Defaults
Note. If you access this page by clicking the VAT
Default link on the
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition page, the VAT driver and
VAT driver keys are inherited from the PO
Business Unit Definition
(purchase order business unit definition) component and cannot be changed.
If you access this page by using the standard menu navigation, you can specify the VAT driver and any
VAT driver keys as applicable.
Click the Copy Defaults
From link on the VAT
Defaults Setup page.
Copy VAT defaults from one business unit to another.
16 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3
Page Name
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Options
Definition Name
BUS_UNIT_TBL_PM2
Purchasing Definition -
Document Numbering
BUS_UNIT_TBL_PM3
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Navigation
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition,
Business Unit Options
Usage
Create business unit options or update existing ones.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition,
Document Numbering
Define transaction document autonumbering options.
Access the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Definition page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business
Unit Related, Purchasing, Purchasing Definition, Business Unit Definition).
Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Definition page
When you access this page in Add mode, you can enter only the unit description, default setID, and short description. Enter this information and click the Create BU (create business unit) button, which appears only in Add mode, to create the business unit. Then, or if you access the page in Update/Display mode, the remaining fields on the page become available for entry.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
17
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
Select the processing option ID for this business unit to be used throughout the procurement cycle. Values are defined on the Purchasing Options - Purchasing
Options page. This defines options such as freight terms and payment terms for the business unit.
Select the location code for the physical location of this business unit. The system uses this code to derive the organization address that prints on dispatched transactions. Define values on the Location - Location Definition page.
Select the code for the location where invoices are sent for this business unit.
Define values on the Location - Location Definition page. By default, this information appears on transactions that are created for this business unit.
Enter the number of days that a requisition or purchase order, or a canceled requisition or purchase order, must remain open after its last update activity before it is eligible for closure.
Cancel and close days enable you to delay the closure of requisitions and purchase orders after they are canceled or entirely received. If you are using
PeopleSoft Payables, you can also use cancel and close days to delay closure after requisitions or purchase orders are invoiced.
order reconciliation and has no relationship to the close days value on the Close
Short Run control pages.
(PeopleSoft/general ledger)
Select to enable transactions for this business unit to be posted to the general ledger and to link this business unit to a VAT entity. The GL Unit (general ledger unit) field becomes available for entry.
unit)
Select a PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit. By default, this business unit appears on transaction distribution lines for this PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit.
If you are linking this PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit to a VAT entity, enter the applicable PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit. You can access this link using the PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit. You can't directly link a
PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit to a VAT entity.
management unit)
Select the default PeopleSoft Asset Management business unit for the transactions that this PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit creates. When you create a purchasing transaction, the PeopleSoft Asset Management business unit appears by default if the item is an asset. You can override this information at the transaction level.
Select if most of the asset purchases are capital items.
payable unit)
Select the PeopleSoft Payables business unit that is to be used on evaluated receipt settlement (ERS) purchases.
18 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
use tax for evaluated receipt settlement orders)
Select if sales and use tax (SUT) should accrue for any ERS orders that this business unit creates.
sourcing unit)
Select the default PeopleSoft Strategic Sourcing (SS) business unit that is to be used for this PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit.
multiple PeopleSoft Purchasing business units, PeopleSoft Strategic Sourcing copies requisitions from multiple PeopleSoft Purchasing business units into an event.
Select the rate type to be used for currency conversion. By default, the currency code and rate type apply to all purchasing transactions for this business unit.
Select to integrate with a third-party tax vendor for tax processing. The system calculates tax from the third-party tax vendor (Vertex or Taxware) when it creates purchase orders online or when sourcing to a purchase order.
When you select this check box, depending on the tax vendor that you select, certain fields appear in the group box below this check box.
Taxware) on the Installation Options - Overall page.
Taxware Group Box
This group box is available only if third-party Taxware or Vertex software is installed, and if the Tax Vendor check box is selected.
Enter the tax vendor company code. This field appears for these third-party tax products: Vertex Q Series, Vertex O Series, and Taxware Sales and Use Tax.
The company code that you enter in this field passes information to the thirdparty Taxware or Vertex software as input parameters.
Enter the organization. This field appears instead of the Company field for the
Taxware Enterprise third-party tax product.
Enter the tax vendor division code. This field appears for these third-party tax products: Vertex Q Series, Vertex O Series, and Taxware Sales and Use Tax.
The division code passes information to the third-party Taxware or Vertex software as input parameters.
Enter the tax vendor department. This field appears only for the Vertex O Series third-party tax product.
The department code passes information to the third-party Taxware or Vertex software as input parameters.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
19
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
Select this option to associate the freight with the tax vendor product code and to indicate applicable tax rates.
RFQ Required Rule
Use this group box to define a threshold line amount and RFQ required rule that, when the amount is exceeded or the rule is met, requires a requisition item to go through the RFQ cycle before it is included on a purchase order.
triggers that an RFQ is required to source the requisition. When a user exceeds the threshold amount for a requisition line, the system resets the RFQ Required check box to selected for that line on the requisition.
For example, if you are buying something and it costs more than 1000 USD, the system requires that you get a couple of bids before it will source it to the recommended or specified vendor.
(request for quote required rule)
Select an RFQ rule from the rules defined in the RFQ Required Rules component.
Click the Go To RFQ Required Rule button to access the RFQ Required Rule page, where you can define and view details about the RFQ required rule.
See Also
Purchasing VAT Environments, page 57
Chapter 24, "Closing Requisitions," page 575
Chapter 10, "Using Entry Events," page 225
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Financials and Supply Chain
Management Common Definitions," Setting Up Locations
Access the RFQ Required Rule page (click the Go To RFQ Required Rule button on the Purchasing
Definition - Business Unit Definition page).
20 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
RFQ Required Rule page
Use this page to define ChartField values that will set the RFQ Required option to Yes for requisitions created online or through the Requisition Loader process. You can also define the RFQ Required option in the
Purchasing Item Attributes or Item Category component when an RFQ is required any time that the item or category is specified on a requisition.
Some organizations require RFQ processing whenever a specific ChartField value is referenced on a requisition. For example, whenever a specified project is entered on a requisition, the funding requirements of the project require that the request go out for bid. The RFQ Required Rule page enables you to define the
RFQ Required flag based on that ChartField value. When a requisition is created, the system checks the
ChartField values that you define on this page and sets the RFQ Required option accordingly.
request for quote required flag to no if contract exists)
Select to bypass the RFQ cycle if a contract exists.
the system applies the RFQ rule and you select this check box.
Select to supply by default the contract ID to the requisition line.
See Also
Chapter 26, "Managing Requests for Quotes," page 609
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
21
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
Access the Standard Comments page (click the Edit Comments link on the Purchasing Definition - Business
Unit Definition page).
The comments that you enter on this page are printed on dispatched purchase orders if you select the Print BU
Comments (print business unit comments) check box on the Dispatch Purchase Orders page. You can set up these comments to contain the terms and conditions for purchase orders for this business unit.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Setting Up Standard Comments
Chapter 31, "Dispatching and Printing Purchase Orders," page 935
Access the Matching Options page (click the Matching link on the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit
Definition page).
Select the default matching rules for this business unit. If matching rules are defined at the vendor level, those rules will override business unit-level matching rules. You can override both the business unit and vendor level matching rules on the purchase order.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Establishing Matching and Document Association Options
PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables 9.1 PeopleBook, "Running the Matching Process"
Access the Define Dispatch Options page (click the Define Dispatch Options link on the Purchasing
Definition - Business Unit Definition page).
22 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Define Dispatch Options page
(purchase order dispatch image location)
Select to print an image (logo) on purchase orders, and enter the directory location of the image file.
(print signature on purchase order) and PO
dispatch signature location)
Select to print a signature on purchase orders, and enter the directory location of the signature file.
Select the report template to use with this business unit to dispatch a purchase order. You use the report template to identify a XML Publisher report layout.
The template provides a common report layout when dispatching purchase orders for both PeopleSoft eProcurement and Purchasing.
If the Template ID field on this page is blank, then the system uses the default template on the XML Publisher Report Definition page ( Reporting Tools, XML
Publisher, Report Definition, Template).
This field appears only if you have selected the Enable XML Publisher check box on the Purchasing page of the Installation Options component. This check box selects the Oracle XML Publisher to format and print purchase orders during the dispatch process for both PeopleSoft Purchasing and PeopleSoft eProcurement. You use Oracle XML Publisher for reporting. It is a Java-based product within the Oracle Fusion Middleware family.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
23
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
.BMP
.JPG
.GIF
.EPS
Others
Image Locations
•
•
Consider these points when working with images and their locations:
•
For Structured Query Report (SQR) processes to work as designed, you must store associated images in external files.
The folder in which you store external image files must be shared.
For Microsoft Windows NT environments, define the directory locations using the universal naming convention (for example, \\server_name\folder_name\
…
).
When you run the PO Dispatch/Print (purchase order dispatch and print) process (POPO005), the image file to print on the purchase order is determined by the output format that you select on the Process Scheduler
Request page. The PO Dispatch/Print process takes the image file name that you enter here and parses out the file extension information. The process uses this file extension to determine the image type that the PRINT-
IMAGE command uses.
This table describes file extension values and their compatible image types to be used in the PRINT-IMAGE command:
File Extension
No extension
Image Type
BMP-FILE
BMP-FILE
JPEG-FILE
GIF-FILE
EPS-FILE
HPGL-FILE
The next two tables describe output type options that are available for the PO Dispatch/Print process on the
Process Scheduler Request page, along with their compatible output formats, output file extensions, and image types.
This first table represents output types for web, file, and email:
Output Format
CSV
Output File Extension
.CSV
Image Type That Works
None
HP .LIS
HPGL-FILE
24 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Output Format
HTM
LP
OTHER
PS
SPF
Output File Extension
.HTM
.LIS
.LIS
.LIS
.SPF
This table represents output types for a printer:
Output Format
HP
LP
OTHER
PS
Output File Extension
None
None
None
None
Image Type That Works
JPEG-FILE, GIF-FILE, BMP-FILE
None
None
JPEG-FILE
EPS-FILE
BMP-FILE
Image Type That Works
HPGL-FILE
None
None
EPS-FILE
Printing Images
To print an image:
1. Check the PSSQR.INI file to verify that the SQRDIR is set to the path where the SQR executables are stored.
2. Ensure that the drive that is storing the image has the correct permissions set.
3. Verify that the image is not corrupt.
4. In a UNIX environment, you can print only EPS-FILE image types.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
25
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
See Also
Chapter 31, "Dispatching and Printing Purchase Orders," page 935
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Preparing to Dispatch by Fax and Email
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: XML Publisher for PeopleSoft Enterprise
Chapter 3
Access the VAT Defaults Setup page (click the VAT Default link on the Purchasing Definition - Business
Unit Definition page or select Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Common Definitions, VAT and Intrastat,
Value Added Tax, VAT Defaults).
You can insert rows for any or all of the VAT driver keys, as well as the VAT country or state. You can also delete any existing rows.
If you are inserting a row for a VAT driver key, select this check box to copy all the VAT defaults from the previous row to the new row. Otherwise, all VAT default fields for the new row will be blank.
Click to access the VAT Defaults Copy From page, which you can use to copy
VAT default specifications from another key combination for the same VAT driver.
value-added tax defaults sub-search)
Click to return to the Purchasing Definition component.
(value-added tax reporting country)
Select the country or countries for which you are defining VAT defaults. For regular defaults, defaults are obtained for the VAT reporting country. For service
VAT treatment defaults, defaults are obtained for the supplier's location country.
As applicable, select the state for which you want to define VAT default values.
Enter the effective date, status and, if applicable, the VAT setID.
apportionment control)
When you create purchase orders for a PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit, the system selects a default business unit for VAT recovery and rebate calculations based on this value. Business units have different VAT recovery and rebate percentages based on their locations. Values are:
Dist GL BU (distribution general ledger business unit): Selects the PeopleSoft
General Ledger business on the purchase order distribution line.
Txn BU (transaction business unit): Selects the business unit on the purchase order header.
Txn GL BU (transaction general ledger business unit): Selects the PeopleSoft
General Ledger business unit on the purchase order header.
26 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
See the section on VAT fields for details about the fields and VAT drivers that appear.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"
Access the Copy VAT Defaults From page (click the VAT Default link on the Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition page and click the Copy Defaults From link on the VAT Defaults Setup page).
Enter the criteria by which you want to search.
Click to retrieve the results based on the criteria entered.
Select a link for any of the results returned to view the details of the VAT setup on the Copy VAT Defaults Setup page. When you have viewed the details, you can click Copy to copy the VAT setup. The system returns you to the VAT
Defaults Setup page with the copied fields.
Or you can select the appropriate option for any of the results returned and click
Copy to copy from that row. The system returns you to the VAT Defaults Setup page with the copied fields.
Access the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Options page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business
Unit Related, Purchasing, Purchasing Definition, Business Unit Options).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
27
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
28
Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Options page
(purchase order item vendor security option)
Select a value to indicate how the system handles edits to item and vendor combinations on purchase order lines:
Edit Required Must Use Item ID: A valid item ID with an established item and vendor relationship is required for each purchase order line. You can't order an item by description and must use an item that is defined in the Item Vendor tables.
Edit Required When Use Item ID: An item ID isn't required on the purchase order line, and you can order an item by description. However, if you order by item ID, the item must exist in an Item Vendor table. The difference between this and the No Edit Required value is that you are restricted to items that have an active purchase order vendor established.
No Edit Required: An item ID isn't required on the purchase order line, and you can order an item by description. If you order by item ID, you can order any item that is established in the Item tables for PeopleSoft Purchasing, even if no item and vendor relationship is established.
Select the origin code to be used on ERS invoices so that you can process ERS matching by origin in PeopleSoft Payables. PeopleSoft Purchasing can also use this code for reporting to identify transaction origins.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Enter a number of days by which receiving dates can be adjusted. If you don't specify a value, receiving dates by default become the current system date and cannot be changed.
For example, entering 7 enables you to enter a receipt date that is plus or minus seven days from the current date. This is useful when an item is received and you don't have time to enter the receipt on the same business day. Without a receipt date adjustment value, you must enter the receipt using the next business day's date. Consequently, the entry could show a late delivery in the records when the delivery was actually on time.
Bradstreet number)
Enter a DUNs number.
schedule for the received items. Values are:
FIFO (first-in-first-out): Purchase order quantities are fulfilled based on the sequence in which they are added to the purchase order schedule. This is the default receipt allocation type.
Prorate: Purchase order quantities are fulfilled by calculating the percentage of received quantity to the total purchase order line quantity. The received quantity is then allocated to each distribution line using that percentage. This is for noninventory items only.
For example, if the schedule quantity is 300 and the schedule has three distribution lines, each distribution has a quantity of 100. If you receive a quantity of 75, each distribution is allocated a received quantity of 25.
Specify: Allocations are fulfilled by the user manually entering the receipt quantity or amount at the distribution level when receiving purchase order schedules with multiple distributions. This enables the specific allocation of the receipt quantity or amount by open purchase order distribution quantity or amount.
you create a receipt for this PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit.
Select the date on which to base the receipt date exchange rate for purchase order receipts and receipts that are not purchase order receipts
Values are:
PO Date (purchase order date): Select to base the exchange rate on the purchase order header date.
Receipt Date: Select to base the exchange rate on the receipt date.
order price edit)
Select the purchase price edit: Values are:
•
Error
•
•
None
Warning
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
29
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
(return to vendor dispatch option)
Select the dispatch method to use as this business unit's default value for the return to vendor (RTV) functionality. This functionality determines the default value for the return to vendor function on how the RTV will be dispatched to the supplier. The system uses the dispatch options that you define for the business unit as default values when user preferences are set by default to the business unit
RTV dispatch option. When you save information on this page, the settings you define become effective.
RTV dispatch option values for a business unit are:
Dispatch When Shipped: Select to submit the RTV Dispatch process automatically when all lines on the RTV have been shipped.
Manual: Select to indicate that the RTV transaction requires collaboration between groups and that you must submit the RTV Dispatch/Print process by using the Process Scheduler. This is the default value for the field.
See Chapter 40, "Managing Vendor Returns," Source Information Tab, page 1164.
See Chapter 40, "Managing Vendor Returns," Inventory Return Records, page
1145 and Chapter 40, "Managing Vendor Returns," Inventory Return Records, page 1145.
inventory ship option)
Select the return to vendor ship option that you want to use as this business unit's default value for the Inventory Process field on the RTV line.
RTV Inventory ship option values are:
Express: Select to use the RTV express option to process purchasing and inventory data collection transactions at the same time. This means that you can perform inventory issue (automatic issue) or adjustment (automatic adjustment) actions from within the Purchasing RTV component.
associated Inventory business unit is defined as a Warehouse Management
System (WMS) type. You define the warehouse setting using the Use External
Warehouse Control check box on the Business Unit Options page for Inventory.
Fulfillment: Select to set the user's preference to perform Inventory fulfillment processing for RTV transactions. This enables the user to create an Inventory material stock request transaction and to process it through Inventory fulfillment processing. The Fulfillment value is valid only for RTV processing when RTV line disposition is Ship.
Manual: Select to indicate that the RTV ship transaction must be completed manually. This option requires that you perform the Inventory Express manually to remove the items from inventory.
30 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
inventory destroy option)
Select the return to the vendor destroy option that you want to use for this business unit's default value for the Inventory Process field on the RTV line.
RTV Inventory destroy option values are:
Express: Select to use the RTV express option for the RTV lines that have a disposition of Destroy. This means that the user can perform Inventory adjustment (automatic adjustment) actions from within the Purchasing RTV component.
Manual: Select to indicate that the RTV transaction must be manually adjusted within inventory. When you use the Manual option, the system does not perform the RTV adjustment function. You must use the Inventory Adjustment component to adjust balances for inventory returns that are to be destroyed.
Additional Business Unit Options
multicurrency requisitions)
Select to enable requisition lines with different currencies. Item-vendor pricing may be in a currency other than the business unit currency. The vendor currency is automatically converted to the business unit currency for requisition approval purposes. When the requisition lines are sourced to a purchase order, the system uses the requisition currency (if sourced using Requisition Selection with Define
PO = 'Y'); otherwise, the vendor currency is used.
(calculate value-added tax on requisitions)
Select to enable VAT to process and calculate onto requisitions and to pass the
VAT information from the requisition to other transactions in the procurement process.
(allow multicurrency purchase order)
Select to enable purchase orders to be entered in the vendor currency, even if the vendor currency differs from the business unit currency. If you do not select this check box, and requisitions are entered in a currency different from the business unit currency, the system creates purchase orders in the business unit currency.
The system converts requisition prices and amounts to the business unit currency of the purchase order.
(default contract on requisition)
Select to automatically supply a contract to a requisition. The system searches for and ensures that the correct contract is selected for use with the requisition.
Along with selecting this check box, the system verifies that the Auto Default check box is selected on the Contract page. This makes the contract available to automatically default onto requisition and purchase order transactions.
You can override contracts that have been selected by the system. This enables you to receive contract prices for requisition items and to more accurately track budgets and pre-encumberance balances.
See Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Contract Pricing for
Requisitions and Purchase Orders, page 436.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
31
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
Select to enable attributes to be established for any item in this business unit. The business unit item attributes override those that you establish for the item in the
Item Definition - Purchasing Attributes component.
must maintain item-specific attributes by business unit as well as by setID. For example, suppose that several of the business units normally purchase the same item, but each business unit has a different lead time for this item. If you enable business unit item attributes, the lead time that the business unit sets overrides the default lead time, and each business unit can set a different lead time for the same item.
Select to enable this business unit to receive quantities for a purchase order line and cascade that quantity over multiple schedules. For example, assume that you have one purchase order line for 150 items and three schedules for 50 items, each to be delivered a month apart. When the first shipment arrives for receiving, a quantity of 75 items exists. Rather than returning 25 of the items and waiting for the next shipment, you can receive 50 on the first schedule and cascade 25 to the second schedule. In effect, you receive these 25 items early and deduct them from the second schedule. When the next shipment arrives, you receive the remaining 25 items. You can cascade line quantities until an entire order is filled.
are using the Receiver Load Application Engine process (PO_RECVLOAD) to build receivers from loaded data. This check box is typically used to load bar code transactional data into the system, which builds the data into receivers and cascades the quantities down to the purchase order lines and schedules appropriately.
32 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
(default contract onto purchase order)
Select to indicate that the system should automatically search for appropriate contracts for purchase order lines. The check box applies only to manually created purchase orders, and not orders created using a batch process. This automates the process of selecting the most appropriate contract for use with manually created purchase orders. The default value for the field is deselected.
•
•
If you select to search for contracts, the system begins its search for contracts with process types of Purchase Order, General, or Release-To-Single PO Only and that are in a current version with an Approved status. If the check box is deselected, the system does not search for a contract. If multiple contracts exist, the system selects the contract where the status is Approved, the version is current, and with the most recent (but not future) contract begin date.
After validating the contract and using it on the transaction, the system:
•
Updates released amounts and quantities.
Creates a contract event.
Updates the transaction with contract information.
This option does not apply to PeopleSoft Services Procurement project roles on the contract. Services Procurement searches for an applicable contract on the work order, and uses it on a purchase order regardless of the Default Contract
Flag check box value. This option also does not apply to blanket purchase orders.
See Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Contract Pricing for
Requisitions and Purchase Orders, page 436.
(accrue non/purchase order receipts)
Select to enable this business unit to accrue receipts for noninventory items without a purchase order.
Select to require that inspection information be entered apart from receiving information. Inspections can be performed on the receiving dock or in the inspection location to which the inventory item is routed.
Select to enable this business unit to accrue receipts for expensed items without invoices. When you run the Receipt Accrual process (PO_REVACCR), receipts for which you have not yet received an invoice are included in the process.
Select to include inventory workflow notifications for return to vendor processing. The system notifies users defined in the INV MGR role that goods are ready to be shipped back to the vendor. The system generates an email notification when the return disposition is Ship or Destroy for Inventory RTVs.
You can override the value for individual vendors using the Return to Vendor
Defaults page in PeopleSoft Purchasing.
See Chapter 40, "Managing Vendor Returns," Entering RTV Defaults, page 1170.
Select to enable purchasing documents that are created in this business unit to be exempt from sales and use tax.
Enter the tax exempt identifier. The ID field becomes available when you select the Tax Exempt check box.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
33
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
(return to vendor adjust source)
Select to enable the adjustment of source documents when items are returned to the vendor for replacement. If you select this check box, the net receipt quantity is adjusted down by the return to vendor (RTV) quantity using this formula:
(Net Receipt Quantity) = (Net Receipt Quantity)
–
(RTV Qty)
of measure conversion rate)
Select to calculate the purchase order standard quantity using the current conversion rate at receiving or time of purchase order change. If you do not select this check box, or if you do not select the option at receiving or purchase order change, the system uses the purchase order conversion rate.
PeopleSoft Inventory is not installed, receiving always uses the current conversion rate and won't update the purchase order distribution. Purchase order change uses the current conversion rate and updates the purchase order distributions.
to vendor adjust fees)
Select to include adjustment fees when items are returned to the vendor. These fees could include restocking fees or other fees that are imposed on the transaction.
(allow purchase order deletion)
Select to enable authorized users to delete purchase orders in the selected business unit.
to vendor reopen purchase order)
Select to change the purchase order schedule status to Open when items are returned to the vendor for replacement. When the items are reshipped, this check box enables you to receive the items against the original schedule.
orders, and you will not be able to select this check box. This functionality is not available when you are using commitment control.
Select to enable authorized users to delete requisitions in the selected business unit.
Sourcing Controls
tolerance/tolerance over) and% Unit Price
tolerance/tolerance under)
Enter the percentage over and under by which the purchase order price can vary from the requisition price. By default, these values appear on requisitions that are created for this business unit.
34 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Liquidate Method
Select to indicate that the purchase order business unit is liquidated by quantity when distributed by quantity. If you do not select this check box, the Comm.
Cntrl. Budget Processor process automatically liquidates pre-encumbrance and encumbrance balances by amount only.
Select a default liquidate method for the purchase order business unit. You can liquidate by quantity or amount.
quantity default liquidate method.
See Also
Chapter 22, "Tracking Requisition Changes," page 561
Chapter 39, "Inspecting Received Items," page 1125
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," page 807
Chapter 41, "Using Receipt Accrual," page 1189
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Creating Change Templates
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Creating Change Templates
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Origin Codes
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"
PeopleSoft Enterprise eSupplier Connection 9.1 PeopleBook, "Acknowledging Purchase Orders Online"
Chapter 37, "Receiving Shipments," Maintaining Receipt Distribution Information, page 1082
Access the Purchasing Definition - Document Numbering page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business
Unit Related, Purchasing, Purchasing Definition, Document Numbering).
Select Requisitions, Purchase Orders, Receivers, Requests For Quotes, and Return to Vendors to enable autonumbering for the associated transaction. The last number that was assigned for each transaction appears.
You define autonumbering for contracts on the Set Controls - Contracts page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
35
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Define purchase order change options and approval requirements.
Define requisition change options and approval requirements.
See Also
Chapter 30, "Approving Purchase Orders," page 911
Chapter 21, "Approving Requisitions," page 535
Page Name
PO Change Options
(purchase order change options)
Definition Name
BUS_UNIT_PO_APPR
Req Change Options
(requisition change options)
BUS_UNIT_REQ_APPR
Navigation
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition, PO
Change Options
Usage
Define purchase order change options and approval requirements for each business unit.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition, Req
Change Options
Define requisition change options and approval requirements for each business unit.
Access the PO Approval Options page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business Unit Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition, PO Change Options).
36 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
PO Change Options page (1 of 2)
PO Change Options page (2 of 2)
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
37
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
•
•
•
Select a change template for purchase orders within this business unit. A purchase order change template identifies which field changes on a purchase order cause the system to generate the following actions:
Create a change order if the fields are changed after a purchase order is dispatched.
Record change tracking.
Require re-approval of the purchase order or purchase order line using the approval workflow framework.
To create a change template for purchase orders, use the change template type of
Purchase Order.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook
, "Defining Procurement Options," Creating Change Templates.
Select the change order map template. The Purchase Order Acknowledgements process uses this template to determine the fields that can be changed by the supplier on the purchase order acknowledgements pages using the EDX process.
acknowledgement pages.
Approval Framework Control
Use the Approval Framework Control group box to enable the Approval Workflow Framework for approving purchase orders at the header level, line level, or both. For the approval of purchase orders in PeopleSoft
Purchasing, you can choose between two workflow methods; the approval framework or the PeopleTools
Workflow Technology.
PeopleSoft Purchasing.
If approvals are not required for either the Approval Framework or Virtual Approver, the system automatically approves stockless purchase orders. The orders are approved even if the Create POs in
Approved Status option is deselected on the run control. The system ignores the buyer's purchase order creation status in the sourcing programs and only applies the run control value.
If approvals are required, the system goes through the stockless item approvals the same as it does for any other type of item where it checks the exception codes to bypass approvals.
38 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
workflow approval required)
Select to indicate that you want to use the approval framework for purchase order approvals. When you select this check box, you initiate PeopleSoft Approval
Framework and end the use of PeopleTools Virtual Approver (part of
PeopleTools workflow technology). Any current pending purchase order transactions will finish the approval process using the Virtual Approver. From this action forward, the system uses the approval workflow framework for new purchase orders.
Warning!
After initiating the approval framework, you cannot activate Virtual
Approver again.
When you select this check box, the system displays an additional group box on this page with the title Workflow Approval Not Required. This group box enables you to determine what sources of purchase orders do not require approval; for example, purchase orders created by a contract release may not need approval since a contract is in place. Both new purchase orders and changes to existing purchase orders are included in this group box.
Select to indicate that purchase orders require re-approval after the quantity or price has been decreased.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
Automatically Approve Change Requests
purchase order acknowledgements source)
Select to automatically approve change order requests that are generated by online purchase order acknowledgements (POAs) that a supplier enters directly into the system. This check box is selected by default.
Connection.
Select to automatically approve change order requests that are generated by other change order sources such as the Close Backorders process, PeopleSoft Supply
Planning, PeopleSoft Order Management (direct shipment), PeopleSoft eProcurement (change requests), and PeopleSoft Manufacturing.
Workflow Approval Not Required
This group box only displays if you choose to use the approval workflow framework for purchase order approvals. Define the purchase order input sources that do not require approval by selecting the Not Required check box on the row.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
39
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
For newly created purchase orders, select the input sources do not require approval. The sources are:
Contract Releases: includes contract referenced purchase orders (CON) and contract releases.
PAR Location Replenishment: (CRT)
Manual and Expedite Requisitions
Order Management Referenced: includes batch and online sourcing (OMR).
Planning System: (PLL)
Request for Quotation: (RFQ)
Production/Shop Floor: from PeopleSoft Manufacturing (SFL)
Services Work Order: work orders from PeopleSoft Services Procurement
(SPO)
AutoSelect / Quick Source: purchase orders sourced from approved requisitions (SRC) and PeopleSoft eProcurement requisitions (EPO).
Work Order Management: work orders from PeopleSoft Maintenance
Management (WKM)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
For changes to an existing purchase order, select the input sources that do not require approval. The sources are:
Contract Release to Single PO: (BPA)
PAR Replenishment/Close Backorders:(CRT)
Order Management Referenced: includes batch and online sourcing (DRP).
PO Acknowledgements: (EDX)
Planning System: (PLN)
Production/Shop Floor: from PeopleSoft Manufacturing (PRD)
eProcurement Change Request: (REQ)
Virtual Approver Control
Use the Virtual Approver Control group box to determine your settings for approving purchase orders using the Virtual Approver feature. The Virtual Approver feature is part of the PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
For the approval of purchase orders in PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can choose between two workflow methods; PeopleSoft Approval Framework or the PeopleTools Workflow Technology. The Virtual Approver enables you to approve the purchase order at the header level. You can route a purchase order for approval based on the amount, the ChartFields used, or both. To implement workflow approvals, define the roles, rules, and routings using the PeopleSoft Application Designer, PeopleCode, and Workflow Administrator. Your system is delivered with basic approval rules already established.
40 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Required check box on this page. You can only choose one workflow approval method for purchase orders.
approval business process)
Select the business process for which you are establishing approval rules. This business process corresponds to the approval rule set. Define approval rule sets in
PeopleSoft Workflow Administrator.
amount approval needed)
Select to indicate that the purchase order amount should be approved.
amount approval rule set)
Select the approval rule set to be used to apply purchase order amount approvals.
Select to indicate that the purchase order ChartField should be approved.
(purchase order
ChartField approval needed)
order ChartField approval rule)
Select the approval rule set to be used to apply purchase order ChartField approvals.
When you select either the PO Amount Approval Needed (purchase order amount approval needed) or PO
ChartField Approval Needed (purchase order ChartField approval needed) check box, the system forces purchase order transactions to flow through the approval process before continuing through the purchasing life cycle.
If you do not select either of these check boxes, the purchasing authorizations that are defined on the User
Preferences - Procurement: Purchase Order Authorizations page determine approval statuses. In this case, an authorized user can change a transaction approval status from Open to Approved. Although you define approval processes through PeopleSoft Workflow, you do not have to implement worklist routings to approve purchase orders. You can use designated online pages for purchase order approvals if you do not use the worklist routing option in PeopleSoft Workflow.
When a purchase order is created for a buyer whose default purchase order status is Open on the Buyer Table page, the purchase order default status is set to Open. To approve the purchase order, an authorized buyer must set the purchase order status to Pending Approval or Approved. At this point, if neither amount nor
ChartField approvals are required, the purchase order status changes to Approved.
If at least one type of approval is required, the purchase order status starts at Pending Approval and remains in this status until all applicable approvals are complete. After receiving the required approvals, the purchase order status changes to Approved.
When a purchase order is created for a buyer whose default purchase order status is Pending
Approval/Approved, the purchase order default status is set to either Approved (if neither type of approval is needed) or Pending Approval (if one or both types of approval are needed).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
41
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
PO Create Exceptions
Use the PO Create Exceptions (purchase order create exceptions) fields to define exceptions for groups of purchase orders created in batch. These exceptions are grouped based on the sourcing process where the purchase order originated. When you select a sourcing process for approval exception, the system overwrites the approval options that you define on this page. If you want one of the approval options to remain in effect, select the appropriate check box.
These settings can force only the exception of an approval that is required for a purchase order. It can't force an approval that isn't required. If a purchase order is modified online after a selected exempt process creates it, the purchase order is subject to the general approval rules that you select on this page.
order process)
Select the sourcing process that you want to be exempt from the approval options. Values are Auto Select,Contract PO's (contract purchase orders), Online
Source,PAR Location Replenishment,Planning Load,Production Load, and
Request for Quotation.
(amount approval needed)
Select to continue amount approval for this process.
Select to continue ChartField approval for this process.
(ChartField approval needed)
If you use requisitions to designate the authority to purchase, you may want to create purchase orders automatically in Approved status when the purchase orders are sourced from approved requisitions. In this case, insert exception rows for AutoSelect and Online Source and clear the Amt Appr Needed and ChrtFld
Appr Needed check boxes. Purchase orders that are created from these sources are now exempt from workflow approval requirements and are automatically created with a status of Approved.
When purchase orders are created from contracts, amounts are already approved. However, if the business unit rule says that ChartFields on the purchase orders must be approved, the purchase order must go through the same approval process as online purchase orders.
Suppose that you create a purchase order using the AutoSelect Requisitions process (PO_REQSORC). If you define amount and ChartField approval exceptions for this process, the purchase order is created with a status of Approved. If a buyer changes a price on the purchase order online and thereby changes the amount of the purchase order, the purchase order status changes to Pending Approval. At this point, the business unit approval rules apply to the modified purchase order. Once a purchase order is modified, these rules apply regardless of the purchase order source and exceptions that are defined.
See Also
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," page 807
Chapter 6, "Using Workflow," page 117
PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Workflow Technology
42 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Access the Req Approval Options page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business Unit Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition, Req Change Options).
Requisition Change Options page
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
43
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
(requisition change order option)
Select a specific category of requisitions that are eligible for change order tracking.
Values are:
A: (Approved Requisitions)
N: (No Change Orders)
S: (Sourced)
V:(Valid Budget Checked)
requisition change order templates to track changes based on approval, budget, or sourcing statuses. PeopleSoft Purchasing provides three options to determine when a requisition change order should be tracked depending on an organization's business controls. For example, changes to the requisition affect only the buying organization after the requisition has been sourced to a purchase order; however, departmental controls may require that you track changes after requisition approval has occurred.
(requisition change order template)
•
Select a change template for requisitions within this business unit. A requisition change template identifies which field changes on a requisition cause the system to generate the following actions:
Create a change request if the fields are changed after a requisition has been sourced to a purchase order.
•
•
Record change tracking.
Require re-approval of the requisition or requisition line using the approval workflow framework.
To create a change template for requisitions, use the change template type of
Requisition.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook
, "Defining Procurement Options," Creating Change Templates.
Approval Framework Control
Use the Approval Framework Control group box to enable the approval framework for approving requisitions at the header level, line level, or both. For the approval of requisitions in PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can choose between two workflow methods; the approval framework or the PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
44 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
approval required)
Select to indicate that you want to use the approval workflow framework for requisition approvals. When you select this check box, you initiate the approval workflow framework and end the use of PeopleTools Virtual Approver (part of
PeopleTools workflow technology). Any current pending requisition transactions will finish the approval process using the Virtual Approver. From this action forward, the system uses the approval workflow framework for new requisitions.
Warning!
After initiating the approval workflow framework, you cannot activate Virtual Approver again.
Select to indicate that requisitions require re-approval after the quantity or price has been decreased.
Virtual Approver Control
Use the Virtual Approver Control group box to determine your settings for approving requisitions using the
Virtual Approver feature. The Virtual Approver feature is part of the PeopleTools Workflow Technology. For the approval of requisitions in PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can choose between two workflow methods; the
Approval Framework or the PeopleTools Workflow Technology. The Virtual Approver enables you to approve the requisition at the header level. You can route a requisition for approval based on the amount, the
ChartFields used, or both. To implement workflow approvals, define the roles, rules, and routings using the
PeopleSoft Application Designer, PeopleCode, and Workflow Administrator. Your system is delivered with basic approval rules already established.
approval business process)
Select the business process for which you are establishing approval rules. This business process corresponds to the approval rule set. Define approval rule sets in
PeopleSoft Workflow Administrator.
approval rule)
Select the approval rule set to be used to apply requisition amount approvals.
(requisition ChartField approval rule)
Select the approval rule set to be used to apply requisition ChartField approvals.
Selecting the Req Amount Approval Needed or Req ChartField Approval Needed check box forces requisition transactions to flow through the approval process before continuing through the purchasing life cycle.
If you do not select one of these check boxes, the purchasing authorizations that are defined on the User
Preferences - Procurement: Requisition Authorizations page determine approval statuses. In this case, an authorized user can change a transaction approval status from Open to Approved. Although you define approval processes through PeopleSoft Workflow, you do not have to implement worklist routings to approve requisitions. You can use designated online pages for requisition approvals if you do not use the worklist routing option in PeopleSoft Workflow.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
45
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
See Also
Chapter 6, "Using Workflow," page 117
Chapter 21, "Approving Requisitions," page 535
PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Workflow Technology
Chapter 3
To define purchasing processing options, use the Purchasing Processing Options component
(BUS_UNIT_OPT_PM).
This section discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Define purchasing processing options.
Define transaction dispatch methods.
Define freight options.
Define purchase order acknowledgement (POA) settings.
Define VAT service treatment setup.
Define reason codes for change requests and change orders.
Page Name
Purchasing Options
Dispatch Method
Freight Option
Definition Name
BUS_UNIT_OPT_PM
BU_OPT_PM_DISP
BU_OPT_PM_FREIGHT
Navigation
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Options
Usage
Define purchasing options and transaction processing criteria for each PeopleSoft
Purchasing business unit.
You can override these options during transaction processing.
Click the Dispatch Method link on the Purchasing
Options page.
Define transaction dispatch methods for purchase orders, RFQs, RTVs, contracts, and replenishment requests.
Click the Freight Option link on the Purchasing
Options page.
Define freight options, rule codes, and charge methods.
46 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3
Page Name
POA Settings (purchase order acknowledgements settings)
Definition Name
POA_DEF_BU_SP
VAT Defaults Setup (valueadded tax defaults setup)
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
Service VAT Treatment
Defaults Setup (service value-added tax treatment defaults setup)
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
Procurement Change
Reason Codes
BUS_OPT_PM_REASON
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Navigation Usage
Click the POA Settings link on the Purchasing Options page.
Define POA requirements and tolerance settings.
Click the VAT Default link on the Purchasing Options page.
Define VAT default options for all transactions in a business unit.
Setting Up VAT Defaults, page 26.
Click the VAT Service
Treatment Setup link on the
Purchasing Options page.
Define service-related VAT default options for service transactions in a business unit.
Click the Change Reason
Codes link on the
Purchasing Options page.
Define settings for reason codes used when creating change requests and change orders in PeopleSoft
Purchasing, eProcurement, and Services Procurement.
These settings enable you to define default reason codes and determine if reason codes or comments should be required when creating or approving these transactions.
Access the Purchasing Options page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business Unit Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Options).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
47
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
48
Purchasing Options page
You can establish multiple processing options for a given setID. To create distinct groups of processing options, give each new group a distinct processing option ID. Processing-options groups with different IDs can have the same effective date, which enables you to choose among these groups for varying situations.
You can also effective-date processing options within a processing option ID. Within each processing-options group, you can add a new set of effective-dated purchasing options.
Effective-dating processing options enables you to activate or inactivate processing options within a processing option ID. This functionality is useful for making date-sensitive changes to a group of processing options (payment terms, for example) while keeping the other options identical.
Select the accounting template for this setID, which is used to determine
ChartField values that offset one-sided transactions in PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Enter C (current) to use the current system date as the accounting date. Enter S
(specific) to use the specific accounting date that you provide here. This value is useful if you do not want multiple journal entries created from a subsystem. Enter
S and enter an accounting date for all transactions. When the Journal Generator runs, it finds one date for the entire period and creates one journal entry.
Alternatively, the system would create separate entries for each accounting date that the Journal Generator found.
the accounting date for the next period.
Select for any PeopleSoft Purchasing business units that require ChartField combination edits.
Select the action that you want the system to take when it encounters errors if you choose to verify ChartFields for this setID:
Default: Uses the default value from the Journal Options General Ledger
Definition page.
None: Deselects the ChartField edit option. No action is taken when errors occur.
Recycle: Enables you to save the transaction, but you can't post until you correct the error.
Reject: Rejects the transaction and does not enable you to save until you correct the error.
Use Suspen (use suspense): Posts the transaction to a suspense account. You should coordinate with the PeopleSoft General Ledger implementation team to determine whether you should select this option. If you do select this option, the
PeopleSoft General Ledger team must create journal entries to move the amounts out of the suspense account and into the appropriate distribution accounts.
Warning: Issues a warning and enables you to save.
measure round option)
Select the method by which you want to be notified of automatic rounding of item quantities. (When you are converting between units of measure, item quantities on purchasing documents are automatically rounded according to the rules that are set up on the Units of Measure page.) Values are:
Error: Stops the conversion if automatic rounding changes the quantity.
No Warning: Automatic rounding occurs without notification that conversion will change the UOM value.
Warning: Automatic rounding occurs with a notification of any unit-of-measure value change.
Select a payment term ID for this setID. By default, this value appears on the purchase order unless you override it at the vendor level. Define payment terms
IDs on the Single Pay Terms and Multiple Pay Terms pages.
Select the basis date type for the selected payment terms ID. The system calculates the payment due date from this date. Values are: Accounting Date,
Constructive Doc Receipt Date, Invoice Date, Receipt Date, Ship Date, and User
Specified Date.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
49
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
Select the ship via code for the setID. Define values on the Ship Via Codes page.
Select the freight terms code for the setID. Define values on the Freight Terms page.
Select to indicate whether the object is a physical good or service.
Select to indicate the location where the service is most often performed. Values are:
Buyer's: Select if the service was physically performed at the buyer location.
Ship From: Select if the service was physically performed at the bill from location.
Ship To: Select if the service was physically performed at the bill to location.
Supplier's: Select if the service was physically performed at the supplier location.
purchasing defaulting hierarchy. The Where Performed field is available when the value in the Physical Nature field is Service. These fields are supplied by default onto requisition, purchase order, contract, and RFQ lines. These fields also affect the VAT treatment determination.
Select how the system is to handle open period in transactions if you are using commitment control. Values include:
Error: The system issues an error and does not permit you to complete the transaction because the budget date isn't within the valid open period date range.
This is the default value if commitment control is enabled.
None: The system does not check for open period. This is the default value if commitment control is not selected.
Warning: The system issues a warning but does not prevent you from completing the transaction even though the budget date isn't within the valid open period date range.
(default amount only purchase order to "do not receive
This check box appears deselected by default. When you create an amount-only purchase order online or through the sourcing process, if this check box is selected, the purchase order lines Receiving Required field will appear as Do Not
Receive.
If this check box is deselected, the system uses the other defaulting hierarchy to determine the Receiving Required field value for the purchase order line. The system checks first at the item and then the item category to determine the receiving requirement.
50 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Inventory Sourcing Options
inventory available quantity)
Select to have the system check available inventory when creating inventory demand. If this check box is selected, the system creates inventory demand for the first eligible warehouse in priority order that has sufficient quantity to meet the demand. If this check box is deselected, inventory demand is created for the first eligible warehouse in priority order (unless it is the requesting warehouse), regardless of whether that warehouse has sufficient quantity.
warehouses. If no distribution network is designated for a ship-to location, the
Build Inventory Demand process (PO_REQINVS) resets the Inventory Source option to N (no) for sourcing by the PO Calculations process (PO_POCALC).
(partial quantities can ship)
Select to have the Build Inventory Demand process enable an order to be partially sourced from one or more PeopleSoft Inventory business units, with any remaining quantity being sourced to a purchase order.
If you do not select this check box and a quantity cannot be fully sourced from one PeopleSoft Inventory business unit, the process sets the inventory source setting on the staging table to N (no), and the entire quantity is sourced to a purchase order.
inventory business unit)
Select to have the Build Inventory Demand process source requests differently when no PeopleSoft Inventory business unit is found to stock this item. Values include:
Error out: The Build Inventory Demand process errors out when no PeopleSoft
Inventory business unit is found to stock the requested item. If you select this value, the process sets the stage statuses to Error in the purchase order staging tables.
Source to PO (source to purchase order): The Build Inventory Demand process sources the request to a purchase order when no PeopleSoft Inventory business unit is found to stock the requested item. If you select this value, the process sets the inventory source status for the request to N (no) so that the PO Calculation process can source it to a purchase order.
check boxes work together to help the Build Inventory Demand process determine the method by which requested demand is sourced, as well as which distribution network warehouses are eligible for sourcing.
Click to access the Dispatch Method page. Use the Dispatch Method page to define the dispatch methods for purchase orders, request for quotes, return to vendors, and contracts.
Click to access the Freight Option page. Use the Freight Option page to define freight options for the business units.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
51
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
added tax default)
Click this link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page.
The VAT Defaults Setup page is a common page that you can use to set up VAT defaulting for all PeopleSoft applications that process VAT transactions. Using this page, you can define PeopleSoft Purchasing defaults, as applicable.
service treatment setup)
Click to access the Service VAT Treatment Defaults Setup page.
The Service VAT Treatment Defaults Setup page is a common page that you can use to set up VAT defaulting for all PeopleSoft applications that process VAT transactions. On this page, you can define service-related defaults for PeopleSoft
Purchasing, as applicable.
order acknowledgement setting)
Click to access the POA Setting page. Use this page to define whether purchase order acknowledgements will be required from suppliers.
Click to access the Procurement Change Reason Codes page where you can define settings for reason codes used when creating change requests and change orders in PeopleSoft Purchasing, eProcurement, and Services Procurement.
These setting enable you to define default reason codes and determine if reason codes or comments should be required when creating or approving these transactions.
See Also
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Building Inventory Demand Transactions, page 840
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Open Period, page 183
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Financials and Supply Chain
Management Common Definitions," Defining Additional Common Information
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Editing ChartField Combinations"
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Single Payment Terms
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Multipayment Terms
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"
Access the Dispatch Method page (click the Dispatch Method link on the Purchasing Options page).
52 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Select the dispatch method for transactions that this business creates. Values are
EDX (electronic data exchange), Email, Fax, Phone, and Print.
Select the dispatch method for transactions that this business creates. Values are
Email, Fax, Phone, and Print.
dispatch option)
Select this option if you are using the procurement card functionality on purchase orders. The option that you select will affect the printed text that appears on the
PO/Dispatch Print report. Options are:
•
Charge to Card on File: Select to have "Charge to credit card" print in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print SQR report (POPO005).
•
Contact Buyer: Select to have the buyer's name and phone number print in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print report, for example, "*Please contact John Smith 925-694-3863 for payment information."
•
Contact Cardholder: Select to have the card holder's name and phone number print in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print report, for example,
"*Please contact John Smith 925-694-3863 for payment information."
•
Include Masked Card Info (include masked card information): Select to have the masked card number, card type, and expiration date appear in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print report.
•
No Reference: Select to have no procurement card information print on the
PO Dispatch/Print report.
Select to enable the PO Dispatch/Print process to transmit change orders to vendors for this business unit. If you do not select this check box, the system may not generate the output file at all. Either way, after the PO Dispatch/Print process runs successfully, the status of the changed purchase order is set to D
(dispatched).
You can override this value for individual vendor locations on the Procurement
Options page.
purchase orders are unaffected by this value.
See Also
Chapter 31, "Dispatching and Printing Purchase Orders," page 935
Chapter 26, "Managing Requests for Quotes," Running the RFQ Dispatch/Print Process, page 626
Chapter 40, "Managing Vendor Returns," Running the RTV Dispatch/Print Process, page 1181
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Voucher and Order
Contracts," Running the Purchase Order Contracts Process
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
53
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
Access the Freight Option page (click the Freight Option link on the Purchasing Options page).
Select the freight and transportation arbitration plan for this business unit.
applies to the entire purchase order, it is calculated on a line-by-line basis.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Order Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Transportation Lead Times and
Internal Freight Charges"
Access the POA Settings page (click the POA Settings link on the Purchasing Options page).
POA Settings
Select this check box if a POA is required by a supplier after a purchase order is dispatched. When you select this check box the Alert worklist if no POA received fields become available.
no purchase order acknowledgement received)
Enter the number of days after purchase order dispatch or before purchase order delivery to send a notification to the buyer's worklist if no POA is received by the supplier for a purchase order in those time frames.
the buyer.
order acknowledgement required with change order)
Select this check box if a POA is required when a change order is created.
54 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
POA Tolerance Settings
purchase order acknowledgement if changes against the purchase order do not exceed)
Enter the tolerance settings for the system to be able to automatically approve a
POA for the buyer.
Enter the number of days early or late to enable auto-approving a POA for the purchase order schedule. If the supplier changes a date that falls outside the schedule-days-early or schedule-days-late tolerances, then the buyer is required to review the change.
Enter the percentage under or over the purchase order schedule quantity to enable autoapproving a POA for a purchase order. If the supplier changes the quantity for any schedule above or below this percentage then the buyer will be required to review the change.
purchase order unit price)
purchase order unit price)
Enter the percentage below or above the purchase order unit price to enable autoapproving a POA for a purchase order.
approve a POA within the tolerance settings.
POA Settings Hierarchy
You can define POA settings at the purchasing business unit level and at the vendor and location level. You define the purchasing business unit POA settings using the POA Settings page in the Processing Options component. You define the vendor and location POA settings using the Procurement Options page in the
Vendor component. You can override the purchasing business unit POA settings by defining vendor and location POA settings.
During the processing of a POA, the system first retrieves the POA settings at the vendor and location level that are associated with the purchase order. If the POA settings are not defined at that level, then the system retrieves the POA settings at the purchasing business unit level.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining Vendor
Information," Specifying High-Level Procurement Processing Options.
Access the Service VAT Treatment Defaults Setup page (click the VAT Service Treatment Setup link on the
Purchasing Options page).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
55
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
You can insert rows for the supplier's location country or state. You can also delete any existing rows.
Click to return to the Purchasing Options component.
If you are inserting a row for a VAT driver key, select this check box to copy all the VAT defaults from the previous row to the new row. Otherwise, all VAT default fields for the new row will be blank.
Click to access the Copy Service VAT Treatment Defaults From page, which you can use to copy the VAT defaults from another key combination for the same
VAT driver.
As applicable, enter the supplier's location state.
(value-added service type)
Set the type of service for the applicable VAT drivers. Values are:
Freight Transport
Other
(value-added tax place of supply)
For the applicable VAT drivers, select the usual place of supply (the place where
VAT liability occurs). Values are:
Buyer's Countries
Supplier's Countries
Where Physically Performed
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"
Access the Procurement Change Reason Codes page (click the Change Reason Codes link on the Purchasing
Options page).
56 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
Procurement Change Reason Codes page
•
•
Select the reason type for your default reason code. Your selection is limited to the following reason types:
Procurement Change: This reason type enables you to select the default reason code for users entering a change request or change order.
Deny PO Change Request: This reason type enables you to select the default reason code for buyers rejecting a change order during the approval process.
Select to require that a user enter a reason code when creating a change request, change order, or rejecting a change. Reason codes help identify why a user made a change or why a buyer rejected the change.
Select to require that a user enter a comment when creating a change request, change order, or rejecting a change. Comments enable the user to give a detailed explanation of their action.
Enter the reason code that should default to the transaction. The available reason codes are limited by the reason type on this row. Only one default reason code can be entered per reason type.
To prepare the PeopleSoft Purchasing VAT environment:
1. Link the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit to a VAT entity using the PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit.
This enables the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit to record VAT information on purchase orders.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
57
Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options Chapter 3
2. Define VAT defaults and other VAT-related information for all VAT drivers in the PeopleSoft Purchasing defaulting hierarchy, as required.
To link a PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit to a VAT entity:
1. Access the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Definition page.
2. Select the PS/GL (PeopleSoft General Ledger) check box.
3. Select the PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit in the GL Unit (general ledger unit) field.
The connection between PeopleSoft Purchasing business units and VAT entities is indirect. You must link the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit to a PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit that is already linked to a VAT entity. Define links between PeopleSoft General Ledger business units and VAT entities on the VAT Entity - Identification page.
After linking PeopleSoft Purchasing business units to PeopleSoft General Ledger units, set the VAT processing options for those business units. VAT processing options are defined by setID, and the options are applied to all business units within the setID.
To define VAT defaults, VAT service treatment defaults, and other VAT-related information for the
PeopleSoft Purchasing options VAT driver:
1. Access the Purchasing Options page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business Unit Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Options).
2. Specify a value for physical nature.
3. Click the VAT Defaults link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page for the purchase order options VAT driver.
See Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," page 433.
4. Click the VAT Service Treatment Setup link to access the Service VAT Treatment Default setup page for the purchase order options VAT driver.
To define VAT defaults and other VAT-related information for the PeopleSoft Purchasing (business unit) definition VAT driver:
1. Access the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Options page.
2. Select the Calculate VAT on Req (calculate value-added tax on requisitions) check box if you want to process and calculate VAT on requisitions and pass the requisition VAT information to other procurement transactions further along the supply chain.
3. Access the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Definition page.
4. Click the VAT Defaults link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page for the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit VAT driver.
To define VAT defaults, service VAT treatment defaults, and other VAT-related information for the vendor and vendor location VAT drivers:
1. Access the Vendor Identifying Information page.
Select: Vendors, Vendor Information, Add Update, Identifying Information.
58 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options
2. Select the VAT Registration check box and access the VAT Registration Details page.
Create a row, entering the VAT registration number, if available, for all VAT countries in which this vendor conducts business and all countries for which the vendor reports VAT.
3. Click the VAT Defaults link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page, where you can define VAT defaults, such as VAT codes, transaction types, declaration points, rounding rule, and VAT use type for vendors.
4. Click the VAT Service Treatment Setup link to access the Service VAT Treatment Defaults Setup page, where you can define service-related VAT defaults for vendors.
5. Access the Location page.
For each location, expand the VAT section to define the usual physical nature of items purchased from this location (the location where services provided by this vendor location are usually performed) and to specify whether this vendor has been selected for suspension of VAT on purchases.
6. For each location, click the VAT Defaults link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page, where you can define VAT defaults (such as VAT codes, transaction types, declaration points, rounding rule, and VAT use type) for vendor locations.
7. For each location, click the VAT Service Treatment Setup link to access the Service VAT Treatment
Defaults Setup page, where you can define service-related VAT defaults for vendor locations.
To define VAT defaults at the PeopleSoft Purchasing item level:
1. Access the Purchasing Attributes page.
Select: Items, Define Items and Attributes, Purchasing Attributes.
2. Click the VAT Default link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page.
3. Click the VAT Service Treatment Setup link to access the Service VAT Treatment Defaults setup page.
To define a default VAT use type for the VAT driver for item business units in PeopleSoft Purchasing:
1. Access the Purchasing Business Unit Attributes page.
Select: Items, Define Items and Attributes, Purchasing Attributes.
2. Click the VAT Default link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page.
You can also define VAT defaults and service VAT treatment defaults for all VAT drivers in the PeopleSoft
Purchasing hierarchy by navigating directly to the VAT Defaults and Service VAT Treatment Defaults components.
See Also
Chapter 3, "Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options," Establishing
PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units, page 15
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Establishing Buyers and Defaults
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
59
This chapter provides an overview of purchasing item information and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Define purchasing item categories.
Define purchasing item attributes.
Update item vendor unit-of-measure conversion rates.
Capture item miscellaneous charges.
Set up item vendor price adjustment rules.
Update standard prices and business unit standard prices.
Select vendors based on item shipping location.
Create purchasing kits.
Defining values on the purchasing item information pages provides item-related processing information and default values that minimize errors and maximize productivity when you create purchasing transactions.
This section provides a list of common elements and discusses how to:
•
•
Set up item catalogs.
Work with market codes.
early shipment rejection days)
Enter the acceptable number of days before or after a shipment date during which you will still receive the goods.
(extended price tolerance/percentage extended price tolerance)
Enter the matching tolerance amount and percentage for the extended price
(amount multiplied by quantity) of the item. The extended price tolerance is the tolerance for the entire order, not just an individual item.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
61
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
ID)
Displays the inspection IDs, which are established on the Inspection Routing page.
(inspection unit of measure)
Select to require inspection and to make the other inspection fields available for entry.
Select from these values:
Standard: Select to perform inspections in the standard unit of measure (UOM) setup on the Item Definition - General: Common link page.
Vendor: Select to perform inspections in the UOM used on the purchase order to the vendor.
percent, ship to priority factor percent, price factor percent, vendor priority factor percent)
If you select the Flexible sourcing method, enter the percentage weight that you want to give to lead time, price, ship to, and vendor priority. The higher the percentage that you give to one of the criteria, the more weight that criterion has.
For example, if you want to select the vendor based only on lead time, you can give lead time a percentage weight of 100 percent and the vendor with the best lead time (regardless of price, ship to, or vendor priority) is selected.
quantity)
Indicate the action that you want to take if you receive less than the quantity specified on the purchase order schedule. Select from:
Open: Select to receive the partial quantity, leave the receipt line status as Open, and enable the receipt to be saved.
Open/Error: Reject the partial quantity, leave the receipt line status as Open, and generate an error message.
Open/Warn (open, but with a warning): Receive the partial quantity, leave the receipt line in Open status, and generate a warning message.
Recvd (received): Receive the partial quantity and change the receipt line status to Recvd.
Recvd/Warn (received with a warning): Receive the partial quantity and change the receipt line status to Recvd, but also generate a warning about the partial quantity.
•
•
Select the receiving requirement for the item. Values are:
•
Do Not: Do not receive; accounts payable matching and receipt accrual are not applicable.
Optional: Receiving is optional; accounts payable will not match receipt lines and the system will not accrue the receipt.
Required: Receiving is required; accounts payable will match receipt lines and the system will accrue the receipt.
over the tolerance limit)
Select to reject a quantity that surpasses the tolerance limits that you set.
62 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Select from Basic,Cumulative Split, Flexible, and Sched Split (split schedule).
This value appears by default from the category assigned to the item.
Select the amount or percentage over or under the tolerance selected that still enables a voucher match.
(unit price tolerance/percent unit price tolerance)
Displays the matching tolerance amount and percentage for the price of an individual item.
With PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can define any number of item catalogs. These item catalogs can be tailored for individual, department, or corporate-wide use and can greatly reduce the repetitive tasks associated with service and material purchases, such as rent, supplies, and standing inventory.
With PeopleSoft catalog functionality, you can:
•
•
Assign default item catalogs tailored specifically to individual requesters.
Transfer item catalog information in electronic format into PeopleSoft catalogs.
PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to load and maintain items from various applications, including a process that loads and updates item information from a third party or supplier to PeopleSoft Purchasing and an Item Loader process that synchronizes item information between systems.
These are the main steps involved in creating an item catalog:
1. Create the category that will serve as the first node in the catalog tree.
2. Create a catalog tree.
3. Assign catalogs to the requesters.
4. Associate an inventory item with a default category.
To create the category that will serve as the first node in the catalog tree:
1. Access the Item Categories - Category Definition page in Add mode.
In the access requirements for the page, enter the setID and the category code that you want to use as the first node for the new catalog tree.
2. On the Item Categories - Category Definition page, enter required information, including account, description, short description, and currency code.
3. Save the category.
You may see warning messages about tolerances that have been left as zero (0.00000). For our current task, this is acceptable. Click the OK button to acknowledge the warning.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
63
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
4. When the system asks whether you want to update item catalogs with the category changes, click the No button because you have not yet created the target catalog tree.
In the future, when the catalog tree has been established, click the Yes button, and select the catalog to which you want to assign a new category.
To create a catalog tree:
1. Access the Tree Manager component.
2. Choose to create a new tree definition and enter a tree name.
3. On the Tree Definition and Properties page, enter the basic information: tree name, structure ID, effective date, description, category, use of levels, audit options, and performance options.
Click the OK button to accept the settings and close the Tree Definition and Properties page. When you do, the Enter Root Node for Tree page appears.
4. On the Enter Root Node for Tree page, create a tree level for the new tree.
If no existing level is listed, click the Add Level button to access the Tree Levels page, where you can define the level to be used by the entire tree you are creating. If an existing level exists, you can choose to select it.
5. Enter a level name on the Tree Levels page.
The level name that you define here can be any generic name, for example, LEVEL 1.
If the level does not already exist in the system, you are transferred to the Tree Level Setup page.
6. On the Tree Level Setup page, enter further information about the level.
This includes information such as effective date, status, description, and short description.
Click the Apply button to save the settings. Click the OK button to return to the Enter Root Node for Tree page.
7. On the Enter Root Node for Tree page, create the first node by defining a value in the Root Node field.
This should be the name of the first node.
Click the OK button to accept and create the first node. When you do, the Tree Manager page appears.
8. On the Tree Manager page, click the Insert Detail button to create the detail node.
The Detail Value Range page appears.
9. On the Detail Value Range page, select the Dynamic Flag check box and click the Add button.
The system returns you to the Tree Manager page.
10. Save the new tree definition.
You have now successfully created an item catalog tree.
11. Click the Yes button when prompted to update item catalogs with the category changes.
12. Assign the new category to the new catalog.
64 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
13. Launch Tree Manager to verify that the nodes have been created correctly for the catalog.
To assign catalogs to the requesters:
1. Access the Requester Setup page, and enter the requester name in the access requirements.
2. Select the Use Only Assigned Catalogs check box.
3. In the Catalog Information scroll area, assign catalogs to the selected requester.
4. Select the Default check box for the catalog that a requester will use as a default catalog.
See Also
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Defining Purchasing Item Categories, page 67
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Tree Manager
PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing Items 9.1 PeopleBook, "Loading Items"
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Establishing Requesters and Defaults
If you are an existing PeopleSoft Purchasing customer, the conventional category codes are considered to be user-defined and the market codes for these codes are set to User Def (user-defined) (01) in the Item
Categories component after you run the upgrade script. You can maintain the same coding scheme, as well as migrate to the new industry standard coding scheme, the Universal Standard Products and Services
Classifications (UNSPSC). PeopleSoft eProcurement provides you with the Import CUP File process
(PV_CP_LOAD) to load UNSPSC and their corresponding MarketSite items through a batch process.
Use the UNSPSC to classify products and services at 2-digit, 4-digit, 6-digit and 8-digit levels, depending on your specific needs. Each subsequent level of detail describes a subset of all codes and descriptions preceding it in the code's hierarchy.
For example, ballpoint pens at the 8-digit level are a subset of writing instruments at the 6-digit level, which is a subset of office supplies at the 4-digit level. These descriptions are varying degrees of office equipment, accessories, and supplies at the 2-digit level. You can add ninth and tenth digits to indicate the business relationship to the supplier, such as rental/lease, wholesale, retail, or original equipment manufacturer. Each
UNSPSC is unique and enables unambiguous translation of the commodity's description into any language.
This table explains the UNSPSC coding hierarchy. In this example, leased addressing machines are assigned
UNSPSC number 4410210510. They are classified as office equipment, accessories and supplies
–
one of 55 existing segments at the top level of the UNSPSC hierarchy.
UNSPSC Level
Segment 44
UNSPSC Description
Office equipment, accessories, and supplies.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
65
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Level
Family
Class
Commodity
Business function identifier
44 | 10
UNSPSC
44 | 10 | 21
44 | 10 | 21 | 05
44 | 10 | 21 | 05 | 10
UNSPSC Description
Office machines and their supplies and accessories.
Mail machines.
Addressing machines.
Addressing machines, leased.
When you add a new category code using the Item Categories component, the system checks to determine whether the code consists of only numbers and has an even number of digits. If so, the system then assigns
UN/SPSC (02) as the market code. If the category code does not meet these criteria, the system assigns User
Def. (01) as the market code. You cannot modify the market code after you add the category code.
If the market code for the new category is set to UN/SPSC, the system looks at the code and determines whether its ancestor codes must be created and creates them accordingly. The length of the ancestor codes that are automatically generated is based on the length of the category code that you just entered. For example, when you enter the category code 4410210510 and no ancestor codes exist, the system generates the following ancestor codes:
4400000000
4410000000
4410210000
4410210500
Upon saving the Item Categories component, the system asks whether you want the item catalogs updated. If the answer is no, the catalog tree is not updated. If the answer is yes, the Update Catalog Tree page appears. If you are updating an existing code, the page displays the existing catalog information.
The relationship between CATEGORY_CD (category code) and CATEGORY_ID (a system-assigned sequential number) is one-to-one in the PS_ITM_CAT_TBL table. The relationship between an item
(PS_MASTER_ITEM_TBL) and a default category (PS_ITM_CAT_TBL) is many-to-one.
eProcurement product supports the one item and multiple categories association feature.
For example, the following scenario is not supported in PeopleSoft Purchasing: In setID SHARE, item 10002 is mapped to category code CYCLING (CATEGORY_ID = 00009). This means that for catalog
ALL_PURCHASE_ITEMS, item 10002 belongs to the tree node CYCLING (due to dynamic range).
You might be able to create an item static range from 10001 to 10003 under another tree node, FISHING.
This range violates the relationship previously described because, in this case, item 10002 is mapped to two categories, CYCLING and FISHING. Avoiding this scenario is a good practice because it may create unpredictable results when you use the Order by Catalog function.
66 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
See Also
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Defining Purchasing Item Categories, page 67
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Updating Catalog Trees, page 72
Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Ordering Items by Catalog, page 462
To define purchasing item categories, use the Item Categories component (ITEM_CATEGORIES).
This section provides an overview of item categories and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
Define item categories.
Update catalog trees.
Define item category control options.
Define vendor sourcing priorities for item categories.
If your installation includes PeopleSoft Purchasing, you must create categories for the items. You will be required to assign new items to a category on the Define Item - General: Common link. Category information helps reduce redundant data entry during both item setup and requisition and purchase order processing. The purchasing attributes of an item category are assigned as defaults to any item in that category.
Item categories can provide transaction information for requisitions, requests for quotes, contracts, and purchase orders. Item categories also serve as the organizational unit for item catalogs. In fact, item catalogs are a collection of item categories. Each item added to a category is automatically added to each catalog that contains that category.
For each category that you create, you can define purchasing attributes, such as general ledger account, primary buyer, lead time, price tolerances, and so forth. For example, you might create a category for outdoor equipment with a set of default purchasing attributes that apply to most of the outdoor equipment purchases.
During item definition, every item that you assign to the outdoor equipment category receives the attributes of that category.
requisitions, contracts, and purchase orders on which you specify the category codes. If you do order by item
ID, the attributes are supplied by default from the Item tables rather than the Category tables.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
67
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Page Name Definition Name
Item Categories - Category
Definition
CATEGORY_TBL
Update Catalog Tree
BU Specific Attributes
(business unit specific attributes)
View Catalog Hierarchy
CAT_PNLS_CATLG_SEC
ITM_CAT_BU_SEC
CAT_PARENTAGE_SEC
VAT Defaults Setup (valueadded tax defaults setup)
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
Service VAT Treatment
Defaults Setup (service value-added tax treatment defaults setup)
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
Navigation
Items, Define Controls,
Item Categories, Category
Definition
Usage
Define item categories.
Change item categories or add a new item category on the Item Categories -
Category Definition page and save.
Click the Yes button when asked if you want to update catalogs with the category changes.
Select the catalog tree to update with new category code information.
Click the BU Attributes
(business unit attributes) link on the Item Categories
- Category Definition page.
Assign a buyer to this category for each business unit. You may want to do this if you order by description and want a default buyer for this category by business unit.
This setup is optional. The system uses the values set for the buyer at the item category level for all business units that are not specified here.
Click the Hierarchy link on the Item Categories -
Category Definition page.
View information about where a category resides in the entire catalog tree hierarchy.
Click the VAT Default link on the Item Categories -
Category Definition page.
Define value-added tax
(VAT) defaults.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Global Options and Reports
9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT," Setting Up and
Maintaining VAT Defaults.
Click the VAT Service
Treatment Setup link on the
Item Categories - Category
Definition page.
Define service VAT treatment defaults.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Global Options and Reports
9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT," Setting Up and
Maintaining Service VAT
Treatment Defaults.
68 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Page Name Definition Name
Item Categories - Category
Definition 2
CATEGORY_TBL2
Vendor Sourcing Priorities
ITM_CAT_VND_PR_SEC
Navigation
Items, Define Controls,
Item Categories, Category
Definition 2
Usage
Define the matching and receiving controls, sourcing controls, and miscellaneous controls and options for the category.
Also use to set price tolerance defaults for items to trigger workflow exception notifications.
PeopleSoft Purchasing and
PeopleSoft Payables use matching controls to match receipts, purchase orders, and vouchers.
Receiving controls specify how receiving users process items assigned to this category.
These values become a part of the item default hierarchy and can be supplied by default to purchase order lines where this category is specified.
Click the Priorities link on the Item Categories -
Category Definition 2 page.
Set the vendor priority and split sourcing allocation percentage for vendors for this category
Access the Item Categories - Category Definition page (Items, Define Controls, Item Categories, Category
Definition).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
69
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
70
Category Definition page
Select the coding scheme that a category code is using. Values are UN/SPSC
(Universal Standard Products and Services Classification) (02) and User Def.
(user-defined) (01).
Select a date for which you want to make the purchasing item category effective for use.
Select a category status. Changing a category status from Active to Inactive means that you can no longer assign items to the category. This status change does not affect the existing and future PeopleSoft Purchasing transactions involving items in the inactivated category. For example, setting a category status to Inactive has no effect on orders that you have in progress that contain items tied to the newly inactivated category. You can also continue to add these items to the PeopleSoft Purchasing transactions using the usual methods, such as entering an item ID directly on the online page or using the Order By Catalog page or Item Search Criteria page.
Enter the number of lead-time days required for items in this category. This value is used in calculating the due dates for purchase order lines when the category you're defining is specified for a line on which no item ID is specified, the purchase order has no default due date, or no due date is specified on the line schedules.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
account)
Select a valid account number to identify the general ledger account to be associated with the items in this category. This account number is used on transactions when no item ID is specified at the line level of a PeopleSoft
Purchasing purchase order and no default account is specified for the transaction.
Select an alternate account number to identify the general ledger account to be associated with the items in this category. This field is available if you enable the
Alternate Account option for the organization and for the general ledger business unit.
Select an asset profile ID for the category. Asset profile IDs are transferred to
PeopleSoft Asset Management when PeopleSoft Purchasing receives an item that specifies both an asset profile and a PeopleSoft Asset Management business unit.
When you define a purchase order or requisition line using an asset category without specifying an item, the asset profile of that category becomes the default.
Asset profile IDs are set up on the Asset Profile page.
Enter an ultimate use code to be supplied by default on purchasing transactions whenever this category is referenced on an ad hoc (order by description) line.
In most cases, sales tax is computed as a use tax based on the tax code that is applicable to the ship to or usage destination. However, how merchandise is ultimately used may also result in a different tax rate within the same ship to or usage destination.
Indicate whether the object is a physical good or service. Values are Goods and
Services.
Select the location where the service is most often performed:
Buyer's: Select if the service is physically performed at the buyer location.
Ship From: Select if the service is physically performed at the ship from location.
Ship To: Select if the service is physically performed at the ship to location
Supplier's: Select if the service is physically performed at the supplier location.
See Also
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Working with Market Codes, page 65
Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Ordering Items by Catalog, page 462
Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Creating Requisition Schedules, page 484
Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Searching for Item Categories, page 484
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using ChartFields,"
Understanding PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartFields
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Multiple Currencies"
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
71
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Access the Update Catalog Tree page (change item categories or add a new item category on the Item
Categories - Category Definition page and click Save).
When the market code for the category is UN/SPSC (02), the Parent Category field is unavailable for entry because the system generates and maintains
UNSPSC ancestor nodes automatically. You can select multiple catalog trees for updating.
When the market code is User Def. (01), you must select a Parent Category value. Then click the Catalog Refresh button to retrieve the catalog trees to which the parent category belongs. You can select only one catalog tree for updating.
you are updating the catalog tree.
Access the Item Categories - Category Definition 2 page (click the BU Attributes (business unit attributes) link on the Item Categories - Category Definition page).
Sourcing Controls
If you select Cumulative Split in the Sourcing Method field, this field becomes available for entry. Select Run to accumulate the percentage for the vendor based on each run of the PO Calculations process (PO_POCALC), or select Schedule to accumulate based on each schedule.
Cumulative Sourcing
In the Cumulative Sourcing group box, set the options for the cumulative sourcing method. The fields in this group box become available if you select Cumulative in the Sourcing Method field.
Designates the year in which you want to start maintaining vendor history. You cannot specify a year in the future. Cumulative sourcing must be based on history and cannot occur in the future.
Enter the number of the month in which you want to start maintaining vendor history. Changing the value in this field triggers recalculation of historical quantities and amounts. History is always maintained from the first day of the start month to the first day of the end month.
Enter the number of months for which you want to keep vendor history.
Changing the value in this field triggers recalculation of historical quantities and amounts.
72 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Displays the start day, which is calculated based on the values that you define for the Year to Start, Month to Start, and Number of Months fields. History is always maintained from the first day of the start month to the first day of the end month.
Displays the date on which vendor history is to be refreshed. This date is calculated based on the values defined for the Year to Start and Month to Start fields, plus the value in the Number of Months field. So if Month to Start is 1 and
Number of Months is 3, the end date will be 04/01. History is refreshed by the first run of the Cumulative Sourcing Update process (PO_POHISTUD) as soon as the current date is greater than or equal to the end date.
historical period, in the category currency.
Misc. Controls and Options
under percent tolerance)
Enter an acceptable percentage of the total quantity or amount that can be outstanding while still enabling the purchase order to be closed. If the quantity or amount not yet received is less than or equal to the value entered here, the Close
Purchase Orders process (PO_PORECON) will treat the purchase order as fully received.
for quote required)
Select if the item must go through the RFQ cycle before it can be included on a requisition or purchase order.
See Also
Chapter 34, "Closing Purchase Orders," Running the Close Purchase Orders Process, page 1013
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Running the PO Calculations Process, page 844
Access the Vendor Sourcing Priorities page (Items, Define Controls, Item Categories, Category Definition 2, click the Priorities link on the Item Categories - Category Definition 2 page).
Enter a priority rank for the vendor. When the PO Calculations process selects a vendor for the item, it uses the priority ranking with the lowest number (1) as the first choice. When you add another vendor, the next priority ranking is automatically assigned.
If you selected Sched Split or Cumulative Split in the Sourcing Method field on the Item Categories - Category Definition 2 page, enter the allocation percentage for the selected vendor.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
73
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
(merchandise amount)
Displays the total merchandise amount for this vendor for this category for the historical period, along with the category currency.
See Also
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Running the PO Calculations Process, page 844
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Defining Purchasing Item Categories, page 67
To define purchasing item attributes, use the Purchasing Attributes component (PURCH_ITEM_ATTR). Use the PURCH_ITEM_ATTR_CI component interface to load data into the tables for this component.
If you have PeopleSoft Purchasing installed, you can use the Purchasing Attributes component to specify purchasing information for the items.
This section provides an overview of order multiple rounding rules and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Define purchasing item attributes.
Enter purchasing item specifications.
Define purchasing controls.
Define purchasing business unit attributes.
Define attributes and priorities for purchasing item vendor relationships.
Define purchasing item vendor UOM and pricing information.
Enter item vendor UOM conversion rate changes.
Update purchase orders with item vendor UOM conversion rate changes.
In several industries, such as consumer goods and wholesale and distribution, for various economic and packaging reasons suppliers ship only certain items in multiples of a specific quantity. They can define the smallest quantity they are willing to ship for the item. Then when you create purchase orders to these suppliers you want a system that can use this information and calculate the rounding of the suggested order quantities to reflect the supplier's specification to these suppliers.
PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to specify whether to have the system check for order multiples when you are ordering an item from a particular vendor and location on a purchase order.
use the order multiples functionality.
74 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
In addition, you can also specify the rounding rule that you want the system to use when its is calculating the correct order quantity multiple for this item on the purchase order. The two available rounding rules that you can choose are natural round and round up. The following examples illustrate the different types of rounding rules and their outcomes.
Rounding Rule Examples
Refer to the following table for quantity calculation examples using the different rounding rules:
Item
10005
10005
10005
10005
Vendor Location
SCM0000001 Main
SCM0000001 Main
SCM0000001 Main
SCM0000001 Main
EA / 5
IP / 10
CS / 2
PT / 1
EA / 5
IP / 10
CS / 2
PT / 1
EA / 5
IP / 10
CS / 2
PT / 1
Unit of
Measure/Orde r Multiple
Round Rule
EA / 5
IP / 10
CS / 2
PT / 1
Natural Round
Order
Quantity
14 EA
Natural Round 12 EA
Round Up
Round Up
14 EA
12 EA
Suggested
Order
Quantity
15 EA
10 EA
15 EA
15 EA
Page Name
Purchasing Attributes
Item Specifications
Definition Name
ITM_TBL_PUR
ITEM_SPEX_PUR
Navigation
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes
Usage
Enter basic purchasing information for an item.
Click the Item
Specifications link on the
Purchasing Attributes page.
Record standard details about the item. These specifications can be sent to the vendor using the purchase order.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
75
Defining Purchasing Item Information
Page Name
Packing Details
Definition Name
ITM_PKG_PUR_SEC,
ITM_VUOM_PKG_SEC
VAT Defaults Setup (valueadded tax defaults setup)
Service VAT Treatment
Defaults Setup (service value-added tax treatment defaults setup)
Purchasing Attributes -
Purchasing Controls
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
ITM_TBL_PUR2
Chapter 4
Navigation Usage
Click the Packing Details link on the Purchasing
Attributes page or the
Vendor's UOM and Pricing
Information page.
Enter packing volume and weight information for the item.
When accessed from the
Vendor's UOM and Pricing
Information page, the
Packing Details page also enables you to define item package dimensions, which can be useful if item package dimensions vary by vendor.
Click the VAT Default link on the Purchasing Attributes page or the Purchasing
Business Unit Attributes page.
Enter VAT defaults for this item into the VAT hierarchy tables with a VAT driver of item.
Click the VAT Service
Treatment Setup link on the
Purchasing Attributes page or the Purchasing Business
Unit Attributes page.
Enter service-related VAT defaults for this item into the VAT hierarchy tables with a VAT driver of item.
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes, Purchasing
Controls
Specify matching and receiving defaults for the item.
Define sourcing controls and miscellaneous controls and options for the item.
Set price tolerance defaults for purchased items. These tolerances are supplied by default from the item's category; you can override them during online item setup.
Use these tolerances in conjunction with the price change exception rule. Item
Load processes compare new item/vendor prices in the Item Loader staging table to the previous item/vendor price. If the new price exceeds tolerances, the system generates an exception.
76 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Page Name
Purchasing Business Unit
Attributes
Definition Name
ITM_BU_PUR
Purchasing Attributes - Item
Vendor
ITM_VENDOR
Vendor Lookup VENDOR_LOOKUP_SEC
Navigation
Click the BU Attributes
(business unit attributes) link on the Purchasing
Attributes - Purchasing
Controls page.
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes, Item Vendor
Click the Vendor Lookup link on the Purchasing
Attributes - Item Vendor page.
Usage
Define item attributes by business unit.
If you do not specify tolerance values for the business unit, the system uses tolerance values defined for the item's purchasing attributes.
When you access this page to specify business-unit specific attributes, tolerance values are supplied by default from the item's purchasing attributes. To define zero tolerances on this page, you must clear the tolerance fields manually.
If you access this page and enter a business unit but do not enter any values, and you click OK to exit the page, the system records default tolerance values from the purchasing attributes to create businessunit specific values. Click
Cancel instead to avoid this situation.
The fields on this page match those on the
Purchasing Attributes page and on the Purchasing
Definition - Business Unit
Options page.
This page is not available unless at least one of the
PeopleSoft Purchasing business units has the Allow
Business Item Attributes option selected on the
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Options page.
Establish and update prioritized item-supplier combinations.
Search for vendors.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
77
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Page Name
Vendor's UOM and Pricing
Information (vendor's unit of measure and pricing information)
ITM_VENDOR_UOM
Effective Dated UOM
(effective-dated unit of measure)
ITM_VNDR_UOMCHG
Update Purchase Order
PO_EDUOM_UPDPO_SEC
Maintain Purchase Order -
Purchase Order
Vendor's Manufacturer Info
(vendor's manufacturer information)
Vendor Item Return Fees
Item Vendor Contracts
Definition Name
PO_LINE
ITM_VENDOR_MFG
ITM_VND_RTV_FEE
ITM_VNDR_CNTRCT
Navigation Usage
Click the Item Vendor
UOM (item vendor unit of measure) link on the
Purchasing Attributes - Item
Vendor page.
Establish valid units of measure to use when ordering the item from the vendor and to establish the pricing information for each valid UOM.
Click the Effective Dated
UOM link on the Vendor's
UOM and Pricing
Information page.
Enter effective-dated conversion rate changes along with the packing detail information.
Click the Update PO link on the Vendor's UOM and
Pricing Information page or the Effective Dated UOM page.
Update existing purchase order schedules with the new effective-dated UOM conversion rate changes.
Click the PO ID link on the
Update Purchase Order page.
Maintain the purchase order and all of its details.
Click the Vendor Item MFG
(vendor item manufacturer) link on the Purchasing
Attributes - Item Vendor page.
Record the authorized manufacturers for an itemvendor combination.
Click the Return to Vendor
Fees link on the Purchasing
Attributes - Item Vendor page.
Add fees charged by the vendor for returning this item.
Click the Item Vendor
Contracts link on the
Purchasing Attributes - Item
Vendor page.
View all contracts for any specified item/vendor combination.
Access the Purchasing Attributes page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Purchasing Attributes).
78 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Purchasing Attributes page
(purchase order available date)Unavailable, and
Indicate the dates within which the item can be added to a purchasing transaction.
You can add an item between these two dates only.
Enter the standard price for the item purchased in its standard UOM. A standard price is required for each item and becomes the default price in transactions for which another price, such as a vendor price or a contract price, is not defined for the item. An item's standard UOM is defined on the Item Definition - General:
Common link.
purchase order price)
Displays the standard UOM used for pricing. The pricing UOM may be different from the stocking UOM.
Displays the last price that was used on a purchase order for this item. When an item is initially set up, the standard price is also the last price value. This field is updated by the Receiver Interface Push process (PO_RECVPUSH) and is used by the return-to-vendor transaction to cost the return and enable items to be returned to a vendor other than the original vendor of the order.
Select the currency of the standard price.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
79
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
description)
The value appears by default from the Item Categories - Category Definition page. You can override the default value for individual items.
Enter a long description of the item up to 30 characters long. Enter a short description of the item up to 10 characters long. These descriptions can be used with PeopleSoft reporting and query tools instead of the standard 254-character description to distinguish the purchasing descriptions from the internally used item description established in the Item Definition component. These purchasing descriptions then also appear in the Description text box at the bottom of the page, where you can expand the descriptions to 254 characters. Whereas the long and short descriptions defined here are for internal use only, the description in the lower text box is used in all purchasing transactions and becomes available by selecting the description button or menu item on the PeopleSoft Purchasing pages.
Displays the default from the Item Categories - Category Definition page. An asset profile ID on a purchase order, in conjunction with a PeopleSoft Asset
Management business unit, indicates that PeopleSoft Asset Management is to be notified of the purchase of this item when it is received.
Select an ultimate use code to override the default tax rate for a location. In most cases, sales tax is computed as a use tax based on the tax code applicable to the ship to or usage destination. However, how merchandise is ultimately used may also result in a different tax rate within the same ship to or usage destination.
Indicates whether an object is a physical good or service.
Select to indicate the location where the service is most often performed:
Buyer's: Select if the service is physically performed at the buyer location.
Ship From: Select if the service is physically performed at the ship from location.
Ship To: Select if the service is physically performed at the ship to location.
Supplier's: Select if the service is physically performed at the supplier's location.
account)
Displays the default from the Item Categories - Category Definition page in the
Define Item Control Data component. You can override the information for individual items. The primary buyer value is used as the default buyer when the item is added to a requisition.
Select an account number to identify the general ledger account to be associated with this item. This account number is used on transactions when an item ID is not specified at the line level of a PeopleSoft Purchasing purchase order and a default account is not specified for the transaction.
Select an alternate account number to identify the general ledger account to be associated with this item. This field is available if you enable the Alternate
Account option for the organization and for the general ledger business unit.
80 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4
Defining Purchasing Item Information
Select a product that the system should assign for this purchasing item when a product is not specified at the line level of a purchase order.
Associated Picture
The fields in this group box are used to attach image files or other documents to the item descriptions. You can attach any type of file that you have defined on the File Locations page. The file that you want to attach must reside in the file directory defined for the file type on the File Location page.
Enter the name of the file that you want to attach.
Enter the file extension, such as .bmp or .jpg.
Click the Image Doc Launcher button to launch an attached file. This button is available only if you entered a file name and extension in the fields in the
Associated Picture group box.
See Also
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Defining Purchasing Item Vendor UOM and Pricing
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Defining Purchasing Item Categories, page 67
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Defining Item Categories, page 69
Access the Item Specifications page (click the Item Specifications link on the Purchasing Attributes page).
Item specifications that you enter on this page are not automatically carried to requisitions and purchase orders for the associated item unless you specify this by selecting the Copy to Transactions check box. If this check box is not selected, you must access the Include Item Specifications page to copy specifications on requisitions and purchase orders. Use the Include Item Specifications page to copy these specifications to the line comments for a transaction.
If you have selected Send to Vendor here, the Send to Vendor option on the Line Comments page for the transaction is automatically selected.
Enter the specifications for the item using up to 2,000 characters.
Select this check box to automatically copy the item specifications comments into the line comments when this item is referenced on a requisition or purchase order transaction.
Select to make this specification information available to be sent to the vendor as part of the purchase order.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
81
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Access the Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Controls page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes, Purchasing Controls).
Purchasing Controls page (1 of 2)
82 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Purchasing Controls page (2 of 2)
Matching Controls
If you do not specify tolerance values for the business unit, the system uses tolerance values defined for the item's purchasing attributes.
The fields on this tab match those on the Purchasing Business Unit Attributes page and the Purchasing
Definition - Business Unit Options page.
Specify default price tolerances for the PeopleSoft Payables Matching process (AP_MATCH) that matches purchase orders, receipts, and vouchers to verify vendor charges. When you use matching with PeopleSoft
Purchasing and PeopleSoft Payables to verify vendor charges, the system uses four price tolerances to determine whether the purchase order price and voucher price are within the tolerances and thus whether the purchase order and purchase order voucher match. These fields appear by default from the Item Categories -
Category Definition 2 page. If you leave any of the tolerance fields set to 0 or blank, the system assumes a zero tolerance. If you don't want to use the tolerance fields, set the amount fields that you don't want to use to
9999999 and the percentage fields that you don't want to use to 100.
Receiving Controls
Define tolerances to be used in receiving this item. These become the default values for purchase order lines when this item is selected. The values appear by default from the Item Categories - Category Definition 2 page.
If you do not specify tolerance values for the business unit, the system uses tolerance values defined for the item's purchasing attributes.
The fields on this tab match those on the Purchasing Business Unit Attributes page and the Purchasing
Definition - Business Unit Options page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
83
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
past due Kanban purchase orders)
This field is available if you are using PeopleSoft Manufacturing, thus enabling you to receive by Kanban ID.
Select this check box to include past-due Kanban purchase order quantities when the Receiver Load process searches for purchase orders to match up with Kanban
IDs for receipt creation.
If you select this check box, the Receiver Load process can receive a schedule for which the due date has passed, but which still contains a quantity to be received.
If you do not select this check box, the Receiver Load process searches for purchase orders based on the due date of the schedule.
When using vendor replenishment with PeopleSoft Flow Production, select the
Include Past Due Kanban POs check box to help ensure that the receipts and purchase orders have the opportunity to match up. Because vendor replenishment occurs frequently, if you set the Early Ship Reject Days value too low, the
Kanban receiving process may not permit you to receive the material because it arrived too early.
the Inspection UOM (inspection unit of measure) value.
Sourcing Controls
Select to use the sourcing controls set on the Item Categories - Category
Definition 2 page.
If you have set up vendors at the category level and select this check box for items using this category, then the vendors that you entered for the category must also be entered in the purchasing attributes.
Select the sourcing method to use with this item. Methods include:
B (Basic)
F(Flexible): When you select this method, the system makes the remaining fields in this section available.
Sched Split (schedule split)
See Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Understanding Sourcing
Misc. Controls and Options
Select if you want the AutoSelect Requisitions process (PO_REQSORC) to pick up the item when it sources requisition lines. If this check box is selected, the
AutoSelect Requisitions process will include the item. If this condition is not met, the AutoSelect Requisitions process will not include the item.
84 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Select this check box if you need a contract to order the item on a requisition or purchase order. If this check box is selected, you must specify a valid contract for the item on the purchase order when you use the item, or you must release the item from an active contract.
Select this check box if you can order an item without setting up vendors for the item. If you do not select this check box, you must establish an item-vendor relationship for the item on the Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page before you can include it on a purchase order.
for quote required)
Select this check box if the item must go through the RFQ cycle before it can be included on a purchase order. If you do not select this check box, you can order the item directly.
Select this check box if you can order an item without setting up a ship to address for it.
item on the Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page. If you do not select the check box on either page, you must establish an item-vendor ship to relationship on the Item Ship To Locations page.
Select to indicate that the item is taxable using system tax calculations.
under percent tolerance)
Enter an acceptable percentage of the total quantity or amount that can be outstanding while still enabling the purchase order to be closed. If the quantity or amount not yet received is less than or equal to the value entered, the Close
Purchase Orders process will treat the purchase order as fully received.
Select to enable purchase options to be created in PeopleSoft Supply Planning for the PeopleSoft Inventory business unit related to this item. The purchase option then enables the creation of new purchase orders through PeopleSoft Supply
Planning for the PeopleSoft Inventory business unit.
PeopleSoft Supply Planning uses sourcing templates that contain a sequenced list of purchasing sourcing options based on the item attributes that you define in
PeopleSoft Purchasing. You can let the system load the options automatically, or you can set up sourcing templates manually and maintain the options. These templates are needed when multiple sourcing options exist for an item. When you assign multiple sourcing options to a single item, you create a more flexible planning situation by providing more information to source demand.
Select this check box if an agreement has been set up with the vendor to supply this item for par inventory replenishment.
Select a shipping method if you always want this item to be shipped using the method selected here.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
85
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
See Also
Chapter 26, "Managing Requests for Quotes," page 609
Chapter 34, "Closing Purchase Orders," Understanding the Close Purchase Orders Process, page 1003
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," page 807
Access the Purchasing Business Unit Attributes page (click the BU Attributes (business unit attributes) link on the Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Controls page).
If you do not specify tolerance values for the business unit, the system uses tolerance values defined for the item's purchasing attributes.
When you access this page to specify business-unit specific attributes, tolerance values appear by default from the item's purchasing attributes. To define zero tolerances on this page, you must manually clear the tolerance fields.
If you access this page but do not enter any values, and you click OK to exit the page, the system records default tolerance values from the purchasing attributes to create business-unit specific values. Click Cancel instead to avoid this situation.
The fields on this page match those on the Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Controls page and the
Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Options page.
Access the Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes, Item Vendor).
86 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page (1 of 2)
Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page (2 of 2)
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
87
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Vendor Priorities
location)
•
•
Select the ordering location for the item and vendor. The vendor default location appears by default.
Several processes in PeopleSoft Purchasing use this field:
•
Purchase order sourcing uses the item vendor priority for orders if no item and ship to priority vendor has been defined.
The Sourcing Load process used by PeopleSoft Supply Planning uses the item vendor priority if no item and ship to priority vendor has been defined.
The Requisition Loader process uses the first item vendor priority location if no location is specified.
Item Vendor
Select a vendor setID. The value determines the values available for the vendor
ID.
Click to access the Vendor Search page, where you can define search criteria to locate vendors.
Select a value that describes the status of the vendor. Values include:
Active.
Discntued (discontinued).
Hold.
Inactive.
To Be Del (to be deleted).
Select the vendor ID. Only values for the selected vendor setID are available.
Enter a priority rank for the vendor. When the PO Calculations process selects a vendor for the item, it uses the priority ranking with the lowest number (1) as the first choice. When you add another vendor, the next priority ranking is automatically assigned.
If you selected Sched Split or Cumulative Split in the Sourcing Method field on the Item Categories - Category Definition 2 page, enter the allocation percentage for the selected vendor.
Select to include purchase options in PeopleSoft Supply Planning. Deselect this check box to not include purchase options in PeopleSoft Supply Planning.
Enter a vendor catalog assigned to the selected item-vendor combination. The system uses the value as a default value on the Purchase Order Line Details page.
88 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4
Defining Purchasing Item Information
Enter an item ID.
Enter an item extension. The system uses this value to further define an item.
Enter an item description for this vendor associated with the item. This field is informational only and is not used anywhere else in PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Associated Picture
Use this section to access or define a picture for use with this item vendor.
Enter the name of the file that contains the picture.
Enter the type of file.
Enter a path to where the file is located.
Enter an URL address at which the file is stored.
Click to access the picture file.
Vendor Attributes
Location page. Location codes provide the flexibility to set up different pricing information for the same item-vendor combination, depending on which vendor location you identify as the pricing location.
Select the date used for effective-dated price adjustments:
Due: Price adjustments based on the date that the order was due to be received.
PO (purchase order date): Price adjustments based on the date that the order was placed.
Schedule quantity to determine any applicable price breaks.
Select the country in which the item was originally manufactured. This information is generally required for the Intrastat Arrivals report; however, the
PeopleSoft Intrastat Transaction Loader uses the field for return-to-vendor transactions (RTVs).
If you leave the field blank, the transaction loader uses the country code of the shipping PeopleSoft Inventory business unit as the default value for RTVs.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
89
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
(accept any unit of measure)
Select the region or department from which the item was initially shipped for return to vendor. This information is generally required for the Intrastat
Dispatches report.
If the initial shipping region or department for return to vendor is different from the one defined for the PeopleSoft Inventory business unit, enter a specific state code. The state code should belong to the country of the PeopleSoft Inventory business unit.
If you leave the field blank, the Intrastat Transaction Loader uses the state code of the shipping PeopleSoft Inventory business unit as the default region of origin.
This default value is also used if a state code does not belong to the country defined for the PeopleSoft Inventory business unit.
Select this check box if this item can be ordered in any UOM from this vendor. If you do not select this check box, you must set up an item-vendor UOM relationship for each UOM in which the item can be purchased from the vendor.
use this check box when displaying the available UOMs for an item on a requisition. The available UOMs for a requisition item are item vendor UOMs and item ordering UOMs.
Select this check box if you want to receive the item from the vendor at any of the ship to locations. If you do not select this check box, you must establish an item-vendor ship to relationship on the Item Ship To Locations page.
Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Control page. If you do not select the Accept
Any Ship To check box on either page, you must establish an item-vendor ship to relationship on the Item Ship To Locations page.
Select this check box if an agreement has been set up with the vendor to supply this item for par inventory replenishment.
Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Controls page, it won't be available at the item-vendor level on this page.
If you do not select the Use Item Standard Lead Time check box, this field is available for you to enter vendor-specific lead-time values.
Select this check box if you want to use order multiples for this item vendor and location. The system will check for order multiples for all the associated UOMs for this item vendor and location.
90 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
•
•
When using order multiples, specify the rounding rule for the system to use so that calculations involving the item quantity that you order result in whole numbers. Options are:
Natural Round: Decimal values greater than or equal to 0.5 are rounded up to the nearest whole number, and decimal values less than 0.5 are rounded down to the nearest whole number. For example, 1.223 rounds down to 1.0000, while 1.678 rounds up to 2.0000.
Round Up: All decimal values are rounded up to the nearest whole number.
So both 1.223 and 1.678 round up to 2.0000.
See Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Understanding Order
Multiple Rounding Rules, page 74.
See Also
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Running the PO Calculations Process, page 844
Access the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page (click the Item Vendor UOM link on the Purchasing
Attributes - Item Vendor page).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
91
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
92
Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page
Unit Of Measure
Select to have the PO Calculations process use this UOM on the purchase order when this vendor is chosen to source this item to. When multiple UOMs are established for the item-vendor combination, users can select which UOM to use as the default.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
quantity) and Max Qty
(maximum quantity)
Enter the quantity limits for orders in the selected UOM.
If you enter a requisition that does not fall within these quantities, you receive a warning. You do not receive an error message because consolidation may bring the request within the defined limits. If the limits are not met when the request is processed by the PO Calculations process, you receive an error message.
If you enter a purchase order that does not fall within these quantities, you receive an error message and the system uses the standard UOM and item standard price.
Enter the order quantity multiple for each item vendor and UOM. This field is used if you are using the order multiples functionality.
A quantity of 1 appears by default.
value is Whole Nbr (whole number) only.
(effective dated unit of measure)
purchase order)
Click to access the Packing Details page. Use this page to enter packing volume and weight information for the item along with item package dimensions by vendor.
Click to access the Effective Dated UOM page. Use this page to enter effectivedated conversion rate changes along with packing detail information.
Click to access the Update Purchase Order page. Use this page to update existing purchase orders with the new effective-dated UOM conversion rate changes.
Conversion to Item Base UOM
If the vendor ordering UOM for the item is different from the item's standard UOM, specify how to convert the vendor UOM.
Select from these values:
Override: Select if the standard conversion rate does not apply for this itemvendor combination. Enter a conversion rate in the field that appears. The value that you enter in this field represents the conversion rate between the vendor
UOM and one unit in the standard UOM.
Standard: Select to use the standard conversion rate.
For example, suppose that the standard UOM for the item is EA (each) and the vendor UOM is BOX. The standard conversion between EA and BOX is 12 to 1, that is, 12 each per box. However, this vendor has 24 eaches per box. Select the
Override field value to specify a new conversion rate of 24 to 1.
unit of measure rate)
Displays the standard conversion rate between the vendor UOM and the item's standard UOM that was established on the Units of Measure page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
93
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
precision)
Select the quantity precision to be used in UOM conversions:
Decimal: Round to four decimal places.
Whole Nbr (whole number): Round to a whole number and enable only a whole number to be entered.
standard rate)
Click to display the standard UOM rate.
UOM Price Attributes
(quantity received tolerance percentage)
Enter the quantity received tolerance percentage to be used in the receiving transactions for this item-vendor UOM combination. This field appears by default from the Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Controls page.
unit price update status)
Select from these options for updating standard prices, business unit standard prices, or both:
No Update: Do not update prices.
To Be Upd (to be updated): Price is updated on the date in the Eff Date (effective date) field.
are the same, the system checks the vendor priority. If multiple records are entered for the same vendor with the same effective date, the system selects the record with the standard UOM.
Updated: Price has been applied.
Matching Controls
Select this check box if you want to use the price tolerances established in the item's purchasing attributes. If not, specify the price tolerances in the tolerance fields provided.
Access the Effective Dated UOM page (click the Effective Dated UOM link on the Vendor's UOM and
Pricing Information page).
94 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Effective Dated UOM page
Unit Of Measure
Select the date when the new conversion rate becomes effective. The current date appears by default.
base unit of measure)
Enter the new conversion rate based on the base UOM.
purchase order)
Click to access the Update Purchase Order page. Use this page to update the existing purchase orders with the conversion rate change.
Packing Details
Use all the fields in this section to specify the packing details for this effective date.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
95
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Other Information
When you click this button, a message appears asking whether you want to update the item vendor UOM with these changes. You can update the information or you can choose not to update the information.
with the most current effective-dated UOM regardless of which effective date row is shown on this page.
Access the Update Purchase Order page (click the Update PO link on the Vendor's UOM and Pricing
Information page or the Effective Dated UOM page).
96
Update Purchase Order page
Search Criteria
You can access this page in a few different ways. If you access this page from the Vendor's UOM and Pricing
Information page, most of the fields in the search criteria section of this page appear by default from that page. If you access this page from the Effective Dated UOM page, most of the fields in the search criteria section of this page appear by default from that page.
Select an effective date. The current date appears by default when you access this page from the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page.
The effective date from the Effective Dated UOM page appears by default when you access this page from the Effective Dated UOM page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
order date type)
•
•
•
Select the date type for the system to use to retrieve the purchase orders for update. The system compares the effective date to the purchase order date type.
Options are:
PO Date (purchase order date): All purchase order schedules within the purchase order lines that meet the search criteria and for which the PO date is greater than or equal to the effective date appear in the Retrieved Rows group box.
Due Date: All purchase order schedules within the purchase order lines that meet the search criteria and for which the due date on the schedule is greater than or equal to the effective date appear in the Retrieved Rows group box.
Price Date Type: The system first determines the price date type (PO date or due date) from the purchase order line. Then the system retrieves the information based on the two preceding scenarios.
line is retrieved based on its price date type (PO date or due date).
Click to have the system display in the Retrieved Rows group box all the purchase order schedules that match the search criteria entered.
Retrieved Rows - PO Schedules
ID)
Click this check box next to each purchase order schedule that you want to update with the new conversion rate change.
Click the Select All link to select all the purchase order schedules. Click the
Clear All link to clear all the purchase order schedules that you previously selected.
Click to access the Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order page. Use this page to view and maintain the purchase order.
Retrieved Rows - Detail
Displays the existing purchase order conversion rate.
(purchase order conversion rate)
Displays the new conversion rate that the system will use to update the purchase order schedules that you select.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
97
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Other Buttons
Click to have the system recalculate the expected standard quantity and store the new conversion rate for all the selected purchase order schedules. The new conversion rate that is used is from the most recent effective-dated row that appears on the Effective Dated UOM page compared against the effective date that you select in the search criteria.
This section discusses how to update item vendor unit-of-measure conversion rates.
Page Name Definition Name
Update Item Vendor UOM
(update item vendor unit of measure)
PO_RUN_UPDIVUOM
Navigation
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Update Item
Vendor UOM
Usage
Initiate the Update Item
Vendor UOM Application
Engine process
(PO_UPDIVUOM), which updates current and future item vendor unit-ofmeasure conversion rate changes.
Access the Update Item Vendor UOM page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Update Item Vendor UOM).
Select the effective date from which to update the item vendor UOM conversion rate changes.
The item vendor UOM is updated with the most recent effective-dated UOM changes using the effective date that you select on this page as the reference. The effective date that you select on this page can be in the past, present, or future.
midnight, set the future conversion rate date to the date that the rate actually becomes effective. If it runs before midnight, enter the future conversion rate date as one day earlier. Alternatively, you can modify the selection criteria to select those conversion rate changes for which the effective date is tomorrow.
Also, to ensure that the future-dated conversion rate gets updated correctly on weekends and holidays, we suggest that you run this process every day, including weekends and holidays. Plus, we suggest that you run the process the first thing in the morning, before the start of each workday.
98 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
To define miscellaneous charges for item and category vendors, use the Item and Category Vendor
Miscellaneous Charges component (ITM_CAT_VNDR_MC).
This section discusses how to assign miscellaneous charges and templates to items and categories.
Page Name
Miscellaneous Charges
Selection
Miscellaneous Charges -
Miscellaneous
Definition Name
ITM_CAT_MC_CRITERA
ITM_CAT_VNDR_MC
•
Navigation
•
Usage
Items, Define Items and
Attributes,
Miscellaneous Charges,
Miscellaneous Charges
Selection
Enter the criteria for the miscellaneous charges that will appear on the
Miscellaneous Charges -
Miscellaneous page.
Click the Selection
Criteria link on the
Miscellaneous Charges
- Miscellaneous page.
Click the OK button on the
Miscellaneous Charges
Selection page.
Assign miscellaneous charges and miscellaneous charge templates to different item and category combinations.
Access the Miscellaneous Charges - Miscellaneous page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Miscellaneous
Charges, Miscellaneous Charges Selection).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
99
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
100
Miscellaneous Charges - Miscellaneous page
Select a value to associate these miscellaneous charges with a category-vendor business unit ship-to location, category vendor business unit, category vendor combination, or category. Otherwise, leave the field blank.
Select a value to associate these miscellaneous charges with an item-vendor business unit ship-to location, item vendor business unit, item vendor combination, or item. Otherwise, leave the field blank.
If you want to associate these miscellaneous charges with a combination that includes any of these fields, select a value for the field.
To apply a template of miscellaneous charges, select the template ID.
Miscellaneous charge templates are defined on the Misc Chg/Landed Cost
Template (miscellaneous charge/landed cost template) page.
method)
Select the method to use to calculate this charge:
FL (flat amount): A flat amount that you enter in the Amount field.
FR (free): No charge is applied.
UNT (per unit amount): Calculates the charge based on the number of items on the purchase order line.
VAL (percent of value): Calculates the charge based on a percentage of the material value.
VOL (rate based on volume): Calculates the charge based on the total volume for the purchase order line.
WT (rate based on weight): Calculates the charge based on the total weight for the purchase order line.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
method)
Select the method to use to allocate the miscellaneous charge: None, Quantity,
Volume, Weight, or Matl Value (material value). Charges are allocated based on the value of the items on each selected line.
(merchandise vendor)
This check box setting appears by default from the miscellaneous charge's purchasing attributes on the Misc Charge/Landed Cost Defn page. If you select this check box, charges are paid to the purchase order vendor. If you do not select this check box, you can use the Vendor and Vendor Location fields to designate a third-party vendor.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Miscellaneous Charges and Landed Costs
To set up vendor price adjustments, use the Price Adjustment component (PRICE_ADJUSTMENT).
This section provides an overview of item vendor price adjustments and discusses how to:
•
•
Define item vendor price adjustments.
Define item vendor price adjustment details.
With PeopleSoft Purchasing item vendor price adjustment features, you can define vendor price adjustments based on specific purchase order conditions, such as item quantity and ship to locations. The pricing schemes are ultimately used on purchase orders, where you can view the details of how a particular price was calculated.
You set up vendor price adjustments for items that have item-vendor relationships already established on the
Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page. You can define as simple or complex a pricing scheme as you need for each of the items. You can also define contract price adjustments on the PO Line Price Adjustment
(purchase order line price adjustment) page and combine them with the vendor price adjustments to define specific contract pricing terms.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Voucher and Order
Contracts," Entering Contract Purchase-Order Line Price Adjustments
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
101
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Page Name
Price Adjustment
Definition Name
PRICE_ADJUSTMENT
Navigation
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Price
Adjustments, Price
Adjustment
Price Adjustment Details
PRICE_ADJUST_DTLS
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Price
Adjustments, Price
Adjustment Details
Usage
Define the rules for the system should follow when calculating the vendor adjusted price from the vendor's base price. You can define effective-dated adjustment rule sequences for each item-vendor combination.
Define the quantities and adjustment methods for each of the price adjustment rules.
Access the Price Adjustment page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Price Adjustments, Price Adjustment).
type)
For each adjustment rule, select one type of method by which to calculate adjustments. Choose from:
Increment Adjustments: Each valid adjustment is made against the current (base or adjusted) price. For example, if you have a base price of 100 and two percentage adjustments of
–
10 percent each, then the first adjustment is deducted from the base price of 100, for a current adjusted price of 90. The second adjustment of
–
10 percent is deducted from 90 for a final adjustment price of 81.
Sum All Adjustments: Adjustments are summed and made against the original base price. For example, if you have a base price of 100 and two percentage adjustments of
–
10 percent each, the system takes the total adjustment of
–
20 and deducts it from the base price of 100 for a final adjusted price of 80.
Enter the sequence number for each rule. Price adjustment rules are applied in ascending order.
measure)
Select to use the default UOM for the item established on the Vendor's UOM and
Pricing Information page. The system makes a default UOM adjustment when the UOM on the transaction is the same as the vendor default UOM or when the
UOM on the transaction is not established for the item-vendor combination.
measure match)
Select to define an adjustment rule based on a specific UOM established for the item-vendor combination.
102 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
If you selected the UOM Match check box, select the UOM that you want to use for adjustments. The item-vendor UOMs must first be established on the
Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page.
Select to define an adjustment rule based on a specific ship to location code
(setID/ship to) established for the item-vendor combination.
Select the values if you selected the Match Ship check box.
Select to indicate a hard price adjustment. This is an adjustment that the system uses to the exclusion of all other adjustments, even those with earlier sequence numbers.
Select to indicate a final price adjustment. No further adjustments can be made after the system applies this adjustment.
Select to create a price adjustment scenario in which this price adjustment is ignored if the order qualifies for another adjustment. If no other adjustment applies, this adjustment applies even if the Ignore Flg check box is selected.
Suppose that you have the following price adjustment conditions for an item:
Apply a hard 10 percent discount if the UOM matches.
Apply a 100 USD discount, but ignore this if another adjustment applies. The
Ignore Flg is selected for this adjustment.
If you order the item in the matching UOM, the 10 percent discount is applied and the 100 USD discount is ignored, according to the selected Ignore Flg option.
If you order the item in a nonmatching UOM, you qualify only for the 100 USD discount. Because this is the only adjustment that applies, the adjustment can be applied.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining Vendor
Information," Defining Vendor Locations
Access the Price Adjustment Details page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Price Adjustments, Price
Adjustment Details).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
103
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
(copy price adjustment quantity)
(minimum quantity/maximum quantity)
Click to define the same price break quantities for multiple adjustment details.
Define the quantities for a location on the Price Adjustment Details page, then access the Price Adjustment page and insert a new row in the Adjustment by
UOM scroll area. Return to the Price Adjustment Details page, access the newly inserted detail row, and click this link to copy the adjustment quantities from the previous definition to the new definition.
Enter the minimum purchase order quantity allowed for this price. When you insert a new range, the minimum quantity for the new range is supplied by default to the maximum quantity of the old range plus one.
Enter the adjusted price that you want. The adjustment amount or percent is automatically calculated and appears.
multiple adjustments for a particular transaction, the final adjusted price will not equal any of the adjusted prices calculated for the adjustment rules. The adjusted price provides an idea of what would happen if only the single adjustment were applied.
This section provides overviews of price updates and the Price Update process and discusses how to:
•
•
•
Use standard price and business unit standard price updating online.
Use standard price and business unit price batch updating.
Run the Price Update process.
You can also update future effective-dated prices by running an application engine process.
them from the production tables into the item staging tables, where you can then alter the data.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing Items 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Item Catalog Maintenance"
Your PeopleSoft system may have multiple prices for an item, including the item's standard price, item and vendor price, and standard price by business unit. In addition, if a contract is in place for an item, contract pricing may override other prices. At times you may need to update prices in multiple places to keep information current when prices change and to prevent errors during the PO Build process.
The price update feature enables you to implement price changes by:
104 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
•
•
•
•
Automatically updating an item's standard price whenever an item/vendor price with a current effective date is updated using the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page.
Updating the item's standard price based on an item/vendor price that was entered in the past for an upcoming effective date.
After the future effective-dated prices are entered, and the Price Update process is run on or after the date that the item/vendor price becomes effective, the item's standard price is updated to reflect the new item/vendor pricing.
Automatically updating an item's business unit standard price whenever an item/vendor price is updated using the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page.
Updating the item's business unit standard price based on an item/vendor price that was future effectivedated at the time that it was entered.
After the future effective-dated prices are entered, and the Price Update process is run on or after the date the price becomes effective, the item's standard price is updated to reflect the new item/vendor pricing.
•
Updating standard prices with the current effective item/vendor prices and business unit standard prices that are loaded through the Item Loader.
standard prices. Contract pricing is a special pricing for purchases meeting specific criteria. Not all purchases may qualify for contract pricing; therefore, the contract price does not exist on the item definition. The system automatically assigns a contract to a purchase order when the criteria are met.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing Items 9.1 PeopleBook, "Loading Items"
The Price Update process scans the Item/Vendor tables for dates that have become effective and calculates the new standard price or business unit standard price based on the price entered for that effective date on the
Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page. It also scans for prices that have been loaded into the system with the Item Loader.
You must run the Price Update process to pick up any future effective-dated prices that have become effective and to calculate the new prices. You can also use this page to update a price that is currently effective or to update a price that is effective within a range of dates.
You must choose to use either the current date or date range. If you select the Date Range option, you must select a range of dates. The process compares the effective date of the Item/Vendor Price record to the current date or the date range to determine whether the price is in effect. The process applies updates in the order of effective date, applying the most current effective date as the end result.
You will probably want to schedule the Price Update process to run regularly if the system includes many price changes.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
105
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
Page Name Definition Name
Vendor's UOM and Pricing
Information (vendor's unit of measure and pricing information)
ITM_VENDOR_UOM
Purchasing Business Unit
Attributes
IMT_BU_PUR
Item Loader
Update PO Price
RUN_IN_ITMLOAD
RUN_PO_PRICE_UPD
Navigation Usage
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes, Item Vendor
Click the Item Vendor
UOM link on the
Purchasing Attributes - Item
Vendor page.
Update item/vendor prices and choose to apply the price changes to the item's standard price and
PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit standard prices.
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes, Purchasing
Controls
Click the BU Attributes link on the Purchasing Attributes
- Purchasing Controls page.
Mark items for standard price updating at the business unit level. This is a mandatory step for updating at the business unit level.
SCM Integrations, Process
Transactions, Items, Item
Loader
Mark items for standard price updating and business unit standard price updating when item/vendor UOM price records are entered in batch. The Item Loader process (IN_ITMLOAD) is run to update the PeopleSoft application tables with the item data in the Item Loader staging tables.
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Update PO Price
Run the Price Update application engine process
(PO_PRICE_UPD) to scan the Item/Vendor UOM tables to locate item/vendor prices that have become effective and calculate the item's new standard price or business unit standard price based on the item/vendor
UOM price.
To update standard prices and business unit standard prices online:
1. Access the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page for the item and vendor that must be updated.
106 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
2. Change the pricing on the current row in the UOM Attributes group box or insert a new row with a new price.
cannot have a status of Inactive. If the row is inactive, an error message appears when the changes are saved.
3. Select To Be Upd (to be updated) in the Standard Price Update Status field to apply the price change to the item's standard price on the Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Attributes page.
4. Select ToBe Upd (to be updated) in the BU Price Update Status field to apply the price change to the standard prices by PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit.
You must also select the Update Business Unit Price check box on the Purchasing Business Unit
Attributes page because the business unit is not specified on the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page.
instead of To Be Upd.
5. Verify that you have selected only one item/vendor price to update the item's standard prices.
If multiple item/vendor prices are selected when you save the item changes, the system will prompts you to proceed with the new selected item/vendor price or keep the previous selected price.
6. Click the OK button on the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page.
7. Save the Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page.
•
The system updates the standard prices as in the following way:
•
If you selected To Be Upd (to be updated) in the Standard Price Update Status field and the new price is effective currently, the new price appears in the Standard Price field of the Purchasing Attributes -
Purchasing Attributes page.
•
When the price is updated, the value in the Standard Price Update Status field on the Vendor's UOM and Pricing Information page is changed to Updated by default.
•
If necessary, the UOM and currency of the item/vendor price are converted from the vendor UOM and currency code to the standard UOM and currency code located on the Purchasing Attributes -
Purchasing Attributes page.
•
•
If you selected To Be Upd (to be updated) in the BU Price Update Status field and the price is effective currently, all business units that match the setID/item combination and that have the Business Unit Update
Price check box selected on the Purchasing Business Unit Attributes page will have the new price applied.
When the price is updated, the value in the BU Price Update Status field on the Vendor's UOM and
Pricing Information page becomes Updated by default.
If necessary, the UOM and currency of the item/vendor price are converted from the vendor UOM and currency code to the standard UOM and currency code located on the Purchasing Attributes -
Purchasing Attributes page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
107
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
•
Any future effective-dated prices will take effect when the Price Update process has run on or after the effective date.
conversion factor (if one exists). When no vendor override exists, the conversion factor for the Inventory
Item UOM setup process is used (INV_ITEM_UOM). If that conversion rate does not exist, the Units of
Measure page is used to determine the conversion factor. If no row is on the Units of Measure page that coincides with the item/vendor UOM (from UOM) and the item standard UOM (to UOM), an error message appears.
CUR_RT_TBL record to determine the conversion factor. If no row on this record coincides with the item/vendor currency code (from currency code) and the item standard currency code (to currency code), an error message appears.
To update standard prices with data entered using the Item Loader:
1. Select the items that you want to update in the Item Loader.
a. Access the Item Loader page.
b. In the Item Load Type field, select Item Pricelist.
This processes item data that is staged with the Item Price List EIP, ITEM_PRICELIST_LOAD.
2. Select Update Standard Price to update the item standard price when a currently effective item/vendor
UOM price record is loaded and set the Standard Price Update Status field to To Be Upd for the future effective-dated records.
3. Select Update Business Unit Price to update business unit standard prices when a currently effective item/vendor UOM price record is loaded, and set the BU Price Update status to To Be Upd for the future effective-dated records.
To update business unit prices, you must also select the Update Business Unit Price check box for all items on the Purchasing Business Unit Attributes page.
4. Mark items on the Purchasing Business Unit Attributes page for standard price updating at the business unit level.
Select the Update Business Unit Price check box and click the OK button to save the changes.
When you are updating with prices loaded using the Item Loader, this step enables business units that match the setID/item combination to have the new price applied.
108 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
5. For any future effective-dated prices, run the Price Update process on or after the effective dates.
a. Access the Price Update page.
b. Use the page controls to select criteria for the price updates.
The Price Update process scans the Item/Vendor tables for dates that have become effective and calculates the new standard price based on the price entered for that effective date on the item/vendor
UOM price entered with the Item Loader.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing Items 9.1 PeopleBook, "Loading Items"
Access the Update PO Price page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Update PO Price).
Update PO Price page
You can use the filter controls on this page to limit the prices to be updated.
Date Range
Select to process prices that are currently effective.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
109
Defining Purchasing Item Information
Chapter 4
Select to process prices that are in effect within the range that you specify in the
Date From/Date To fields.
To define item ship to locations, use the Item ShipTo Locations component (ITM_SHIPTO_VNDR). Use the
ITM_SHIPTO_VNDR_CI component interface to load data into the staging tables for this component.
This section discusses how to define priority vendors for specific item and ship to location combinations. For more information about defining priority vendors for specific item and vendor location combinations, see the
"Using Purchase Order Sourcing" chapter. The pages are similar.
See Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Sourcing by Region, page 833.
definition on this page (if the Override Suggested Vendor option is selected on the Sourcing Controls page).
Page Name
Item Ship To Locations
Item Vendor by Region
Definition Name
ITM_SHIPTO_VNDR
ITM_REGION_VNDR
Navigation
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Item Ship To
Locations
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Item Ship To
Locations
Usage
Set up a prioritized list of vendors and vendor locations for a particular item and ship to location combination.
Define vendor priority and vendor location by region.
Access the Item Ship To Locations page (Items, Define Items and Attributes, Item Ship To Locations).
Select each shipping location that you're defining for the item. Ship to location codes are established on the Ship To Locations page.
Select a region code to associate to this ship to location.
110 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Defining Purchasing Item Information
Select to enable purchase options to be created in PeopleSoft Supply Planning for the PeopleSoft Inventory business unit related to this ship to location.
The purchase option then enables the creation of new purchase orders through
PeopleSoft Supply Planning for this PeopleSoft Inventory business unit. If this check box is not selected at the item and ship to level, it will not be available at the item ship to vendor level in the List of Vendors grid box.
List of Vendors
Select a vendor setID. You cannot select a setID value and vendor that already exists in another row when the record definition does not allow duplicate entries.
Displays the priority value for the vendor setID and vendor combination with 1 being the highest priority.
Select a vendor. Available vendors are those for which item vendor relationships have been established on the Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page.
Select the vendor location.
Select the shipping method for this item vendor.
Enter the lead time for shipping to the item ship to location. This lead time accommodates multiple sites receiving goods from the same vendor location where each location requires its own lead time. The lead time defined at this level with the lead time option of Use will be the first level default value. If a value is not specified at this level, the system checks the item vendor by region.
Select the lead time option that you want to use at this item/ship to level. When vendors are assigned to requisitions in purchasing, the purchasing system checks a hierarchy to find the highest priority vendors. First, it checks for vendor priorities based on the item/ship to location. Next, it checks vendor priorities based on the item/region. And, finally it checks vendor priorities based on the item. PeopleSoft Supply Planning uses this feature, for example, if a purchase option does not have adequate lead time, the Supply Planning can go to the next prioritized option to determine whether it can use that option to meet the demand.
Select Default to use the next level lead time (item/region). Select Use to use the lead time defined at this level. If you do not specify a value for use at the first two levels, the system checks the item vendor followed by the purchase item.
Select to enable purchase options to be created in PeopleSoft Supply Planning for the PeopleSoft Inventory business unit related to this ship to location.
The purchase option then enables the creation of new purchase orders through
PeopleSoft Supply Planning for this PeopleSoft Inventory business unit. If this check box is not selected at the item/ship to level, it will not be available at the item ship to vendor level in the List of Vendors grid box.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
111
Defining Purchasing Item Information Chapter 4
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining Vendor
Information," Defining Vendor Locations
To define purchasing kits, use the Purchasing Kit component (ITM_CONFIG_TBL).
This section provides an overview of purchasing kits and lists the page used to create purchasing kits.
A purchasing kit is a set of components that comprise two or more items. Purchasing kits contain items and quantities that are often ordered together.
When you enter a requisition or purchase order, you can order by purchasing kit ID to capture all items and quantities in the kit instead of entering each item and quantity separately.
When you enter a purchasing kit ID on a transaction line, the system creates a separate line for each of the kit's component items. The quantity of each line item is by default the quantity of that item per kit multiplied by the number of kits that you order. For example, if a kit includes one CD-ROM drive and two speakers and you order two kits, the system generates a line for the CD-ROM drive with a quantity of two and a line for the speakers with a quantity of four.
The account and alternate account that you define on the purchasing kit definition appears on the requisition distribution line when you associate a purchasing kit with a requisition.
Page Name
Purchasing Kit Definition
Definition Name
PURCH_KIT_TBL
Navigation
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Purchasing Kit
Definition
Usage
Define purchasing kits.
112 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
This chapter provides an overview of miscellaneous charges and discusses how to define miscellaneous charge defaults.
You can add miscellaneous charges to a purchase order in addition to sales and use taxes and value-added taxes (VAT). Miscellaneous charges can include freight, set up, insurance, and a variety of other costs incurred to deliver purchased goods to a location. Designating the charge as a "landed cost component" also enables you to incorporate the additional cost into the item's inventory value.
If you have PeopleSoft Inventory and PeopleSoft Cost Management installed, the landed cost charges may be defined as additional costs, beyond the merchandise value of the item. Depending on the costing method defined for the inventory item, the values associated with the additional costs are used to value inventory transactions or treated as variances against the item's standard cost. Comparisons of estimated and actual landed costs are provided through PeopleSoft Cost Management reports.
If you do not have PeopleSoft Cost Management installed, you can still define and use miscellaneous charges that are added to the purchase orders. You can set up PeopleSoft Purchasing to automatically calculate miscellaneous charges based on items, item and vendor combinations, and other criteria. A calculation method is assigned to each miscellaneous charge, and an allocation method is assigned to each component.
Alternatively, you can manually add miscellaneous charges on the purchase order.
To use miscellaneous charges and landed costs in PeopleSoft Purchasing, set up miscellaneous charges on the
Misc Charge/Landed Cost Defn page.
Optionally, you can use the Misc Chrg/Landed Cost Template page to define templates that group several miscellaneous charges. These templates can be associated with an item, category, purchase order, or purchase order schedule. Receipt lines are assigned the estimated costs of their associated purchase order schedule.
Once you have created miscellaneous charges and miscellaneous charge templates, you can assign them to purchase orders on the Header - Miscellaneous Charges page. You can also assign miscellaneous charges and templates to items and categories using the Miscellaneous Charges - Miscellaneous page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
113
Defining Miscellaneous Charges and Landed Costs Chapter 5
See Also
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Capturing Item Miscellaneous Charges, page 99
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Assigning Miscellaneous Charges and Templates to
PeopleSoft Enterprise Cost Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "PeopleSoft Enterprise Cost Management Reports"
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Miscellaneous Charges and Landed Costs
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Miscellaneous Charge and Landed Cost Templates
To populate the purchase orders with the correct miscellaneous charge codes or landed cost templates, you must design a series of parameter combinations. When you enter a purchase order that matches the combination of parameters that you defined, the assigned charge code or template is used.
You can set up default miscellaneous charges that are automatically calculated based on the following combinations, where level one overrides level two, and so on:
Level
1
Miscellaneous Charge Hierarchy Criteria
Item, vendor, business unit, and ship to location.
(INV_ITEM_ID, VENDOR_ID, BUSINESS_UNIT, and SHIPTO_ID)
2
3
4
5
Item, vendor, and business unit.
(INV_ITEM_ID, VENDOR_ID, and BUSINESS_UNIT; and no SHIPTO_ID)
Item and vendor.
(INV_ITEM_ID and VENDOR_ID; and no BUSINESS_UNIT nor SHIPTO_ID)
Item.
(INV_ITEM_ID; and no VENDOR_ID, BUSINESS_UNIT, nor SHIPTO_ID)
Category, vendor, business unit, and ship to location.
(CATEGORY_ID, VENDOR_ID, BUSINESS_UNIT, and SHIPTO_ID; and no
INV_ITEM_ID)
114 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Defining Miscellaneous Charges and Landed Costs
Level
6
7
8
Miscellaneous Charge Hierarchy Criteria
Category, vendor, and business unit.
(CATEGORY_ID, VENDOR_ID, and BUSINESS_UNIT; and no INV_ITEM_ID nor
SHIPTO_ID)
Category and vendor.
(CATEGORY_ID and VENDOR_ID; and no INV_ITEM_ID, SHIPTO_ID, nor
BUSINESS_UNIT)
Category.
(CATEGORY_ID; and no INV_ITEM_ID, VENDOR_ID, BUSINESS_UNIT, nor
SHIPTO_ID)
For example, you can set up miscellaneous charges that are automatically calculated on the purchase order when a certain item is ordered from a particular vendor, for a particular business unit, and a specific ship to location of the business unit. You can also set up a miscellaneous charge that is automatically calculated for a particular item.
Only one Miscellaneous Charges - Miscellaneous page combination is used. The higher level overrides the lower level. For example, suppose that you defined miscellaneous charges for an item (level 4), and also for the category (level 8) to which the item belongs, only the miscellaneous charges that you defined for the item are used. The miscellaneous charges that you defined for the category are only used for items that do not have miscellaneous charges specifically defined.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
115
This chapter provides an overview of PeopleSoft Purchasing workflow and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set up the approval framework for PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Set up the PeopleTools workflow technology for PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Issue requisition sourcing workflow notifications.
Issue purchase order cancellation workflow notifications.
Issue contract expiration and exceed maximum workflow notifications.
Use purchase order acknowledgement alert workflow notifications.
Use Item Loader exception workflow notifications.
Use rebate manager workflow notifications.
Use receipt quantity change workflow notifications.
Use settlement manager workflow notifications.
Many daily tasks are part of a larger process that involves several steps and people working together. The term workflow refers to this process, which could encompass, for example; approving a purchase order or notifying a manager of an exception. To facilitate this type of multiuser process, PeopleSoft can automatically trigger workflow notifications to inform the next person in the process of work awaiting them.
Use PeopleSoft workflows to:
•
•
•
Automate the information flow.
Enforce business process rules.
Combine the tasks of several users into a business process.
PeopleSoft offers two types of workflow:
1. PeopleTools Workflow Technology documented in the Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Workflow
Technology. This method is used to approve transactions and generate workflow notifications of various events. To setup this workflow, users must possess technical skills in PeopleSoft PeopleTools to create and maintain workflow using PeopleSoft Application Designer, PeopleCode, and Workflow
Administrator.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
117
Using Workflow Chapter 6
2. PeopleSoft Approval Framework documented in the PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook:
Approval Framework. This method is used to approve transactions. The approval framework requires less technical skills than the PeopleTools workflow technology. For example, all of the steps in approval framework are defined by means of PeopleSoft pages rather than the underlying PeopleSoft PeopleCode, so functional users can design and maintain workflow using these online PeopleSoft pages without technical developers having to create workflow rules. In addition, the approval framework enables you to approve transactions at the line level and use several additional approval features.
Within PeopleSoft Purchasing, the PeopleTools workflow technology is used for all workflow notifications.
Purchase orders and requisitions can be approved using the approval process within the PeopleTools workflow technology or the approval framework. This choice of workflow method is made at the business unit level. PeopleSoft eProcurement uses the approval framework to approve requisitions and purchase orders.
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Set up the Approval Framework in PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Set up Email Approvals for PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Within PeopleSoft Purchasing, the approval of requisitions and purchase orders can be handled by the approval framework. Most of the work has already been done for you and is delivered with your PeopleSoft system. You need to activate the workflow and adjust the approval setup to identify your individual users, templates, and servers. This chapter discusses the setup of requisition and purchase order approval within
PeopleSoft Purchasing.
After a requisition or purchase order is created, the system routes the transaction to an approver. The approver can view and take action in two ways: using their worklist or navigating directly to an approvals page. The approver can preview, in a graphical format, the path that the transaction approval will take, view who has already approved the transaction, and see any comments that previous approvers have entered.
While the system awaits approval action, the approval framework maintains the overall state of the requisition or purchase order, invokes routings, and interacts with the application classes.
•
•
The approval framework enables you to perform a number of approval tasks, including:
•
Approving a transaction (requisition or purchase order) at the header or line-level. You can approve the entire transaction at the header level or approve individual lines at the line level.
Performing mass approvals. Using the Manage Requisition Approvals page or the Approve Purchase
Orders page, you can select multiple transactions to be approved or denied at one time. Use the Mark All icons to perform mass approval.
Denying a transaction. Once a transaction is denied, the workflow stops.
118 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
•
•
•
•
Hold a transaction or transaction line. The hold action enables an approver to stop the approval process and research an issue. When hold is used, the system automatically adds the person who created the transaction as an ad hoc reviewer so that a comment can be sent. Once the transaction is placed on hold, it cannot move to the next approval step until the approver removes the hold.
Pushing back a transaction or transaction line. A pushback returns the transaction to the previous approval step. The meaning of push back is that the approver is questioning the prior step's approval and is requesting clarification.
Adding or removing ad hoc approvers or reviewers. During the approval process, approvers can add other approvers or reviewers to the current or a later stage of the approval process. For example, if a buyer wants input from an inventory analyst, she can add the analyst as an approver. This action is called ad hoc approval, and it applies only to the approval instance in which the addition occurs and does not affect the underlying process definition used for other requests.
Reviewing an online transaction that shows the layout of the printed version. The transaction opens up as a second window and can be printed. The Oracle XML Publisher is used to generate this report, and you can customize it.
•
•
•
•
Making comments to be viewed by other approvers or reviewers.
Approving a transaction that has been changed. When a transaction is changed during or after the approval process, the approval framework can require re-approval of the changes using the same approval component as the original transaction.
Approving or denying a transaction using email rather than PeopleSoft pages.
Self approval of transactions. This feature can be restricted or turned off.
amount.
•
Alternate approvers who are assigned to receive emails and Worklist notifications for the primary approver when the primary approver is not available.
For a complete list of approval features, see the Understanding Approval Features section of the
Understanding the Approval Framework chapter of the PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook:
Approval Framework.
•
•
•
During the approval process these actions take place:
•
The system notifies approvers and reviewers that there is a pending transaction (requisition or purchase order) that needs their attention.
Approvers and reviewers access the transaction details, provide comments, and take action (approve, deny, or push back) for the requisition or purchase order. In addition, approvers and reviewers can be granted the authority to add additional ad hoc approvers or reviewers to the workflow for a pending transaction.
The system checks for additional routings in the same routing path.
If all steps have been completed for the stage, then the next step is started in the next stage. If there are multiple routing paths, the system routes them in parallel.
Once all approvers of a transaction have approved it, the approval framework notifies the PeopleSoft
Purchasing application. The requisition or purchase order is then ready for the next step.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
119
Using Workflow
See PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
Chapter 6
Complete information about the setup and use of the approval framework is located in the PeopleSoft
Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
Use the following steps to set up the requisition and purchase order approval process within PeopleSoft
Purchasing:
Set Up the User Profile Component
•
For the users with PeopleSoft Purchasing:
•
Use the User Profile-Workflow page to identify the supervisor who should approve the user's new requisitions or purchase orders.
Use the User Profile-Roles page to enter the roles of the user. A role is a class of users who perform the same type of work, such as a requestor, buyer, or manager. A role describes how people fit into workflow.
Roles are defined under PeopleTools, Security, Permissions & Roles, Roles.
See "Defining Users for Approval Framework," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval
Framework.
Define User Lists
Use the User List Definition page to define lists of users who can approve transactions. These lists are used with steps in the approval process. The PeopleSoft product delivers a set of default user list roles corresponding to the roles within an organization. For PeopleSoft Purchasing, default user lists include buyers, buyers for hardware, buyers for Software, line level approvers, department managers, and project managers.
See "Defining User List," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
Grant eProcurement Role Actions to the Appropriate User Roles
•
•
•
•
•
If your environment includes PeopleSoft eProcurement as well as PeopleSoft Purchasing and the approval framework is used in PeopleSoft Purchasing, then the following eProcurement role actions enable approval features for requisitions in PeopleSoft Purchasing:
ALLOWHOLD: Displays the Hold button on requisition approval pages.
ALLOW_ADHOC_ONSUBMIT : Allows for adding or removing ad hoc approvers after you submit the requisition.
ALLOW_ADHOC_ONPREVW : Enables users to add or remove ad hoc approvers on requisition preview.
CANCHANGEALL: Enables a requester to change any field on the requisition without restarting the approval process while the requisition is in a pending approved status.
CANCHANGEDISTRIB: Enables the requester to change any field on the requisition distribution without restarting the approval process while the requisition is in a pending approved status.
120 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
•
CANCHANGEHEADER: Enables the requester to change any field on the requisition header without restarting the approval process while the requisition is in a pending approved status.
•
CANCHANGELINE: Enables the requester to change any field on the requisition line, with the exception of quantity and price, without restarting the approval process while the requisition is in a pending approved status.
•
•
CANCHANGESCHEDULE: Enables the requester to change any field on the requisition schedule without restarting the approval process while the requisition is in a pending approved status.
MASS_APPROVER: Enables a requester to approve multiple requisitions at one time. The Approve
Requisitions component is where the actions are enabled.
•
WF_EXPAND_APPROVER:Enables users to always see the Review/Edit Approvers section in the eProcurement Approval page when it is expanded.
If PeopleSoft eProcurement is not installed in your environment, then the eProcurement role actions do not need to be setup.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise eProcurement 9.1 PeopleBook, "Determining Technical Implementation Options,"
Attaching Role Actions to User Roles.
Establish the Requisition Status at Save
Use the Requester Setup page to establish the status of a requisition when it is saved. The requisition status of
Pending is immediately submitted to workflow when the new requisition is saved, however, the status of
Open is not submitted to workflow. An open requisition cannot be viewed on the approver's worklist, in the
Manage Requisition Approvals page or the Requisition Approval page.
In addition, you must authorize the user to approve requisitions by selecting the Approval check box in the
Allowed Requisition Actions group box of the User Preferences: Procurement - Requisition Authorizations page.
Establish the Purchase Order Status at Save
Use the Buyer Setup page to establish the status of a purchase order when it is saved. The purchase order status of Pending is immediately submitted to workflow when the new PO is saved, however, the status of
Open is not submitted to workflow. An open purchase order cannot be viewed on the approver's worklist or in the Approve Purchase Orders page.
In addition, you must authorize the user to approve purchase orders by selecting the Approval check box in the Allowed Purchase Order Actions group box of the User Preferences: Procurement - Purchase Orders
Authorizations page.
Create Change Templates
Define change templates for requisitions and purchase orders to identify when a field change should initiate the re-approval of the transaction by the approval framework.
To create a change template for requisitions, use the change template type of Requisition. When you first create the change template, the system defaults the re-approval workflow trigger for the following fields in both the REQ_LINE and REQ_LINE_SHIP records:
1. MERCHANDISE_AMT
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
121
Using Workflow Chapter 6
2. PRICE_REQ
3. QTY_REQ
Once you have created the change template for requisitions, attach the template to the Purchasing business unit using the Purchasing Definition-Req Change Options page. The change template entered in this page are shared by the same business unit across the PeopleSoft Purchasing, eProcurement, and Services Procurement applications. If no requisition change template is defined for the business unit, then any field changes start the re-approval of the requisition line using the approval framework feature.
To create a change template for purchase orders, use the change template type of Purchase Order. When you first create the change template, the system defaults the re-approval workflow trigger for the following fields in the PO_LINE_SHIP record:
1. MERCHANDISE_AMT
2. PRICE_PO
3. QTY_PO
After you create the change template for purchase orders, attach the template to the Purchasing business unit using the Purchasing Definition-PO Change Options page. The change template entered in this page are shared by the same business unit across the PeopleSoft Purchasing, eProcurement, and Services Procurement applications.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Creating Change Templates.
See Chapter 3, "Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options," Establishing
Change Options and Approval Rules, page 36.
Review the Approval Transaction Registry
The approval transaction registry is the interface application used to register an application with the approval framework. You use the Register Transactions page to link the components, event handler, records, and classes that you created into the approval process for an application transaction, such as a requisition or purchase order. The main records and components that make up the transaction are registered, along with the approval transaction on which to base the approval process definition.
Any PeopleSoft delivered approvals already have the Approval Transaction Registry populated. No additional configuration is typically needed. This includes the transaction registry for requisition approval (process ID
Requisition) and for purchase order approval (process ID PurchaseOrder).
The transaction registry with the process ID of Requisition uses the cross-reference table PV_REQ_AW and the default approval component of PV_REQ_APPROVAL. Keep in mind that a changed requisition uses the same workflow setup as the original requisition; it is a re-approval of the requisition. PeopleSoft Purchasing and PeopleSoft eProcurement share the same setup data, even though the objects begin with PV.
The transaction registry with the process ID of PurchaseOrder uses the cross-reference table PO_AW and the default approval component of PO_APPROVAL.
See "Defining the Approval Transaction Registry," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval
Framework.
122 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Configure the Approval Transactions
Use the Configure Transactions page to select and define elements that determine what triggers a notification, who receives the notification, and the content of the notification. Notifications are mapped to work with the approval transaction registry and include menus and components and SQL definitions.
For the process ID of Requisition, use the approval component of PV_REQ_APPROVAL.
For the process ID of PurchaseOrder, use the approval component of PO_APPROVAL.
See "Configuring Approval Transactions," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval
Framework.
Set Up Process Definitions
Use the Setup Process Definition component to define an approval definition process. This definition is made up of the stages, paths, steps, and criteria that build a workflow.
See "Setting Up Approval Framework Process Definitions," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook:
Approval Framework.
Authorize Approvers and Roles for Dynamic Approval
PeopleSoft applications use workflow to configure approval paths in two manners. The first configuration is to define every approval in step-by-step fashion. The second manner is to create dynamic approvals. Use the
Approval Authorization component to authorize roles and approvers for dynamic paths.
See "Defining Dynamic Approvals," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
Set Up the Approval User Monitor
The approval monitor gives administrators a view into all approvals to which they have access, as well as the ability to take necessary actions on pending approvals. Each process ID can be configured using the Approval
Monitor Configuration page (Enterprise Components, Approvals, Approvals, Monitor Configuration).
Once configured, the Monitor Approvals page can be accessed from Enterprise Components, Approvals,
Approvals, Monitor Approvals.
See "Using the Approval Monitor," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise eProcurement 9.1 PeopleBook, "Determining Technical Implementation Options,"
Setting Up Event Notifications and Escalations.
Define Ad Hoc Notification Templates
•
•
•
Use the Generic Template Definition page to establish a common format for all ad hoc notifications. This provides functionality similar to the Approval Monitor but not limited to the administrators. Add templates for:
PO Approval
PO Approved
PO Cancelled
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
123
Using Workflow Chapter 6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PO Denied
PO Escalation
PO Information Added
PO Information Requested
PO Line Approval
PO Line Approved
PO Line Information Added
PO Line Information Requested
PO Line Pushback
PO Line Reviewed
PO Pushback
PO Review
Similar templates exist for requisitions.
See "Defining Notification Templates and Users for Approval Framework," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1
PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
Set Up Email Approvals for PeopleSoft Purchasing
The email collaboration feature enables applications to send, receive, and process emails with interactive content. You can use it to send email approvals for requisitions or purchase orders. You can send an HTML form to a user, and that user does not need to log in to his or her system to perform tasks.
Set Up the Notification and Escalation Manager
The Notification and Escalation Manager (NEM) is a mechanism used to process notifications and escalations on a specified interval. For example, escalations are used when an approver has not responded within a specified time period to a transaction that is pending approval. You can specify the time period (timeout) and you can specify alternate approvers to whom to notify and escalate the approval for further action. Timeout options are defined on the Approval Path Definition page.
To set up the NEM, use the following pages: Event Types, Setup Event, Event Status, and Schedule JobSet
Definitions.
See "Using the Notification and Escalation Manager," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook:
Approval Framework.
124 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Determining the Maximum Rows for the Approval Monitor and Other Pages
On the Installation Options- Purchasing page, enter the maximum number of lines to be displayed at one time in the Review/Edit Approvers section of the workflow approval components. Additional lines can be accessed by using the chunking options at the top of the section, including; using the Next Item button, Last Item button, or entering a range of lines and clicking the Retrieve button. Use the PO Approval Monitor field to define the maximum number of purchase order lines. Use the Requisition Approval Monitor field to define the maximum number of requisition lines. The default value for these fields is 5.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications," Defining Purchasing Installation Options.
Activate Workflow
•
Activate the approval framework for requisitions and purchase orders by using the:
•
Purchasing Definition-PO Change Options page. Use the Purchasing business unit to activate the approval framework for purchase orders in PeopleSoft Purchasing. Select the PO Workflow Approval Required check box to enable purchase order approval within the business unit. Select this check box to replace the
PeopleTools workflow technology (virtual approver) in PeopleSoft Purchasing with the approval framework. If you enable the approval framework for the Purchasing business unit, then it is enabled for eProcurement also. Once you have selected the PO Workflow Approval Required check box, use the PO
Create Exceptions group box and PO Change Request Exceptions group box to identify sources that do not require approval. The Change Template entered on this page is used by PeopleSoft Purchasing, eProcurement, and Services Procurement to determine which field changes to the original purchase order will launch the approval framework for PO re-approval. Select the Resubmit Workflow for Quantity and
Price Decrease check box to require approval of a PO changes with a decrease in item quantity or price.
Purchasing Definition-Req Change Options page. Use the Purchasing business unit to turn on the approval framework for requisitions in both PeopleSoft Purchasing and PeopleSoft eProcurement. Select the Workflow Approval Required check box to enable requisition approval within the business unit. By selecting this check box the PeopleTools workflow technology (virtual approver) in PeopleSoft
Purchasing is replaced by the approval framework. If you enable the approval framework for the
Purchasing business unit, then it is enabled for eProcurement also. The Change Template entered on this page is used by PeopleSoft Purchasing, eProcurement, and Services Procurement to determine which field changes to the original requisition will launch the approval framework for requisition re-approval.. Select the Resubmit Workflow for Quantity and Price Decrease check box to require approval of a requisition changes with a decrease in item quantity or price.
See Chapter 3, "Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options," Establishing
Change Options and Approval Rules, page 36.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
125
Using Workflow Chapter 6
Page Name
User Profiles - Roles
User Profiles - Workflow USER_WORKFLOW
User List Definition
Requester Setup
User Preferences:
Procurement - Requisition
Authorizations
OPR_REQ_AUTH
Buyer Setup
User Preferences:
Procurement - Purchase
Order Authorizations
Definition Name
USER_ROLES
PTAF_USER_LIST
REQUESTOR_TBL
BUYER_TBL
OPR_PO_AUTH
Navigation Usage
PeopleTools, Security, User
Profiles, User Profiles
Select the Roles tab.
Attach workflow roles to users.
See "Defining Users for
Approval," PeopleSoft
Enterprise FSCM 9.1
PeopleBook: Approval
Framework.
PeopleTools, Security, User
Profiles, User Profiles
Define supervisors.
See "Defining Users for
Approval," PeopleSoft
Enterprise FSCM 9.1
PeopleBook: Approval
Framework.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Approvals, User
List Setup
Define user-list definitions.
See "Defining User Lists,"
PeopleSoft Enterprise
FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook:
Approval Framework.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, Requester
Setup
Establish default information for requesters.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Common
Definitions, User
Preferences, Define User
Preferences, Procurement.
Click the Requisition
Authorizations link on the
Procurement page.
Authorize users to initiate and update requisitions for applicable requesters.
Enable users to approve requisitions. Define a user's requisition processing authority in relation to applicable requesters.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, Buyer Setup
Establish default information for buyers.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Common
Definitions, User
Preferences, Define User
Preferences, Procurement.
Click the Purchase Order
Authorizations link on the
Procurement page.
Authorize users to initiate and update purchase orders for applicable buyers.
Enable users to approve purchase orders. Define a user's purchase order processing authority.
126 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Page Name
Change Template
Purchasing Definition-PO
Change Options
Purchasing Definition-Req
Change Options
Register Transactions
Configure Transactions
Setup Process Definitions
Approval Authorization
Approval Monitor
Configuration
Definition Name
CHNG_ORD_TEMPLATE
BUS_UNIT_PO_APPR
BUS_UNIT_REQ_APPR
EOAW_TXN
EOAW_TXN_NOTIFY
EOAW_PRCS_MAIN
EOAW_AUTH
EOAW_MONDIS_CONFIG
Navigation
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, Change
Template
Usage
Identify the fields on a requisition, purchase order, or contract that can initiate the following actions when the field is changed. For a requisition identify the field changes that create change tracked records, require approval by the approval framework, and creation of a change request. For a purchase order identify the field changes that create change tracked records and require approval by the approval framework.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition, PO
Change Options
Define purchase order approval requirements for each business unit.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition, Req
Change Options
Define requisition approval requirements for each business unit.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Approvals,
Transaction Registry
Register an application with the approval framework.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Approvals,
Transaction Configuration
Use the Configuration
Transactions page to configure how the system uses the particular implementation of approval triggers.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Approvals,
Approval Process Setup
Define workflow approval process stages.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Approvals,
Authorize Approvers
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Approvals,
Monitor Configuration
Authorize roles and approvers for dynamic paths.
Configure the approval monitor.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
127
Using Workflow Chapter 6
Page Name
Monitor Approvals
Generic Template
Definition
Event Types
Setup Event
Event Status
Schedule JobSet Definitions
Installation Options-
Purchasing
Definition Name
EOAW_ADM_MON_SRC
WL_TEMPLATE_GEN
EOAW_NEM_EVENTS
EOAW_NEM_SETUP
EOAW_NEM_STATUS
SCHDLDEFN
INSTALLATION_PO
Navigation
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Approvals,
Monitor Approvals
Usage
View into all approvals to which you have access, as well as take necessary actions on pending approvals.
PeopleTools, Workflow,
Notifications, Generic
Templates
Use the Generic Template
Definition page to establish a common format for all ad hoc notifications.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Notification and
Escalations , Events
Associate events to a server.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Notification and
Escalations , Notifications and Escalations
Set up an escalation event and define the evaluation and action details.
Enterprise Components,
Approvals, Notification and
Escalations, Status
Check status of notification.
PeopleTools, Process
Scheduler, Schedule JobSet
Definitions
Set up a NEM to define the job to run, and how often you want it to run.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Install, Installation
Options, Purchasing
Set up PeopleSoft
Purchasing installation options including the maximum number of lines to be displayed at one time in the Review/Edit
Approvers section of the workflow approval components.
Use the PO Approval
Monitor Max Rows field to define the maximum number of purchase order lines.
Use the Req Approval
Monitor Max Rows field to define the maximum number of requisition lines.
128 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
The email collaboration framework allows applications to send, receive, and process emails with interactive content. It can be used to send email approvals for requisitions or purchase orders. You can send an HTML form to a user, and they do not need to log into their system to perform tasks.
These steps describe the flow of email collaboration:
1. A system event triggers PeopleSoft PeopleCode, which creates a collaborative email and sends it to a user.
2. The user who receives the email takes appropriate action and clicks Submit.
3. The user's submission is sent to an email account that is designated for holding responses.
4. An application engine program runs on a configured interval, polling the repository for new emails. It processes the emails and publishes them as service operation messages.
5. The service operation runs, allowing the implementing application to process the data in a known and supported format.
To set up email approvals:
1. On the Register Transactions page, complete the Notification Options section to include email notifications. Be sure to select the Use Email Approvals check box. Update the Register Transactions page for the process IDs of Requisition and PurchaseOrder.
See "Defining the Approval Transaction Registry," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook:
Approval Framework.
2. On the Configure Transactions page, complete the Notification Options section. Select the Sent Email
Approvals to All check box or add a user list in the Email Approval User List field. Update the Configure
Transactions page for the process IDs of Requisition and PurchaseOrder.
See "Configuring Approval Transactions," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval
Framework.
3. Design the format of the email to be sent using the Form Element Designer page, Form Layout Designer page, and Field Mapping page within the Email Collaboration menu (Enterprise Components, Approvals,
Email Collaboration). For directions, see the Using Email Collaboration chapter of the Enterprise
Components: PeopleSoft Approval Framework 9.1 PeopleBook.
See "Using Email Collaboration," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework.
4. Use the Node Properties page to modify the PT_EMC_GETMAIL node to enable email collaboration. For directions, see the Using Email Collaboration chapter of the Enterprise Components: PeopleSoft Approval
Framework 9.1 PeopleBook.
5. Set up the PO_EMAIL_PO_APPROVAL and PV_EMAIL_REQ_APPROVAL service operations within
PeopleSoft Integration Broker and Enterprise Components. The Purchase Order Approval
(PO_EMAIL_PO_APPROVAL) service operation is used for collaborative emails for purchase orders and the Requisition Approval (PV_EMAIL_REQ_APPROVAL) service operation is used for collaborative emails for requisitions. For directions in activating a service operation, see the
Implementing Integrations chapter of the PeopleSoft Enterprise Supply Chain Management Integration
9.1 PeopleBook.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
129
Using Workflow Chapter 6
6. Schedule the PeopleSoft Application Engine program EOAWEMC to run on a regular basis. For directions, see the Using Email Collaboration chapter of the Enterprise Components: PeopleSoft Approval
Framework 9.1 PeopleBook.
PeopleSoft delivers service operations in PeopleSoft Integration Broker with a default status of Inactive. You must activate each service operation before attempting to send or receive data from a third-party source. Use the information in this table and refer to the setup instructions in the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management
Integrations 9.1 PeopleBook, "Implementing Integrations" chapter, Setting Up Service Operations section.
Service Operation Direction and Type Handlers
EmailSubscription
Chunkin g
Available
?
Integrates
With
No External
XML
PO_EMAIL_PO_APPROVA
L
Inbound
Asynchronous
PV_EMAIL_REQ_APPROV
AL
Inbound
Asynchronous
EmailSubscription No External
XML
See Also
"Configuring Approval Transactions," PeopleSoft Enterprise FSCM 9.1 PeopleBook: Approval Framework
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Integration Broker
PeopleSoft Enterprise Supply Chain Management Integration 9.1 PeopleBook, "Implementing Integrations,"
Setting Up Service Operations
This section discusses how to:
•
•
•
Set up approvals in PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
Set up EDX exception workflow.
Set up notification in PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
Use PeopleSoft Application Designer and PeopleSoft Workflow Administrator to use the workflow processes that are delivered with PeopleSoft Purchasing. You can also use PeopleSoft Application Designer to design and build your own business processes, including workflow rules. You use PeopleSoft Workflow
Administrator to access, monitor, analyze, and control workflow in your organization.
130 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
•
PeopleTools Workflow Technology can be used to:
•
Approve transactions. For example, PeopleTools Workflow Technology can route requisitions or purchase orders through the approval process to ensure that the transactions are approved before moving forward in the business process.
Send workflow notifications to managers, buyers, requesters, and other users about events and actions that are relevant to them. For example, PeopleTools Workflow Technology can notify the appropriate buyer when a POA is received that requires buyer approval before being processed.
Use PeopleSoft Application Designer to build the workflow business process for PeopleTools Workflow
Technology. The workflow process is based on rules, roles, and routings.
Rule Set Up
Rules determine which activities are required to process your business data. For example, you might implement a rule that says department managers must approve all requests for external classes.
You implement rules through workflow events, such as PeopleCode that evaluates a condition and triggers a notification (a routing) when appropriate.
Role and User Set Up
Users are the people who participate in one or more workflow processes. Users can be PeopleSoft users, as well as people and groups who don't have direct access to PeopleSoft applications, but rather send or receive data using workflow. For example, if your workflow delivers electronic order forms to vendors, your vendors are users.
When you build a workflow, you identify the users who perform each activity according to their roles in the organization and in the workflow. The process of approving a purchase order transaction, for example, may involve the roles of buyer, purchasing analyst, and manager. When the system routes a work item to the next activity in a business process, it forwards the item to the users who fill the role that is assigned to that activity.
In some cases, you may define multiple users who fill the role. In most cases, the system runs a query to find out who the appropriate users are for a given work item. You define users' roles when you assign user IDs.
information that is common to many applications is located in the PeopleSoft Enterprise Application
Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook.
Route Controls Set Up
Route controls further specify which users that belong to a specific role are to receive a workflow item. For instance, you may have a role of manager, but not every manager in the system should receive every purchase order for approval. A particular manager may be responsible for a certain purchase order business unit.
Establish the business unit as a route control and assign specific business unit values to specific users. By doing this, you limit the routing of purchase orders from a particular business unit to those managers who should be reviewing those purchase orders.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
131
Using Workflow
See Also
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Workflow Technology
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Getting Started With PeopleSoft
Enterprise Application Fundamentals"
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Security Administration
Chapter 6
You can use PeopleSoft Workflow to automate the approval process for requisitions and purchase orders.
Depending on the configuration of the business unit, amount and ChartField approvals may be needed before the system changes the status of a requisition or purchase order from Pending Approval to Approved. While these approvals are independent of each other, they are set up similarly.
Changing the status on the requisition or purchase order approval table to In Process triggers the workflow approval process. Workflow searches for requisitions or purchase orders that require approval and moves those requests to the appropriate users for approval.
•
You can use either of the following methods to send requisitions and purchase orders into workflow:
•
Use the PeopleSoft Application Engine processes.
PeopleSoft Application Engine processes use queries to determine which requisitions and purchase orders are eligible for workflow routings and approvals. To be eligible, a requisition or purchase order must have a status of Pending Approval and the approval status on the requisition or purchase order approval table must be Initial. The requisition or purchase order approval table tracks the approval status.
For eligible requisitions and purchase orders, the PeopleSoft Application Engine processes sets statuses on the approval table to In Process, and the first worklist entries are created for the requisition and purchase order. The requisition or purchase order is now in workflow. The status remains as Pending
Approval, until the requisition or purchase order completes its workflow cycle and the status changes to
Approved.
Perform manual steps on the requisition and purchase order approval pages.
If the requisition or purchase order requires workflow approval, setting the requisition or purchase order status to Approved on these pages changes the status on the requisition or purchase order approval table to
In Process, which triggers workflow approval.
This requisition or purchase-order-in-process is an activity in the workflow process that must be approved before it can move to the next event in the process. After the requisition or purchase order is submitted, workflow verifies that you have the authority to approve the activity. If you don't have the authority, workflow notifies the approver at the next higher level that the activity needs approval and adds the activity to that approver's worklist or sends email notification. The status of the requisition or purchase order remains as
In Process. Workflow moves the activity up the hierarchy of approvers until the person with the proper authority approves the activity.
This diagram illustrates the use of workflow objects to define the approval workflow for purchase orders:
132 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Purchase order approval process workflow
Virtual Approver
PeopleSoft Purchasing uses a workflow model that is called Virtual Approver to handle the requisition and purchase order approval processes. Using the Virtual Approver model, you define approval rules in
PeopleSoft Application Designer and routings in PeopleSoft Workflow Administrator, instead of writing lines of PeopleCode.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
133
Using Workflow Chapter 6
When you define an approval process, the Virtual Approver determines transactions that need further approval and routes them to the appropriate approval user. Users enter transactions, as they always have, through a PeopleSoft application page. When an user saves the page, the Virtual Approver checks the approval rules that are defined through the Approval Rule Set to determine what kind of approval is necessary.
On purchase orders and requisitions, the approval transactions are the amount and ChartField approval transactions. If the current user has the authority to approve the transaction, the Virtual Approver sets the transaction status to Approved and doesn't route it using workflow.
within the Workflow component. If workflow isn't being used, the approver manually accesses the approval pages and the approval rules are invoked when he or she saves the page.
The purchase order approval process workflow diagram illustrates a typical example of how you might use the Virtual Approver model to define approval processes. In the example, the system checks both the purchase order amount and the ChartField authorization.
If the system finds that the person who set the purchase order status to Pending Approval has authorization for both of those approval transactions, the purchase order is approved.
However, if the purchase order needs further approval, the system adds a transaction to the worklists or sends an email to the appropriate users, based on the rules that are set up in PeopleSoft Workflow Administrator.
The purchase order status changes to In Process until all approval actions are complete. The next user selects the worklist entry on the Worklist page to access the approval pages and recycles, approves, or denies the purchase order. If the user denies the purchase order, the system generates an email message and a worklist entry to notify the buyer that appears on the purchase order.
Setting Up Requisition Approvals
When you use the PeopleTools Workflow Technology, requisitions are approved using workflow roles, rules, and routings. To implement workflow approvals, define the roles, rules, and routings using the Workflow component. Your system is delivered with basic approval rules already established.
To set up requisition approvals:
1. Access the User Preferences - Procurement: Requisition Authorizations page.
To authorize a user to approve requisitions, select the Approval check box in the Allowed Requisition
Actions group box.
2. Access the Purchasing Definition - Req Approval Options page. a. If you want to use automatic approvals for the selected business unit, do not define any approval requirements on this page. b. If you want to use workflow approvals for the selected business unit, define your amount and
ChartField approval options.
3. Access the Requester Setup page.
In the Requisition Status group box, select either Open or Pending to determine the default status of requisitions once the selected requester saves them.
134 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Setting Up Purchase Order Approvals
When you use the PeopleTools Workflow Technology, the system approves purchase orders by using workflow roles, rules, and routings. To implement workflow approvals, define the roles, rules, and routings by using the Workflow component. PeopleSoft delivers a system that includes basic approval rules.
To set up purchase order approvals:
1. Access the User Preferences - Procurement: Purchase Order Authorizations page.
To authorize a user to approve purchase orders, select the Approval check box in the Allowed Purchase
Order Actions group box.
2. Access the Purchasing Definition - PO Approval Options page.
a. To use automatic approvals for the selected business unit, do not define any approval requirements on this page.
By leaving these options blank, you have chosen to use automatic approvals.
b. To use workflow approvals for the selected business unit, define the amount and ChartField approval options.
3. Access the Buyer Setup - Buyer Setup page.
In the Default PO Status group box, select either Open or Pending Approval/Approved to determine the default status of purchase orders once the selected buyer saves them.
See Also
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Workflow Technology
Chapter 3, "Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options," Defining Purchase
Order Change Options and Approval Requirements, page 36
Change Options and Approval Requirements, page 43
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining User Preferences," Defining
Requisition User Authorizations
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Establishing Requesters and Defaults
When using inbound electronic data exchange (EDX) messages, it may be desirable for exception conditions to be noted and brought to the attention of various people within the purchasing and inventory management organizations. These require processes to notify the procurement and inventory management organizations and ensure that appropriate measures are taken to react to these conditions.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
135
Using Workflow Chapter 6
When loading Item Catalog EDX messages, possible exceptions include price changes outside of expected tolerances, unknown items, and other exceptions. Receiving these exceptions should trigger notification to personnel in the buying and inventory management organizations to review and approve the changes. This ensures vendor compliance with buying arrangements and identification of errors before transactions are processed.
When loading Purchase Order Acknowledgement EDX messages, exceptions such as rejecting the purchase order or changing it must be addressed by the buyer to determine whether the changes are acceptable or require any additional follow up.
When you receive inbound Purchase Order Acknowledgment (X.12 855) and Item Catalog (X.12 832) EDX messages that have exceptions, the system provides exception notifications to resources in the buying organization.
See Also
Chapter 6, "Using Workflow," Using Item Loader Exception Workflow Notifications, page 141
Chapter 6, "Using Workflow," Using Purchase Order Acknowledgement Alert Workflow Notifications, page
In addition to requisition and PO approvals, you can use PeopleTools Workflow Technology to automate requester and buyer notification processes for requisitions and purchase orders. These notifications let the requesters and buyers know about the statuses of requisitions and purchase orders at key points in the purchasing business process.
Other processes in PeopleSoft Purchasing that use workflow notification include procurement card, RFQ, and contract processes. These notifications alert users about situations that they need to address. You can also receive notifications when the matching process fails.
You enable PeopleTools Workflow Technology notifications using PeopleSoft Application Designer by setting the status for each business event to active in the selected workflow business processes. This table lists workflow notification events that you can use in PeopleSoft Purchasing:
Workflow Notification Event
Notify the requester when a requisition line is sourced to a purchase order line through the
Create PO process.
Workflow Notification Type
Business Process Name
REQ_SOURCED
Note. You must run this workflow manually from an online page.
See Chapter 6, "Using Workflow,"
Workflow Notifications, page 138.
136 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Workflow Notification Event Workflow Notification Type
Notify the requester when the purchase order for the requisition is canceled.
Business Process Name
PO_CANCELED
Note. You must run this workflow manually from an online page.
See Chapter 6, "Using Workflow,"
PROCARD_BANK_SMENT_ARR
IVED
Notify appropriate users that a procurement card statement has arrived and is ready for reconciliation.
Notify appropriate users that the reconciliation of a procurement card bank statement was not finished within the preset time frame.
Notify the buyer when a requisition line requires an RFQ.
Worklist
Notify the buyer when a contract expires or reaches the maximum monetary amount. Also, notify the buyer when a contract is nearing its renewal date.
Worklist
PROCARD_GRACE_PERIOD_EX
PIRED
RFQ_NOTIFICATION
Notify the buyer when a POA is received that requires approval by the buyer before being processed.
(POA can be either an EDX or
Online POA.)
Worklist
CONTRACT_EXPIRY_ALERT
Note. You must run this workflow manually from an online page.
See Chapter 6, "Using Workflow,"
Issuing Contract Expiration and
PO_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Note. Within the activity tied to this business process, the EDI PO
Acknowledgement and the Online
PO Acknowledgement worklist definitions are the ones being used for this realtime notification.
See Also
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer Developer's Guide
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
137
Using Workflow Chapter 6
This section lists the page that you use to issue requisition sourcing workflow notifications using PeopleTools
Workflow Technology.
The PO_RQSRCD_WF process notifies requesters when their requisition lines have been sourced to purchase order lines.
Page Name
Requisition Sourced
Workflow - Req Srcd Prcs
Wf (requisition sourced process workflow)
Definition Name
REQ_SRCD_PRCS_WF
Navigation
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Stage/Source
Requests, Requisition
Sourced Workflow, Req
Srcd Prcs Wf
Usage
Run the PO_RQSRCD_WF process, which notifies requesters when their requisition lines have been sourced to purchase order lines by the Create Purchase
Orders process
(PO_POCREATE).
This section lists the page that you use to issue purchase order cancellation workflow notifications using
PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
Page Name Definition Name
Canceled Sourced POs
Workflow - Po Pocncl Prcs
(canceled sourced purchase order workflow - purchase order cancel process)
PO_POCNCL_PRCS
Navigation
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Stage/Source
Requests, Cancel Sourced
POs Workflow, Po Pocncl
Prcs
Usage
Run the PO_POCNCL_WF process, which notifies requesters when purchase orders that are sourced from their requisitions have been canceled.
This section lists the page that you use to issue contract expiration and exceed maximum workflow notifications using PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
138 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Page Name
Contract Alert Workflow
Definition Name
CNTRCT_ALERT_WF
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Contracts, Create Contract
Alert Workflow, Contract
Alert Workflow
Usage
Run the PO_CNTRCT_WF process, which notifies buyers when their contracts have expired or reached their maximum monetary amounts. In addition, this process will update the work list entries for the buyer when the expiration date, release amount, or any thresholds have been modified for a contract and that contract still exceeds the thresholds.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Voucher and Order
Contracts," Defining Contract Thresholds and Notifications
This section discusses how to use the purchase order acknowledgement alert workflow notification within the
PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
The purchase order acknowledgement alert workflow provides buyers with notifications for every purchase order where the purchase order is violating the defined rules for when a purchase order acknowledgement should be received by.
To generate the purchase order acknowledgement alert notification:
1. Define purchase order acknowledgement settings.
2. Run the POA_ALERTS Application Engine process to create worklist entries for the purchase orders that are violating the defined rules for when a purchase order acknowledgement should be received.
3. The system routes the worklist entry to the specified user ID based on the buyer ID on the purchase order header.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
139
Using Workflow Chapter 6
4. Click the worklist entry.
The system transfers you to the purchase order on the Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order page where the buyer can acknowledge on behalf of the supplier or get the necessary information to contact the supplier.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise eSupplier Connection 9.1 PeopleBook, "Acknowledging Purchase Orders Online"
Chapter 28, "Creating Purchase Orders Online," Using Purchase Order Acknowledgements, page 787
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining Vendor
Information," Defining POA Settings
Page Name
POA Settings (purchase order acknowledgement settings)
Procurement Options
Definition Name
POA_DEF_BU_SP
VNDR_PROC_OPT_SEC
Navigation Usage
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Options,
Purchasing Options
Click the POA Settings link on the Purchasing Options page.
Define the purchase order acknowledgement alert settings for the purchasing business unit.
Vendors, Vendor
Information, Add/Update,
Vendor, Location
Click the Procurement link on the Vendor - Location page.
Define the purchase order acknowledgement alert settings for a vendor and location. The system will first use the POA settings defined for the vendor location on a purchase order, and if not defined there, will then use the POA settings for the purchasing business unit on the purchase order.
140 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6
Page Name
POA Alerts
Definition Name
PO_POA_ALERTS
Using Workflow
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Acknowledgements,
Run Acknowledgement
Alerts, POA Alerts
Initiate the Purchase Order
Acknowledgement Alerts
Application Engine process
(POA_ALERTS) which will generate worklist entries for the buyer. Buyers will receive a worklist entry for each purchase order that is violating the defined
POA settings for when a
POA should be received by the supplier.
•
•
This section discusses how to use the Item Loader EDX exception workflow notification within the
PeopleTools Workflow Technology.
With the Item Loader EDX message, you can receive item data that is published by third-party sources by subscribing to XML-based messages or uploading a flat file.
•
•
The following conditions should trigger an exception notification:
•
Price change exceeds tolerance.
Notify when the new price on the item price change is greater than or equal to the old item price multiplied by the item price tolerance.
New item added.
Notify when a vendor provides a new item on the catalog. This enables you to set up defaults accordingly.
Unit of measure (UOM) does not exist.
New UOM is supplied for this item. Notify when the vendor item UOM does not exist on the UOM tables.
UOM changed.
Notify when the conversion rate has changed.
Error encountered.
Notify when an error (other than the exceptions identified above) is encountered when loading items. For example, a UOM code is not convertible.
To generate the Item Loader exception notification, follow these steps:
1. Define workflow rules using the Workflow Rule Assignment page.
2. Optionally, if you want the system to send out notifications when price tolerances are exceeded, define price tolerances.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
141
Using Workflow Chapter 6
3. Run the Item Loader Workflow process (IN_ITMEXP_WF) to create worklist entries for item loader messages that meet the exception criteria.
Use the process to identity the errors and exceptions generated from the Item Loader process and then route them to the appropriate role user. The process either generates a worklist or emails, depending on how you define setup on the Workflow Rule Assignment page. You can run this process separately or with the Item Loader process.
4. The system routes the worklist entry to the specified user ID.
5. When you click the worklist entry, the system transfers you to the Approve Item Exceptions component, where you can view and approve item exceptions.
Defining Price Tolerances
You define price tolerances to use in conjunction with the price change exception rule. The item load processes compare the new item or vendor price on the Item Loader Staging table to the previous item or vendor price; if the new price exceeds the tolerances, the system generates an exception.
Tolerances may be defined by item category or by item. You can define price tolerances by a percentage increase or decrease, or by a higher or lower amount.
Defines the minimum percent price increase that generates an exception. The default value is unlimited tolerance.
generated. The default value is unlimited tolerance.
Defines the minimum percent price decrease that causes an exception to be generated. The default value is unlimited tolerance.
Defines the minimum amount price decrease that causes an exception to be generated. The default value is unlimited tolerance.
Viewing and Approving Item Exceptions
•
After you find exceptions, you can use the Item Exception Approvals component to:
•
•
•
Approve the change and process as is (for price change, item does not exist or UOM change only).
Change the item attributes (for any exception).
Cancel the Item Load record completely.
This does not delete the item from the master database, but prevents any updates from being processed.
Change the exception approval status to Approved.
142 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
Page Name Definition Name
Workflow Rule Assignment PV_WF_SETID_ASGN
Item Categories
Purchasing Controls
Item Loader Workflow
Select Exceptions
Exception Summary
Exception Detail
Item Master EIP
Maintenance
CATEGORY_TBL2
ITM_TBL_PUR2
RUN_IN_ITMLOADWF
IN_ITMEXP_SEL
IN_ITMEXP_SUM
IN_ITMEXP_DTL
IN_EIP_ITEM_MAINT
Navigation Usage
SCM Integrations, Setup,
Item Exceptions, Workflow
Rule Assignment
Assign workflow rules by setID, including whether you should notify using workflow or email. You can also check for exceptions and write the exceptions into the error log without generating workflow or email.
Items, Define Controls,
Item Categories, Category
Definition 2
Set price tolerance defaults for items.
Items, Define Items and
Attributes, Purchasing
Attributes, Purchasing
Controls
Set price tolerance defaults for purchased items. These tolerances appear by default from the item category and can be overridden during online item setup.
SCM Integrations, Process
Transactions, Items, Item
Load Workflow, Item
Loader Workflow
Run the Item Loader
Workflow process to process errors and exceptions for Item Loader messages.
SCM Integrations,
Transaction Error Handling,
Approve Item Exceptions,
Select Exceptions
Select exceptions by setID, vendor, item, category, exception rule ID, status, or enterprise integration point control ID.
SCM Integrations,
Transaction Error Handling,
Approve Item Exceptions,
Exception Summary
Display the records matching the selection criteria from the Select
Exceptions page.
SCM Integrations,
Transaction Error Handling,
Approve Item Exceptions,
Exception Detail
Display the exception detail for each exception.
Click the EIP control ID link on the Exception Detail page.
View or correct the item data.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
143
Using Workflow Chapter 6
Access the Exception Summary page (SCM Integrations, Transaction Error Handling, Approve Item
Exceptions, Exception Summary).
The system displays the status of the exception. Use the Change Status To field to select the status to which you want to change the exception. After making a selection in the Change Status To field, click the Apply All button to change the status for all errors and exceptions that appear. The exception is then available for reprocessing.
Click the Data Correction button on the Exception Detail page to access the appropriate component to correct the exception condition.
This section discusses how to use the rebate manager workflow notification within the PeopleTools
Workflow Technology.
The rebate manager workflow provides rebate managers with notifications of claims generated against vendor rebate agreements that they are responsible for.
To generate the rebate manager notification:
1. Run the Rebate Accrual process to generate rebate accrual transactions.
2. Run the Generate Claims process to generate vendor rebate claims.
3. Run the Notify Rebate Manager process to create worklist or email entries to notify the rebate managers that claims have been generated for the vendor rebate agreements they are responsible for.
4. Review the worklist entry or the email sent for the rebate manager notification.
The rebate manager will use either the Message Dashboard or the Worklist page to review and acknowledge the notifications that were sent by the workflow process to the worklist.
See Also
Chapter 12, "Understanding Vendor Rebates," page 309
Chapter 16, "Managing Vendor Rebate Claims," page 367
Appendix C, "Delivered Workflows for PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing," page 1327
Before the rebate manager workflow notification process can be executed successfully you must have:
•
Defined a vendor rebate agreement with the Notify Rebate Manager check box selected on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate Options page.
144 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6
•
Performed purchasing transactions on which to base vendor rebate claims.
Using Workflow
Page Name
Notify Rebate Mgr
Message Dashboard
Worklist
Definition Name
VRBT_NTFY_RM_RC
SAC_EWN_DSH_SRCH
WORKLIST
Navigation
Purchasing, Vendor
Rebates, Vendor Rebate
Claims, Notify Rebate
Manager, Notify Rebate
Mgr
Usage
Initiate the Notify Rebate
Manager process to notify the rebate managers of claims generated against their vendor rebate agreements.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Common
Definitions, Errors and
Warnings, Message
Dashboard
Worklist, Worklist
Manage rebate manager notifications.
Manage rebate manager notifications.
This section discusses how to use the receipt quantity change workflow notification within the PeopleTools
Workflow Technology.
The receipt quantity change workflow provides the rebate managers with notifications when a receipt associated with vendor rebate agreements that has accruals already included on a claim has been changed.
To generate the receipt quantity change workflow notification:
1. Change the quantity on a receipt associated with a vendor rebate agreement that already has accruals included on a claim using the Maintain Receipts - Receiving page.
Upon changing the quantity the system will automatically generate the notification.
2. Review the worklist entry or the email sent for the receipt quantity change notification.
The rebate manager will use either the Message Dashboard or the Worklist page to review and acknowledge the notifications that were sent by the workflow process to the worklist.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
145
Using Workflow
See Also
Chapter 37, "Receiving Shipments," page 1037
Chapter 12, "Understanding Vendor Rebates," page 309
Chapter 16, "Managing Vendor Rebate Claims," page 367
Appendix C, "Delivered Workflows for PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing," page 1327
Chapter 6
Before the receipt quantity change workflow notification process can be executed successfully you must have previously received a quantity on a receipt that was associated with a vendor rebate agreement that has accruals on a claim.
Page Name
Maintain Receipts -
Receiving
Message Dashboard
Worklist
Definition Name
RECV_WPO
SAC_EWN_DSH_SRCH
WORKLIST
Navigation
Purchasing, Receipts,
Add/Update Receipts,
Maintain Receipts -
Receiving
Usage
Change the quantity on a receipt that is associated with a vendor rebate agreement that has accruals already included on a claim.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Common
Definitions, Errors and
Warnings, Message
Dashboard
Worklist, Worklist
Manage receipt quantity change notifications.
Manage receipt quantity change notifications.
This section discusses how to use the settlement manager workflow notification within the PeopleTools
Workflow Technology.
The settlement manager workflow provides settlement managers with notifications of claims settlement activity that has occurred against vendor rebate claims that they are responsible for.
To generate the settlement manager notification:
1. Run the Rebate Accrual process to generate rebate accrual transactions.
2. Run the Generate Claims process to generate vendor rebate claims.
146 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Using Workflow
3. Run the Claim Settlement process to send claims to PeopleSoft Payables and PeopleSoft Receivables to be processed.
4. Run the Notify Settlement Manager process to create worklist or email entries to notify the settlement managers that claims settlement activity has occurred for the vendor rebate agreements they are responsible for.
5. Review the worklist entry or the email sent for the claims settlement notification.
The settlement manager will use either the Message Dashboard or the Worklist page to review and acknowledge the notifications that were sent by the workflow process to the worklist.
See Also
Chapter 12, "Understanding Vendor Rebates," page 309
Chapter 14, "Generating Rebate Accruals," page 345
Chapter 16, "Managing Vendor Rebate Claims," page 367
Appendix C, "Delivered Workflows for PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing," page 1327
•
Before the settlement manager workflow notification process can be executed successfully you must have:
•
Defined a vendor rebate agreement with the Notify Settlement Manager check box selected on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate Options page.
Performed purchasing transactions on which to base vendor rebate claims.
Page Name
Notify Settle Mgr
Message Dashboard
Worklist
Definition Name
VRBT_NTFY_SM_RC
SAC_EWN_DSH_SRCH
WORKLIST
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Vendor
Rebates, Vendor Rebate
Claims, Notify Settlement
Manager, Notify Settle Mgr
Initiate the Notify
Settlement Manager process to notify the settlement managers of claims settlement activity that occurred against their rebate claims.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Common
Definitions, Errors and
Warnings, Message
Dashboard
Worklist, Worklist
Manage settlement manager notifications.
Manage settlement manager notifications.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
147
This chapter provides overviews of:
•
•
•
•
•
•
PeopleSoft Purchasing default hierarchy.
Unit of measure (UOM) conversion hierarchy.
Matching default hierarchy.
Vendor location hierarchy and multicurrency pricing.
Multicurrency conversions.
Value-added tax (VAT) drivers, VAT driver keys, and the defaulting hierarchy for VAT defaults.
For each business unit that you define in PeopleSoft Purchasing, you establish default information used in all transaction processing. Depending on the fields that you define, you can specify default information at each applicable level in the hierarchy or have default fields obtain their values from default values designated at less-specific levels in the hierarchy.
PeopleSoft Purchasing provides default capability for those values that are relatively static in nature (values that remain the same in everyday operations and would become repetitive to enter for every transaction). For example, if you set up the ChartField defaults with the most appropriate values for the items, categories, and requesters, theoretically, you have little need to navigate to the requisition's distribution level to enter any values. The ChartField values at that level are set by default.
•
PeopleSoft defaults operate in two parallel areas: transactions and items.
•
Transaction defaults begin at the more-specific buyer level in the hierarchy and end with the most-general user level.
Item defaults begin at the most-specific ship to level and end at the most-general item category level.
•
•
This list illustrates an overview of the PeopleSoft Purchasing transaction default hierarchy, where each level represents a factor in the procurement process that can provide a transaction default value:
Level One: Buyer.
Level Two: Requester.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
149
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
•
•
•
•
Level Three: Vendor.
Level Four: Purchase Order Origin.
Level Five: Business Unit.
Level Six: User.
The first level, represents the buyer level, one of the most specific default levels. Level six, the last level, represents the user level, which is one of the least-specific default levels. When determining which value to use on a purchase order, the system references the highest default level for a value. If it cannot find one there, it moves down level by level, searching for a defined value.
This table details the levels in the transaction default hierarchy from which the selected transaction values can appear by default. The possible default hierarchy levels listed for each transaction field value begin with the more-specific default and end with the less-specific default.
For example, when determining the accounting template to use for a purchase order, the system first determines whether a vendor has defined an accounting template. If so, the system uses the vendor's accounting template. If a template is not defined at the vendor level, the system uses the accounting template defined at the business unit level.
Transaction Field Value
Accounting Template
Default Hierarchy
Vendor, Business Unit
AM Capitalize Flag
AM Unit
Business Unit
Business Unit
AP Accrue Flag
AP Unit
ASN Flag
Billing Location
BU Comments (business unit comments)
Business Unit
Buyer
Catalog ID
Business Unit
Business Unit
Vendor
Business Unit
Business Unit
User
Vendor, User
Requester
150 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7
Transaction Field Value
Contract Authority
Contract Dispatch Method
Contract Status
Country
Currency
Currency Code/Rate Type
Days + / - Today
Department
Fax
Freight Terms
GL Unit (general ledger unit)
Location Code
Match Option/Match Type
Order Location
Origin
Override Vendor
Payment Terms
Payment Terms Basis Date
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Using Default Hierarchies
Default Hierarchy
User
Vendor, Business Unit
User
Vendor, User
Requester
Vendor, Business Unit
User
Buyer, Requester, Purchase Order Origin, User
Requester
Vendor, Business Unit
Business Unit
Buyer, Requester, Business Unit, User
Vendor, Business Unit
Vendor
Buyer, Requester, Business Unit, User
Buyer
Vendor, Business Unit
Vendor
151
Using Default Hierarchies
Transaction Field Value
Phone
PO Authority
PO Dispatch
PO Status
Pricing Location
Receiving Authority
Receiving BU
Replenishment Dispatch Method
Report Template
Requester Name
Requisition Authority
Requisition Status
Returning Location
RFQ Authority (request for quotation authority)
RFQ Dispatch Method
RFQ Status
RTV Debit Memo (return-to-vendor debit memo)
RTV Dispatch Method
Vendor
User
User
Vendor
Default Hierarchy
Buyer, Requester
User
Vendor, Business Unit
Buyer, User
Business Unit
User
Requester, User
Requester, User
Vendor
User
Vendor, Business Unit
User
Vendor
Vendor, Business Unit
Chapter 7
152 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
Transaction Field Value
RTV Fees
RTV Notification Method
RTV Replace Invoice
Sales Tax Tolerance
Sales/Use Tax Information
SetID
Ship To
Ship Via
Vendor
Vendor
Vendor
Vendor
Vendor
User
Default Hierarchy
Buyer, Requester, User
Vendor, Business Unit
Sourcing % Unit Price Tolerance (sourcing percentage unit price tolerance)
Business Unit
Tax Exempt Flag/Tax Exempt ID Business Unit
Use VAT Suspension (use value-added tax suspension) Business Unit
VAT Calculation Type
VAT Declaration Point
Business Unit
Business Unit
VAT Home
VAT Options
VAT Registration ID
VAT Rounding Rule
VAT Tolerance Check Indicator
Business Unit
Vendor, Business Unit
Business Unit
Business Unit
Business Unit
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
153
Using Default Hierarchies
Transaction Field Value
VAT Transaction Code
Vendor Authority
Business Unit
User
Default Hierarchy
Chapter 7
PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to create requisitions using requisition loader batch processing or the requisition online entry pages.
The Purchasing Requisition Loader Application Engine process (PO_REQLOAD) derives its most specific default values from the data sources of this batch process. At a less specific level, you can use the Requisition
Loader Defaults page to set the default values for the Purchasing Requisition Loader process. These default values populate empty requisition ChartFields when you run the process. Use the Requisition Loader Defaults
- Overrides and Options page to set override options for the Purchasing Requisition Loader process. These values replace source requisition ChartField values when you run the process.
•
•
After you create requisitions from the online entry pages, use the Maintain Requisitions - Requisition
Defaults page to set defaults for requisitions at the individual transaction level. This page gives you the option to do the following for all future requisition lines:
Specify default values.
The application references the default values specified in the existing hierarchy to populate fields on future lines. If no values are found, it uses the values defined on this page as defaults.
Specify overriding values.
The application references the values that you defined on this page to populate fields on the requisition for future lines.
If you have pre-existing defaults on the Requisitions - Header or Line Defaults pages and you change any of these values, PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to retrofit these changes to existing requisition lines and distributions.
See Also
Line, Schedule, and Distribution Fields, page 457
Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Entering Requisition Header Defaults, page 453
Engine Process (PO_REQLOAD), page 515
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Using Requisition Loader Defaults and Overrides
154 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to create purchase orders using purchase order staging batch processing or the purchase order online entry pages.
The PO Stage Load Application Engine process (PO_POSTAGE) derives its more specific default values from the data sources of this batch process. At a less-specific level, you can use the PO Loader Defaults page to set the default values for the PO Stage Load process. These default values populate empty purchase order
ChartFields when you run the process. You can also use the PO Loader Defaults - Overrides and Options page to set override options for the Create Purchase Orders Application Engine process (PO_POCREATE).
These values replace existing purchase order ChartField values when you run the process.
•
•
Once you create purchase orders from either online or batch processes, use the Purchase Order Defaults page to set defaults for purchase orders at the individual transaction level. The page gives you the option to do the following for all future purchase order lines:
Specify default values.
The application references default values specified in the existing hierarchy to populate fields on future lines. If no values are found, it uses the values defined on this page as defaults.
Specify overriding values.
The application references the values that you defined on this page to populate fields on the purchase order for future lines.
If you have pre-existing defaults on the PO Header Defaults pages and you change any of these values,
PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to retrofit these changes to existing purchase order lines and distributions.
See Also
Schedules, and Distributions, page 714
Chapter 28, "Creating Purchase Orders Online," Entering Purchase Order Defaults, page 710
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Loading Staged Purchase Order Requests from PeopleSoft
Supply Planning and Manufacturing, page 837
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Using Purchase Order Loader Defaults and Overrides
•
•
•
This list illustrates an overview of the PeopleSoft Purchasing item default hierarchy, where each level represents a factor in the procurement process that can provide an item default value:
Level One: Ship To Location
Level Two: Regions
Level Three: Kit Item
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
155
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
•
•
•
•
•
•
Level Four: Item/Vendor Attributes
Level Five: Item BU Attributes
Level Six: Item Purchasing Attributes
Level Seven: Item
Level Eight: Item Category BU Attributes
Level Nine: Item Category
The first level is the ship to location level, which is one of the most-specific default levels. Level nine, the last level, represents the item category level. Level nine is one of the least-specific default levels. When determining which value to use for an item, the system first references the highest default level for a value. If it cannot find one there, it moves down the relevant levels, searching for a defined value to use.
This table details the levels in the item default hierarchy from which the selected transaction values can appear by default. The possible default hierarchy levels listed for each item-related field value begin with the more-specific default and end with the most-general level default.
For example, when determining the asset profile ID for an item, the system first references the item purchasing attributes to determine whether an ID is defined. If so, the system uses that asset profile ID. If an
ID is not defined, the system uses the asset profile ID defined at item category level.
Text in boldface indicates a grouping of default fields, rather than just a single field, for example, matching controls and sourcing controls.
Transaction Field Value
Asset Profile ID
Default Hierarchy
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Buyer
Currency Code
Origin Country
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category-BU Attributes, Item Category
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item/Vendor Attributes
Description
Delivery Instructions
Distribution Network
Inventory BU
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Ship To Location
Ship To Location
Ship To Location
156 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
Transaction Field Value
Item/Item Category
Item Specifications
Lead Time Days
Default Hierarchy
Ship To Location
Item Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Item
Long Description
Lot Item
Manufacturer ID
Manufacturer Item ID
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item
Matching Controls: Unit Price Tolerance Over, Unit
Price Tolerance Under, % Unit Price Tolerance Over, %
Unit Price Tolerance Under, Ext. Price Tolerance Over,
Ext. Price Tolerance Under, % Ext. Price Tolerance
Over, % Ext. Price Tolerance Under
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Miscellaneous Controls and Options
Accept Any Ship To
Accept Any UOM
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes
Accept Any Vendor
Auto Select
Close PO Under Percent Tolerance
Contract Required
RFQ Required
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
157
Using Default Hierarchies
Transaction Field Value
Stockless Item
Taxable
Tax Exempt Information
Ultimate Use Code
Order Location
Packing Weight
Packing Weight UOM
Packing Volume
Packing Volume UOM
Price (vendor)
Price (standard)
Price Can Be Changed On Order
Receiving BU
Receiving Controls
Early Ship Reject Days
158
Chapter 7
Default Hierarchy
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes
Ship To Location, Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU
Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes
Ship To Location
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Ship To Location, Region
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes
Ship To Location
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
Transaction Field Value
Inspection ID
Inspection Required
Inspect Sample %
Inspection UOM
Partial Quantity
Quantity Received Tolerance %
Receiving Required Flag
Reject Quantity Over Tolerance
Region of Origin
Sales/Use Tax Information
Serial Item
Ship Via
Standard or Vendor UOM
Standard UOM
Rounding Tolerance
RTV Information: RTV Miscellaneous Charge, RTV
Action, RTV Percent, RTV Reason
Default Hierarchy
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item BU Attributes, Item
Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Category
Item/Vendor Attributes
Ship To Location
Item
Item BU Attributes, Item Purchasing Attributes, Item
Item/Vendor Attributes
Item
Item/Vendor Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
159
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
Transaction Field Value
Sourcing Controls
Use Category Sourcing Controls
Vendor Sourcing Priorities
Sourcing Method
Accumulate Level
Lead Time Factor %
Price Factor %
Ship To Priority Factor %
Vendor Priority Factor %
Cumulative Sourcing: Year to Start, Month to Start,
Number of Months, Start Date, End Date
Vendor Sourcing Priorities
Priority
Vendor ID
Allocation Percentage
Use Item Standard Lead Time
Use Standard Item Tolerance
Vendor History: Number of Months, Month to Start
Default Hierarchy
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item Purchasing Attributes
Item Category
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item Category
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item Purchasing Attributes, Item Category
Item Category
Item Category
Ship to Location, Region, Item/Vendor Attributes, Item
Category
Ship to Location, Region, Item/Vendor Attributes, Item
Category
Item/Vendor Attributes, Item Category
Item/Vendor Attributes
Item/Vendor Attributes
Item Category
160 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
•
•
•
•
•
This list illustrates an overview of the PeopleSoft Purchasing ChartField default hierarchy, where each level represents a factor that can provide a ChartField default value.
Level One: Purchasing Kit Items.
Level Two: Item BU Attributes.
Level Three: Item Purchasing Attributes.
Level Four: Item Category.
Level Five: Requester.
The first level represents the purchasing kit item setup, one of the most-specific default levels. Level five represents the requester level, one of the least-specific default levels. When determining which ChartField value to use, the system first references the highest default level for a value. If it cannot find one there, it moves down the relevant levels, searching for a defined value.
All of the PeopleSoft applications use UOMs to quantify resources. In PeopleSoft Purchasing, the various
UOMs that are available for the transactions enable you to quantify and track the items that you have purchased.
You must first define the UOM codes to be used in the system on the Units of Measure page. Use this page to define standard conversion rates between any combination of UOMs necessary. These codes are stored in the
Units table.
These are the UOMs commonly used by PeopleSoft Purchasing transactions:
•
General UOM
The general UOM and its conversion rates are defined on the Units of Measure page. This information is stored in the Units table.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
161
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
•
Inventory item UOM
The inventory item UOM is the UOM defined for the item on the Item Definition - Units of Measure page. The inventory item UOM rate of conversion to the item standard UOM is also defined on the Item
Definition - Units of Measure page. The inventory item UOM information represents the UOM in which the item is tracked in the business process. This information is stored in the Inventory Item table.
Define an item standard UOM when you first enter an item definition into the system on the Item
Definition - General: Common page. After transactions against the item are created, the standard UOM cannot be changed.
•
The item standard UOM serves as the smallest common denominator for UOM conversion, and should be selected accordingly. The standard UOM should be the smallest unit in which the item is transacted and should be selected, so that any conversions performed for the item are converted from the standard UOM.
For example, do not assign a standard UOM of CASE to an item that you regularly order in the smaller
UOM of BOX or EACH.
Item vendor UOM
The item-vendor UOM is defined for an item-vendor combination on the Vendor's UOM & Pricing Info page. The item-vendor UOM rate of conversion to the item standard UOM is also defined on this page.
The item-vendor UOM information represents the UOM in which the item is purchased from a specific vendor. This information is stored in the Item Vendor table.
See Also
Chapter 4, "Defining Purchasing Item Information," Defining Purchasing Item Vendor UOM and Pricing
PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing Items 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Items by SetID," Associating an Item with a UOM
PeopleSoft Enterprise Managing Items 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Items by SetID," Assigning a UOM to an
Item
The PeopleSoft Purchasing UOM default hierarchy is based in part on the type of transaction that you create
(RFQ, requisition, purchase order, contract, or procurement card). If a vendor is involved in the transaction, the setting of the Accept Any UOM check box for the vendor on the Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page is also a factor in the UOM default hierarchy.
This diagram illustrates the UOM default hierarchy:
162 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
UOM default hierarchy
When you enter a requisition with a specified item ID, the system searches for a preferred vendor for the item. If a preferred vendor exists, the preferred vendor default UOM appears on the requisition.
If the item ID that you add to a requisition has no vendor ID, the UOM appears by default in the item standard UOM defined for the item.
If you are creating an ad hoc, RFQ, or procurement card transaction, the system creates the transaction with the general UOM that you specify on the transaction.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
163
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
See Also
When you convert one transaction type to another, the UOM on the originating transaction may need to be converted to the UOM that is required for the new transaction. This kind of UOM conversion may be performed when you source a requisition to a purchase order, or award an RFQ and create a purchase order for it.
For example, suppose that you have a requisition with no vendor for a quantity of 10 boxes of an item in the inventory item UOM. When you source the requisition to a purchase order, and the vendor assigned to the purchase order does not accept any UOM, the item vendor UOM overrides the inventory item UOM. If the vendor has a preferred UOM of cases, the requisition quantity of 10 boxes in the inventory item UOM must be converted to the item vendor UOM of cases.
To accomplish this, the system uses the UOM conversion rate between boxes and the standard UOM defined on the Inventory Item table. It then accesses the UOM conversion rate between cases and the standard UOM defined on the Item Vendor table. If none exists, the system uses the conversion rate defined on the Inventory
Item table. The system then reconciles the quantities in the standard UOM to derive the quantity to be ordered in the preferred item vendor UOM of cases.
If the chosen vendor accepts any UOM, you can create the purchase order from the requisition with the inventory item UOM, and no conversion is necessary.
When you source an ad hoc item transaction to a purchase order, the general UOM on the originating transaction is carried to the purchase order and no conversion is performed. This diagram illustrates the process:
164 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
UOM conversion default hierarchy
This section outlines the way in which matching and Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS) statuses appear by default onto vouchers, purchase orders, and receipts. Status flags determine the application of match rules to a purchase order, receipt, or voucher rather than the type of match control ID. The status flag settings are derived from the vendor location options and options at the PeopleSoft Payables business unit level or
PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit level. ERS processing is further controlled by options at the PeopleSoft
General Ledger business unit level (procurement accounting controls). Matching includes receipt-only matching (voucher to non-purchase order receipts).
This table illustrates the matching default hierarchy used in PeopleSoft Purchasing:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
165
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
166
Matching default hierarchy table
Purchase Order Key
T (to match)
N (not required)
Receipt Key
T (to match)
N (not required)
F (freight terms)
R (receipt date)
N (none)
Voucher Key
T (to be matched)
N (not applicable)
Y (yes)
N (no)
E (evaluated receipt settlement)
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables 9.1 PeopleBook, "Running the Matching Process"
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
PeopleSoft Purchasing uses the vendor location hierarchies to determine vendors and various vendor locations for online requisitions. These hierarchies are also used by the PO Calculations Application Engine process (PO_POCALC) to determine the vendor necessary to create a purchase order and determines how pricing is ultimately derived based on this hierarchy.
This section also discusses how involvement of multicurrencies affects which pricing locations the system obtains. Depending on the setting of the multicurrency flags and which currencies have been set up for the purchasing business unit, requester, vendor location, and pricing locations, PeopleSoft Purchasing performs multicurrency conversions when required.
Here is the setup hierarchy for vendor location and pricing:
When defined, the system uses Item Ship To Vendor Locations to determine the priority vendor and the vendor location specified for the item and ship to location. Based on the vendor and vendor location, the pricing location is derived from the Maintain Vendor setup. If not defined, it uses level 2 defaulting.
When defined, the system uses the Item Region Vendor Locations to determine the priority vendor and the vendor order location specified for the item and region. Based on the vendor and vendor location selected for the region, pricing location is derived based on the vendor and vendor location selected for the region by accessing the location details from the Maintain Vendor setup. If not defined, it uses level 3 defaulting.
The system selects the vendor based on the Item Vendor setup. When defined, the system uses the Ship To Vendor Location to get the vendor order locations to derive the pricing location from the Maintain Vendor setup. Ordering locations can be different from the default locations. If not defined, it uses level 4 defaulting.
The system selects the vendor based on the Item Vendor setup. When defined, the system uses the Region Vendor Location to get the vendor order locations to derive the pricing location from the Maintain Vendor setup. Ordering locations can be different from the default locations. If not defined, it uses level 5 defaulting.
When defined, the system uses the vendor priorities established in the Item
Vendor setup to derive the pricing location from the Maintain Vendor setup. If the Item Vendor setup is the only one defined, the pricing location is always derived from the vendor default location. If not defined, there is no control hierarchy defined.
You can define various locations for a vendor on the Vendor Information - Location page accessed from the
Maintain Vendors menu. Each location that you define points to an ordering location and a pricing location.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
167
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
The Item Ship To Vendor Location that you define on the Item Ship To Locations page is a setup based on the combination of the item and ship to location. This setup prioritizes the vendors from which the item can be purchased for a ship to location and determines the specific vendor location from which to get a pricing location.
The Item Region Vendor Location that you define on the Item Region Locations page is a setup based on the combination of the item and region. This setup prioritizes the vendors from which the item can be purchased for a region and determines the specific vendor location from which to get a pricing location. The region is derived from the shipto location on the requisition or staged purchase order's schedule.
The Ship To Vendor Location that you defined on the Ship To Locations page defines all of the vendors that can ship an order to a particular ship to location and is not item-specific. Each vendor and the appropriate vendor order location appears. When determining the vendor ordering location, the system first references the
Item Vendor for the priority 1 vendor and then references the Ship To Location page to determine the order location.
The Region Vendor Location that you defined on the Region Locations page defines all of the vendors that can ship an order to a particular region and is not item-specific. Each vendor and the appropriate vendor order location appears. When determining the vendor ordering location, the system first references the Item Vendor for the priority 1 vendor and then references the Region Location page to determine the order location.
The Item Vendor setup dictates only vendor priorities, and establishes vendor UOM pricing for their pricing locations. This setup does not dictate vendor order locations for the item. Vendor ordering locations default from one of the hierarchies discussed previously or, if no higher level defaults are found, from the default location defined on the Maintain Vendor - Location page. The item vendor relationship that you defined on the Purchasing Attributes - Item Vendor page defines the pricing location for the vendor's default location.
Regardless of the setup that you implement, the pricing location the system uses is ultimately derived from the vendor ordering location. In addition, you can override anything that appears by default on the requisition.
To ensure the override is carried to the purchase order, make sure that the Override Suggested Vendor check box is clear on the Maintain Requisition - Requisition page and the Let POCalc Override Vendor check box is clear on the Selected Item Details page accessed from the Sourcing Workbench.
By selecting this check box on the requisition, you enable the purchase order to be created using the same hierarchy and ignore all of the overriding information that the user enters on the requisition. Once the purchase order is created, the buyer can still override this information prior to dispatching.
For example, suppose that the user changes the vendor or vendor location that appear by default on the requisition, and the override suggested vendor check boxes are selected, the purchase order is created following the hierarchy. This overrides the user suggested vendor or vendor location on the requisition.
The purpose of defining the areas described here is to enable more control and automation in the system, thereby reducing the level of repetitive effort by the user. If you want a more automated system, a greater effort is required for the initial setup. This setup is a one-time effort that can increase the utilization of timesaving batch processing capabilities by the system. These setups require occasional updating as vendor changes occur.
manual intervention at the requisition, sourcing, or the purchase order level.
168 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Ship To Locations
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining Vendor
Information," Specifying High-Level Procurement Processing Options
Establishing Item Vendor relationships associated with a ship to location or region provides the highest degree of control. These relationships are specific to the item and the ship to location or region, and enable definition of the vendor priority and vendor order location at a more granular level.
The ship to location is the most specific designation, which overrides both the Item Region Vendor Location and the Item Vendor priorities and location. Grouping ship to locations into regions provides the ability to override the Item Vendor prioritization and default vendor order location at the intermediate Item Region
Vendor Location level. Both of these options, add flexibility to the default vendor selection hierarchy.
Defining item ship to vendor locations provides the highest degree of control. This location-pricing relationship is specific to the item and ship to location. You can specify a multitude of ship to locations for one item and define different vendor priorities for the same item based on ship to locations. Indeed, this can require a large effort depending on the quantity of items and ship to locations that you have. However, time spent on this one-time setup saves time and repetitive effort in the future.
When you create the online requisition or when you source an existing requisition, the system references the item and ship to location of the requisition and accesses the item ship to location to get the priority 1 vendor and its vendor location. The system derives the pricing location that you defined for the vendor location. It then looks to the item-vendor relationship to access the pricing for the derived pricing location.
This diagram illustrates this default hierarchy:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
169
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
Default Hierarchy using the Item Ship To Vendor Location setup
A Ship to location can be associated to a region, allowing for management of similar ship to locations at the region level. Item region vendor locations provide a location-pricing relationship that is specific to the item and region. You can associate many regions to an item and define different vendor priorities for the same item based on region. This level of flexibility in vendor prioritization ensures the right suppliers are assigned to the purchase orders, without driving all of the maintenance down to the item ship to location.
When you create the online requisition or when you source an existing requisition, the system references the ship to location to determine the appropriate region. If the ship to location is assigned to a region and a lower level override for the Item Ship To Location does not exist, the system will accesses the item region vendor location to get the priority 1 vendor and its vendor location. The system derives the pricing location that you defined for the vendor location. It then looks to the item-vendor relationship to access the pricing for the derived pricing location.
170 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
Establishing a vendor order location relationship with a ship to location or region provides an intermediate level of control (less control) in the vendor hierarchy. These relationships associate either a ship to location or a region to a vendor order location to override the Vendor's default order location.
With these additional levels of the hierarchy, the priority vendor is determined from the Item Vendor definition. Once the vendor ID is identified, the determination of the vendor order location begins with the ship to vendor location, then looks to the region vendor location and finally the vendor default location, as defined on the Maintain Vendors component.
The next level of control is provided by defining the vendor order location for each ship to location. The ship to location is based on the requester and buyer setups that include ship to location defaults for the requisition and purchase order.
One vendor ordering location for each vendor is defined for each ship to location. You can have more than one vendor for each ship to location but only one order location per vendor. This default system is not itemspecific, but rather ship to location specific. This setup can require a large effort depending on the quantity of vendors and ship to locations that you have.
As you create an online requisition or when you source an existing requisition, the system references the item-vendor relationship to get the priority 1 vendor. The system then accesses the ship to location to determine the order location for the priority 1 vendor and uses the order location to derive the pricing location. The system then retrieves the pricing for the derived pricing location from the Item Vendor setup.
This diagram illustrates the default hierarchy for defining the ship to vendor order location for each ship to location:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
171
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
Default Hierarchy using the ship to vendor location vendor order location setup
Using the procurement region enables you to group ship to locations for additional defaulting purposes. By defining the vendor order location for each region, you can override the default vendor order location for additional control, without maintaining these overrides for every ship to location in the buying organization.
One vendor ordering location for each vendor can be defined for each region. You can have more than one vendor for each region but only one order location per vendor. This default system is not item-specific, but rather region specific.
As you create an online requisition or when you source an existing requisition, the system references the item-vendor relationship to get the priority 1 vendor. Once the system determines the ship to location's region, it accesses the region vendor location definition to determine the order location for the priority 1 vendor and uses the order location to derive the pricing location. The system then retrieves the pricing for the derived pricing location from the Item Vendor setup.
172 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
The least amount of control and setup effort occurs in the item-vendor setup scenario. In this case, you only define vendor priorities and vendor UOM pricing for the pricing locations of each established vendor. If neither item ship to location nor ship to location is defined, the system uses the priority 1 vendor default location to derive its pricing location. Any other vendor locations and pricing locations, if defined, are not considered. It then goes back to the item-vendor relationship to reference the pricing for the derived pricing location. This hierarchy applies to purchase orders created online.
This diagram illustrates the default hierarchy for defining item-vendor relationships:
Default hierarchy using the item-vendor setup
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
173
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
A zero-level of control results from not defining any of these setups, including no item-vendor relationships.
In this scenario, no vendor automatically appears on the requisition, so the standard price is used. You can enter a suggested vendor, but the standard price remains. During the requisition selection process, you can select a vendor if the field is blank or change the vendor that the requester suggested. Because none of the setups were defined, the purchase order is built with the same pricing as the requisition or any buyer pricing updates are performed through requisition selection. Failure to establish item-vendor relationships prevents the creation of contracts. In the same scenario, purchase orders created online use the standard price as well.
You can define multiple currencies and UOMs for a pricing location. When multicurrencies are involved, the system creates the requisition and purchase order provided that there is a currency and UOM match. If there is no match, the system uses an additional hierarchical path to determine the price and currency to use when creating the requisition and purchase order. When required, the system also performs multicurrency conversions.
This diagram illustrates the multicurrency conversion hierarchy:
174 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
Multicurrency conversion
Requisitions are created in the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit currency when the Allow Multicurrency
Reqs (allow multicurrency requisitions) check box is clear on the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit
Options page. If the check box is selected, the requisition is created in the requester's currency.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
175
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
When the system determines the pricing location and the pricing location is defined in the Item Vendor setup, the following text describes the steps that the system uses to determine what price to use based on the requisition (transaction) currency.
Use these steps to determine the requisition multicurrency price:
1. If the pricing location has a price defined in the requisition currency and UOM, this is the price that is used.
2. If there is no match in step 1, the system looks at the currency defined for the vendor order location.
3. If the vendor location currency (price vendor location) is not specified, the system moves on to step 4.
If the vendor location currency (price vendor currency) is specified, the system accesses the item-vendor pricing location to obtain the price for the vendor location currency (price vendor currency) and transaction UOM. If there is a match, the system takes that price and converts it to the transaction currency.
4. If there is no match in Step 3, the system uses the transaction currency and vendor default UOM to find a match in the pricing location.
If it finds a match, this price is used on the requisition. When there is no match and if the vendor location currency is not defined, the system skips step 5 and moves on to step 6.
5. If there is no match in step 4, the system uses the price vendor currency derived in step 2 and the default
UOM when checking the pricing location.
If there is a match, it converts it to the transaction currency.
6. If there is no match in step 5, the system uses the standard price.
If the currency is different, it converts that price to the transaction currency.
The requisition base price is derived from the transaction price. If the transaction price is in a different currency, the system converts it into the base price currency.
If the Allow Multicurrency POs check box is selected on the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit Options page, purchase orders are always built in the vendor order location currency (price vendor currency). If the vendor location currency is not defined, or if the Allow Multicurrency POs check box is clear, the purchase order is built in the currency for the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit.
When the Override Suggested Vendor check box is clear, the purchase order is built from the requisition, and if currencies are different, the system converts the requisition transaction price or currency to the purchase order currency. If the Override Suggested Vendor check box is selected, the system follows the same vendor location hierarchies described previously.
If the purchase order is built from a requisition and the Define PO option was selected during requisition selection, the purchase order is built in the vendor currency, or the modified currency, if it was modified during Define PO.
See Also
Purchasing Business Units, page 17
176 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Using Default Hierarchies
The following table lists the PeopleSoft Purchasing VAT drivers and associated VAT driver keys for the
VAT Defaults component. The table also indicates which drivers control defaults for the Services VAT
Treatment:
VAT Driver
Item BU
VAT Driver
Keys
PeopleSof t
Applicatio n
Countr y
State Applicable to
Regular VAT
Defaults
Item SetID
Item ID
Business
Unit
Purchasing l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes
Applicable to
Services VAT
Treatment
Defaults
No
Item Yes
Item Category
Item SetID
Item ID
Purchasing
, Payables l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes
Item SetID
Category
Code
Purchasing l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes Yes
Yes Vendor Location Vendor
SetID
Vendor ID
Vendor
Location
Purchasing
, Payables l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes
Vendor Vendor
SetID
Vendor ID
Purchasing
, Payables l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes
PO Business Unit Business
Unit
PO Options
Purchasing l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes
SetID
Process
Option ID
Purchasing l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
177
Using Default Hierarchies Chapter 7
VAT Driver
VAT Entity
Registration
VAT Country
Credit Card
Provider
VAT Driver
Keys
PeopleSof t
Applicatio n
Countr y
VAT
Entity
Country
All Require d
State Applicable to
Regular VAT
Defaults
l
Optiona Yes
Applicable to
Services VAT
Treatment
Defaults
No
No Country All Not applica ble l
Optiona Yes
Vendor
SetID
Credit Card
Vendor
Purchasing l
Optiona l
Optiona Yes No
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Getting Started"
178 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
This chapter provides an overview of commitment control in PeopleSoft Purchasing and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use partial and final liquidations.
Budget check requisitions.
Budget check purchase orders.
Budget check procurement cards.
Run budget period-end processes.
Roll over purchase orders at budget period-end.
In PeopleSoft Purchasing, commitment control enables you to track or control commitments, obligations, or expenditures. You can track for encumbrance accounting, as well as check validation against predefined, authorized budgets. Commitment control enables you to automate large portions of the accounting control process.
When you set up your budgets, you designate amounts for those budgets and associate them with the appropriate PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit. After budgets are established, you can track and control all transactions in the procurement life cycle against the overall budget.
From a budgetary perspective, the procurement life cycle includes pre-encumbrances, encumbrances, and expenditures, all of which are tracked against a designated budget. When you use commitment control, the system deducts each type of financial obligation from the budget and tracks it according to obligation type; this enables you to determine how many dollars you have committed in pre-encumbrances, encumbrances, and expenditures. You can liquidate your pre-encumbrance and encumbrance balances by amount or quantity.
Depending on the liquidate method that you specify on a document, the budget processor uses that method scheme to calculate the remaining spending authority accordingly.
Here is a high-level overview of the procurement life cycle in commitment control:
1. When you generate a requisition, a pre-encumbrance is created in your budget records by the budgetchecking process.
2. When a requisition is sourced to a purchase order, commitment control liquidates the pre-encumbrance from the requisition and establishes an encumbrance for the purchase order.
3. When the purchased goods or services are delivered and the purchase order references a voucher, commitment control liquidates the encumbrance and records an expenditure.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
179
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
You can set up commitment control to act on transactions that exceed your budget limit. Transactions and future obligations that exceed the budget are exceptions. You can specify the degree of control and corrective action that you want to enable individual users to exercise over exceptions. Commitment control warns you of exceptions if transactions and future obligations exceed your budgeted amounts. You can set this feature to prevent transactions that exceed a designated budget or to warn you about transactions that exceed a budget, and therefore, require corrective action.
Here are some examples of corrective actions:
•
•
•
•
Increasing approved budgetary amounts.
Requesting competitive bids from alternate suppliers.
Denying requisitions or canceling purchase orders.
Overriding exceptions by authorized users.
Commitment control enables you to receive warnings about activities that may send your budgets over their approved amounts. For example, a transaction that exceeds the budget can trigger a workflow warning to personnel at a higher level, while still going through the system as if the necessary budget existed. The transaction can also be rejected and stopped without approval from a higher authority. In either scenario, you can define options in PeopleSoft General Ledger that provide you with control over how your system handles exceptions for individual budgets and business units.
Commitment control also enables you to determine a budget date default scheme to use when setting up your system for the first time. Use the Installations Options page to define your preferred budget date defaults. You can either automatically change the accounting date to the document's accounting date, or you can copy the budget date from the predecessor document.
You can view summarized budget checking information for affected transactions on the PeopleSoft
Purchasing requisition and purchase order inquiry pages.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Understanding PeopleSoft Commitment
Control"
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Basic Commitment Control
Options"
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications"
PeopleSoft Purchasing delivers seven source transaction types for use in PeopleSoft Purchasing. This table illustrates the delivered source transactions types along with their selection criteria (header record field name and field value) that the system uses for selecting source transactions for budget-checking.
when performing the modifications. These modifications are best done by programmers with extensive experience in PeopleSoft application code.
180 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
Source Transaction Types
This table illustrates the delivered source transaction types for use with PeopleSoft Purchasing:
Source Transaction Type
REQ_PREENC
(requisition pre-encumbrance)
REQ_PRECNP
(requisition - non-prorated)
PO_POENC
(purchase order - encumbrance)
Selection Criteria (Field Name and
Field Value Pertaining to Header
Record)
Interpretation of Selection Criteria
REQ_STATUS = A (approved)
REQ_STATUS = C (closed)
REQ_STATUS = X (canceled)
REQ_STATUS = LA (line approved)
HOLD_STATUS = N
POST_DOC = Y
Requisitions that meet this criteria will be budget checked: requisitions that are not on hold, requisitions with valid ChartField combinations, and those requisitions with a status of approved, closed, canceled, and line approved.
Note. The line approved status is only applicable if you are using the
PeopleSoft eProcurement application.
If you do not require approval before budget checking, then you could modify the selection criteria and enter a REQ_STATUS = PA (pending approval), and perhaps O (open).
REQ_STATUS = A (approved)
REQ_STATUS = C (closed)
REQ_STATUS = X (canceled)
REQ_STATUS = LA (line approved)
HOLD_STATUS = N
POST_DOC = Y
BUDGET_STATUS = V (valid)
Non-prorated value adjustments
(REQ_PRECNP) selection criteria should be the same as requisition preencumbrance (REQ_PREENC) selection criteria.
If you modify the selection criteria for one source transaction type you should also modify the selection criteria for the other source transaction type.
PO_STATUS = A (approved)
PO_STATUS = C (closed)
PO_STATUS = X (canceled)
PO_STATUS = D (dispatched)
PO_STATUS = PX (pending cancel)
HOLD_STATUS = N
POST_DOC = Y (ChartField combinations are valid)
Purchase orders that meet this criteria will be budget checked: purchase orders that are not on hold, purchase orders with valid ChartField combinations, and those purchase orders with a status of approved, closed, canceled, dispatched, and pending cancel.
If you do not require approval before budget checking, then you could modify the selection criteria and enter a PO_STATUS = PA (pending approval), and perhaps O (open).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
181
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Source Transaction Type
PO_POENCNP
(purchase order encumbrance - nonprorate item)
Selection Criteria (Field Name and
Field Value Pertaining to Header
Record)
PO_STATUS = A (approved)
PO_STATUS = C (closed)
PO_STATUS = X (canceled)
PO_STATUS = D (dispatched)
PO_STATUS = PX (pending cancel)
HOLD_STATUS = N
POST_DOC = Y
Interpretation of Selection Criteria
Non-prorated value adjustments
(PO_POENCNP) selection criteria should be the same as purchase order encumbrance (PO_POENC) selection criteria.
If you modify the selection criteria for one source transaction type you should also modify the selection criteria for the other source transaction type.
Warning!
You should not modify the selection criteria for these source transaction types:
•
•
•
PO_PROCARD (procurement card)
PO_RAENC (receipt accruals - encumbrance)
PO_RAEXP (receipt accruals - expense)
The Commitment Control Budget Processor Application Engine process (FS_BP) enables you to budget check your transactions independent of the online budget checking feature or the batch transaction creation processes. You can select process parameters that capture exactly the group of transactions that you want for budget checking. You access this process from the menu for requisitions, purchase orders, and procurement cards.
The Commitment Control Budget Processor process operates the same whether it is initiated in batch mode using the Process Scheduler or when it is initiated from the purchase order and online entry pages. The batch mode affects a group of transactions whereas the online entry pages affect one transaction. The process compares the total amounts on each transaction (distribution) line to the available amounts in the referenced budget. If any line has an amount that exceeds the available budget, allowing for acceptable tolerances, that line fails budget checking and the system generates an exception message.
After you run the process, the transaction statuses and exception messages are on a batch log, which you can view by clicking the Message Log link on the Process Details page.
All lines on a transaction must pass budget checking for the transaction to receive a Valid budget status.
Transactions with an Error budget status have one or more budget exceptions, which is a transaction or a transaction line that has failed budget checking. Transactions in Error status must be corrected.
The budget processor records liquidations in the commitment control ledger (LEDGER_KK) as taking place in the fiscal year and accounting period in which the liquidation takes place. For example, when a voucher liquidates a purchase order, the liquidation is recorded using the fiscal year and accounting period of the voucher.
182 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
processes. These transactions must be approved and budget checked using separate processes. If you are using commitment control, a requisition cannot qualify for online sourcing until it has been budget checked and has a Valid budget status.
See Also
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Budget Exceptions, page 185
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," page 807
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Source Transactions Against
Control Budgets," Understanding the Budget Checking of Source Transactions
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Basic Commitment Control
Options"
Open period for receipt accrual transactions is the allowable open date range for accounting entry creation and for budget checking transactions if you are using commitment control. If the accounting date falls within the open period date range, the system posts the accounting entry to the actuals ledger. If the transaction budget date falls before or after the open period date range, the system provides an error or warning message to prevent or warn you from running budget checking.
Open period for requisition or purchase order transactions is the allowable open date range for budget checking transactions when you are using commitment control. If the transaction accounting date falls before or after the open period date range, the system provides an error or warning message to prevent or warn you from running budget checking.
When running budget checking, the system translates the accounting date to a fiscal year and accounting period in the budget ledger.
If you are using commitment control, the system sets open period checking to issue errors as a default. You can activate or override open period checking for PeopleSoft Purchasing on the Purchasing Options page.
You enter the open period date range according to general ledger business unit on the Update Open Period page.
The system validates the open period for requisitions, purchase orders, procurement cards, requisition and purchase order reconciliation workbench (for cancel and close), batch reconciliation processes, and receipt accrual transactions.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Accounting Calendars,"
Defining and Updating Open Periods and Adjustment Periods
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
183
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Liquidate method is a document schedule control option that instructs the Commitment Control Budget
Processor process how to accurately calculate and relieve outstanding pre-encumbrance and encumbrance balances from the budget ledger. You can selectively determine how to liquidate an encumbrance or preencumbrance at the document schedule level. To enable this functionality, configure your system to liquidate by quantity. Otherwise, all transactions liquidate by amount. Use the Purchasing Definitions - Business Unit
Options page to determine whether a purchase order business unit liquidates by quantity and determine the default liquidate method. You can then modify the liquidate method on the requisition or purchase order, and change it to the desired liquidation method. If you choose to distribute by amount, you can not liquidate by quantity.
•
When liquidating your balances by quantity, the budget processor must adhere to the following rules:
•
•
Calculate the unit price by using the amount of the preceding document.
Calculate the liquidate amount by using the predecessors unit price and multiplying it by the standard quantity of the current document.
Use the newly derived amount to relieve the pre-encumbrance and encumbrance of the preceding document.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications"
Chapter 3, "Defining PeopleSoft Purchasing Business Units and Processing Options," page 13
For information on document tolerances see the discussion on the topic.
See Chapter 9, "Running Document Tolerances," page 219.
When running a budget check only (budget pre-check), the budget processor performs the budget checking and edits that it normally does when a budget or transaction is posted, but it does so without committing changes (postings) to the general ledger records such as the Ledger_KK record. The check only feature is specifically intended to check one document, but does not update the Commitment Control tables (ledger and activity log).
To enable budget pre-checking for Purchasing, select Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Install, Installation
Options, Commitment Control. Then, select the Purchasing check box in the Enable Budget Pre-check section. You must also ensure that if the Purchasing check box is selected in the Enable Commitment Control section on the Installation Options - Products page
The Budget Pre-Check button is available for use on these PeopleSoft Purchasing pages:
184 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
•
•
•
•
•
Requisition
Requester's Workbench
Purchase Order
Express Purchase Order
Buyer's Workbench
When you perform budget pre-check only processing, the statuses of Provisionally Valid or Error on the transaction pages indicate whether a budget is available. If you click the Budget Pre-Check button and if the budget check is valid, then the system sets the budget header status for the requisition to Prov Valid. If the budget check is not valid, then the system sets the budget header status to Error with a link to the Exception page.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Source Transactions Against
Control Budgets," Checking Budget Journals and Transactions Without Posting
When using commitment control with PeopleSoft Purchasing, you track all requisition, purchase order and non-prorated purchase order transactions, procurement cards, and receipt accrual transactions that you submit, even if they cause you to go over budget. If you have a transaction that causes you to go over budget, you can adjust either your transaction or your budget to handle the exception.
•
•
•
•
Inevitably, some transactions do not pass the budget-checking process and the system identifies them as exceptions. Some of the circumstances that generate errors include:
Insufficient funds for a particular transaction.
Inconsistent ChartField combinations.
Transaction has an offset account.
Budget date for a transaction is out of bounds.
Depending on the configuration of your control budgets, the exact reason that a budget has insufficient funds varies from budget to budget. The budget may be on hold, closed, or simply out of funds. Additionally, you may have set up some budgets to approve transactions even if they go over budget amounts. Because of this, exceptions fall into two categories: warnings and errors.
Error Correction
You can correct errors for transactions by taking one or more of the following actions:
•
•
•
Change the amount on the transaction lines to conform to budget limits.
Change the budget amounts to enable more transactions to pass budget check.
Override the budget for a particular transaction.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
185
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
•
Override the entire transaction for all affected budgets.
Only a user with proper authorities can perform this type of correction.
Transactions fail budget checking if they have at least one line that fails budget checking for at least one budget. These transactions are candidates for overrides on either a budget basis or a transaction basis. You are notified of exceptions in two ways: online and through workflow notification.
In an online situation, you receive a message regarding a transaction status when the budget-checking process is complete. The message indicates the type of exception the transaction created and enables you to access the
Transaction Exception page, where you can either view the warnings generated or override the errors.
In a batch budget-checking situation, users are notified of exceptions through workflow, based on their individual security profiles in the system. The system generates an appropriate worklist for each user. Your users have access to a list of budgets that caused exceptions or a list of transactions with exceptions. These two options are available through the PeopleSoft menus or through the worklist.
•
•
There are a few different methods to access and override exceptions. You can:
•
Choose a particular budget from a worklist and access the Budget Exceptions page to view a list of all transactions that have failed for that budget.
Choose a particular transaction on a worklist and access the Transaction Exception page to view a list of all budgets that have caused exceptions on that transaction.
Click the Budget Status link on the document that has an error. When you click this link you access the
Transaction Exceptions page.
On a document with errors, the budget status field will become a link.
The worklist contains a complete list of exceptions, stating the exact cause of the error or warning. These methods enable you to inquire about exceptions and to set overrides. Once the transaction is overridden, the system sends a warning notification.
See Also
Chapter 6, "Using Workflow," page 117
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Budget Exceptions," Setting Up and
Running Exception Notification
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Budget Exceptions," Understanding
Viewing and Handling of Budget Transaction Exceptions
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Budget Exceptions," Viewing and
Handling Budget Transaction Exceptions
Various override attributes can affect a budget-checked transaction:
•
•
Only authorized users can perform transaction and budget overrides.
Multiple super users can override different budgets for the same transaction.
186 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
•
•
A super user need only override a budget for a particular transaction once, unless that transaction changes after the override.
A user can perform an online remote call to the Commitment Control Budget Processor process.
This process budget checks the transactions that the user selected. Transaction lines with overridden budgets receive a warning for every budget that was exceeded. The system refreshes the budget and transaction exception pages to reflect these changes.
The actual process of overriding a budget just requires selecting a check box on the appropriate page. A super user can access either the Budget Exceptions page or the Transaction Exception page to override specific budgets or transactions.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Budget Exceptions," Viewing and
Handling Budget Transaction Exceptions
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Commitment Control Security"
Altering a transaction that has been through budget checking results in the deletion of all existing exception rows for the transaction. The Commitment Control Budget Processor process deletes the exception rows when the altered transaction is budget checked again. This includes the deletion of override marks for any budgets that appear on the altered transactions. A message to this effect appears when the budget is identified for override and you save the page.
Altering a transaction after it has been budget checked forces the Commitment Control Budget Processor process to treat the transaction as if it were new when budget checking is performed again. All previous exceptions are deleted, and any new ones are recorded as the transaction moves through the Commitment
Control Budget Processor process.
Similarly, altering budgets can affect active transactions. The Commitment Control Budget Processor process reacts to the most current budget data. Consequently, if you alter your budgets and run a budget check, errors on active transactions can change.
budget information using the Budget Exceptions page. Otherwise budget changes can be made by increasing the budget by editing the budget entry.
To make changes to transactions that have been budget checked:
1. Open the source transactions and make the changes to specific transactions.
2. Save your changes.
3. Run the Commitment Control Budget Processor process again to check the budget.
The Commitment Control Budget Processor process removes the original commitment control journal and creates a new one with the changed transactions.
This table lists examples of transaction changes and their resulting effects:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
187
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Transaction Change
Change requisition quantities and requisition item prices.
Change purchase order quantities and item prices.
Modify ChartFields.
Cancel, delete, or insert a requisition line.
Effect
Changes final pre-encumbrance amount generated during budget checking.
Changes final encumbrance amounts generated during budget checking.
Sets the budget status to Not Checked. Requires another run of the budget processor.
Sets budget-header status to Not Checked. Requires another run of the budget processor to release the preencumbrance.
This table lists examples of budget changes and their resulting effects:
Budget Change
Change arrangement of budgets. Move a detail budget under a new summary budget. Technically, you would be changing the tree or the node level within the same tree that the system uses to translate the relationship between a detail budget and a summary budget. You may be moving a node to a new tree.
Effect
If this change results in a transaction that is no longer controlled by the original budget, you must change all relevant transactions to reference the budget in its new location or to reference a new detail budget.
Increase or decrease budget amounts.
Adjust tolerances for a particular budget.
Generates different exceptions for all affected transactions. Increasing your budget decreases exceptions and decreases your budget increases exceptions.
Increasing tolerances generally enables more transactions to pass budget checking within tolerance.
Decreasing tolerances generally enables fewer transactions to pass. Although this alteration does not change the total number of exceptions, it does change the proportion of errors and warnings generated for a particular transaction or budget. You receive more warnings and fewer errors.
Alter the status of a budget.
There are three possible statuses for budgets: Open,
Hold, and Closed. If you change the status of a budget, that action affects all referencing transactions captured in the next budget check.
188 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Budget Exceptions," Viewing and
Handling Budget Transaction Exceptions
If you have commitment control enabled, the Close Requisitions (PO_REQRCON) and Close Purchase
Orders (PO_PORECON) Application Engine processes consider this functionality.
After you have selected your process parameters and run a close process, the process verifies whether you have enabled commitment control. If it is enabled, the process updates the budget distribution lines and the budget header on all requisitions (for PO_REQRCON) or purchase orders (for PO_PORECON) that meet the close criteria. The status on the distribution line and the header changes from V (valid) to N (not checked).
The close processes set the budget status to Not Checked and the fully liquidated flag to Yes. Run the budget processor to relieve the remaining encumbrance.
For example, you have a purchase order for 100.00 USD, but after discounts, the vendor only invoices you for
98.00 USD. Before running the Close Purchase Orders process, the remaining 2.00 USD still exists as an encumbrance. When you close the purchase order, you must liquidate the remaining encumbrance for 2.00
USD. For this reason, the Close Purchase Orders process set the budget status to Not Checked and fully liquidated flag to Yes. You then run the budget processor to relieve the remaining encumbrance. The running of the budget processor is not an automated step in the close processes.
The commitment control process creates separate closing entries in the PeopleSoft Commitment Control activity log for purchase orders and requisitions. The activity log retains and displays the complete budgetary life cycle of purchase orders and requisitions.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Inquiring on Budgets and Transaction
Activities," Viewing the Activity Log
Chapter 24, "Closing Requisitions," page 575
Chapter 34, "Closing Purchase Orders," page 1003
This process is used to budget check the expense and encumbrance reclassification transactions. You can budget check either type.
See Also
Chapter 41, "Using Receipt Accrual," Performing Budget-Checking for Receipt Accruals, page 1196
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
189
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Activity ID assigned to the individual tasks or events that you want to update in a project.
Select to access the Budget Exceptions - Refine Inquiry Criteria page.
(PeopleSoft project costing business unit)
Budget date of the transaction line. You define which field the system uses for the budget date for the transaction in the source transaction definition.
Period to which the budget transaction posts.
Select to limit the exception rows retrieved to transactions with either an Error or
Warning exception. This is a required field.
The amount of the line in the entry currency.
Use to limit the rows to lines with either Error or Warning exceptions.
Select the maximum number of rows that are to appear in the scroll area.
The amount in the base currency of the primary ledger.
If selected, the transaction has more exceptions than the number that you entered in the Maximum Rows field.
If selected, the transaction has more transaction line exceptions than the number that you entered in the Maximum Rows field.
Select to update the control budget although the transaction exceeds the budget.
This option is available only if the budget transaction fails budget checking and you have super-user authority. It is not available if the source transaction type does not enable overrides and the budget header status is Not Checked. The budget header status appears as Not Checked if you changed the source transaction after the Commitment Control Budget Processor process issued the exceptions and you have not run the process again.
After you override a budget with exceptions, adjust the budget available amount, or adjust the source transaction amount; the transaction passes budget checking.
Select to enable the entire transaction to update the control budget, even if error exceptions exist. This option is available only for super users. This option is not available if the transaction passes budget checking with only warning exceptions.
You can select it prior to budget checking or after you run the Commitment
Control Budget Processor process and it returns errors.
Business unit assigned to the project in PeopleSoft Project Costing.
190 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
Resource category, such as labor, associated with a given cost. This is used in conjunction with resource categories, resource subcategories, and resource groups.
type)
Select the type of transaction that you want to budget check. Values are:
REQ_PREENC: Requisition pre-encumbrance.
REQ_PRECNP: Non-Prorated requisition pre-encumbrance.
PO_POENC: Prorated purchase order encumbrance.
PO_POENCNP: Non-prorated purchase order encumbrance.
PO_PROCARD: Procurement card transaction.
PO_RAENC: Receipt accrual encumbrance.
PO_RAEXP: Receipt accrual expenses.
Displays the related accounting entry type.
Click the Budget Override Available Info button to determine the reason why you cannot override a single budget entry.
Click to run the remote call budget processor again once you override the transaction or a budget. You should also run the process again if you change the requisition, purchase order, or procurement card transaction.
available information)
Click the Tran Override Available Info button to determine the reason why you cannot override the transaction.
Select the Budget Override tab to access a page that enables you to access the
Budget Exceptions page or Budget Details page. You must have authority to inquire about the budget to access these pages.
Click the View Exception Details button at the exception header level to access the Exception Details page for transaction headers to view the budgets with error or warning exceptions, budget ChartFields, and any overrides.
Create a unique run control ID for each type of source transaction that you want to budget check independently of other source transactions. If you use the same run control ID for purchase orders and requisitions, the budget processor will process both purchase orders and requisitions existing at the time the run control
ID is used to initiate the budget checking process. For example, this occurs if you have created a run control ID of BPO1 for both purchase orders and requisitions.
However, if you create a different run control ID for purchase orders and requisitions, the different source transactions are processed independently of each other. For example, creating BPPO1 for purchase orders and BPRQ1 for requisitions enables you to budget check the two source transactions independently of one another.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
191
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
See Also
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Commitment Control Budget Processor Process in PeopleSoft
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using ChartFields,"
Understanding PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartFields
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications," Setting Up Application-Specific Installation Options
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Inquiring on Budgets and Transaction
Activities," Viewing Budget Details and Transaction Activity
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Budget Exceptions," Viewing and
Handling Budget Transaction Exceptions
PeopleSoft Enterprise Commitment Control 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Source Transactions Against
Control Budgets"
If you are using commitment control, you can specify partial or final liquidation of a requisition when it is sourced to a purchase order. When you create or modify a purchase order, you can designate that the purchase order is final, prompting the system to liquidate the preceding requisition. You can make your purchase order the final document to be affected by the preceding requisition, for less money than you originally authorized.
You can also reverse the finalization of the document.
•
•
In PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can perform partial or final liquidations where the successor transaction references and liquidates its predecessor, including:
Requisition to purchase order.
Purchase order to payment voucher.
The system fully liquidates document lines automatically upon completion of the subsequent transaction when you designate the transaction as final. The system then creates the appropriate accounting entries to relieve outstanding pre-encumbrances and encumbrances, performing the reversing entry according to the document type and entry event of the referenced transaction.
•
•
Using partial and final liquidation, you can:
•
Liquidate requisition or purchase order lines and relieve the outstanding pre-encumbrance and encumbrance from the budget ledger.
Create the appropriate accounting transactions in the budget to relieve outstanding pre-encumbrances and encumbrances as applicable.
Perform the correct accounting and available (open) amount calculations for modifications and cancellations of predecessor or successor transactions.
192 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
•
Process final liquidations at the schedule line level of transactions, that is, orders can have some lines open while others are closed.
The corresponding voucher lines that reference (liquidate) the lines determine this.
At times, multiple transactions reference the same predecessor. If two payment vouchers for two invoices of
500.00 USD each are associated to the same 1000.00 USD purchase order, only the second payment voucher is considered final. The first 500.00 USD payment voucher is considered partial, because an additional 500.00
USD encumbrance remains outstanding. If the first 500.00 USD actually represents the last expected action against the order, you can designate the voucher as final for less and relieve the entire 1000.00 USD encumbrance.
Partial and Final Liquidation Example
For example, suppose that you create a requisition for 200.00 USD and run budget checking. The system shows an increase of 200.00 USD to the existing pre-encumbrance amount of 40.00 USD.
Amount Ledger
Budget 5,000,000.00 USD
Expense
Encumbrance
0.00 USD
1000.00 USD
Pre-encumbrance 240.00 USD
Then create a purchase order that references this requisition for 165.00 USD. When you run budget checking, the pre-encumbrance decreases and the encumbrance increases by 165.00 USD.
Amount Ledger
Budget 5,000,000.00 USD
Expense
Encumbrance
Pre-encumbrance
0.00 USD
1165.00 USD
75.00 USD
Create another purchase order that references this requisition for 25.00 USD, finalize the purchase order and run budget checking. The total for all purchase orders is 190.00 USD, but the pre-encumbrance is liquidated with the full requisition amount of 200.00 USD. The pre-encumbrance decreases and the encumbrance increases by 25.00 USD.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
193
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Ledger
Budget
Expense
Encumbrance
Pre-encumbrance
5,000,000.00 USD
0.00 USD
1250.00 USD
40.00 USD
Amount
To liquidate a requisition for an amount lower than the original:
1. Reduce the quantity or price total on the purchase order to the correct amount
2. Click the Finalize Document button.
3. Save the purchase order.
4. After approving the revised purchase order, run budget checking to confirm the correction.
You can also reverse finalization of a purchase order or voucher. The system then restores the original budgetary amount to the preceding documents that had previously been liquidated. If you do not declare a document final (for less), no additional liquidation takes place. The system replicates the partial or final status of a document down to all the document distribution lines associated with the given document schedule, adjusting all ledgers accordingly.
For example, you can process a requisition for 1000.00 USD, then create a purchase order for only 700.00
USD, without expecting to spend the remaining 300.00 USD that the requisition authorizes. You can declare the purchase order final (for less), thereby liquidating the pre-encumbered 300.00 USD from the requisition and freeing that money for other purposes.
If you find later that you need to spend another 250.00 USD on the purchase order from the original requisition, you should either click the Undo Finalize Line button or the Undo Finalize Entire Document button and save the purchase order. Then, select to budget check the revised purchase order document again.
You can declare the purchase order partial, thus liquidating the requisition and freeing the last 50.00 USD for other purposes.
When you finalize the purchase order document on the affected requisition and then perform a budget check on the purchase order again, the Final field is selected and the Budget Line Status value on the Statuses tab is set to Valid on PO Distribution. Also, the Commitment Control Close Flag check box is selected on the
Details tab on the Maintain Requisitions
–
Distribution page.
When you undo finalize on the purchase order document on the affected requisition and then budget check the purchase order again, the Final field is cleared, and the Budget Line Status field value on the Statuses tab is set to Valid on PO Distribution. In this case, the Commitment Control Close check box is deselected on the Details tab on the Maintain Requisitions
–
Distribution page.
To reverse a reduction:
194 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
1. Clear the final check box for the affected line or lines, or click the Undo Finalize Entire Document button.
2. Save the purchase order.
3. Run budget checking to confirm the correct amount.
You must budget check each purchase order after you declare it either final (for less) or partial. During budget checking, the system treats a finalized purchase order as a direct encumbrance, still subject to preencumbrance tolerance checking.
finalized until all of those purchase orders have passed budget checking.
once the distribution has been canceled.
checking.
If you're using entry events, you must run them after budget checking. This generates your pro forma accounting entries, adjusted for finalization or partialization.
See Also
Chapter 10, "Using Entry Events," page 225
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Budget check requisitions using the Commitment Control Budget Processor process.
Budget check requisitions using online pages.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
195
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Page Name
Req Budget Check
(requisition budget check)
Definition Name
REQ_KK_CHECK_REQ
Maintain Requisitions -
Requisition
Requisition Exceptions
Requisition Line Drill
Down
Line Exceptions
REQ_FORM
KK_XCP_HDR_PO2
KK_DRL_PO2_SEC
KK_XCP_LN_PO2
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Requisitions,
Budget Check, Req Budget
Check
Run the Comm. Ctrl.
Budget Processor process for requisitions.
Commitment control must be enabled for PeopleSoft
Purchasing.
Purchasing, Requisitions,
Add/Update Requisitions,
Maintain Requisitions -
Requisition
Create requisitions online.
Commitment Control,
Review Budget Check
Exceptions, Purchasing and
Cost Management,
Requisition, Requisition
Exceptions
View budget check exceptions for requisitions.
Users with appropriate authority can override the budget exceptions on this page.
Click the View
Exception Details button on the Requisition Exceptions page for transaction headers for a specific requisition line.
View line details for requisitions with budget exceptions.
Commitment Control,
Review Budget Check
Exceptions, Purchasing and
Cost Management,
Requisition, Line
Exceptions
View requisition lines on a requisition with budget check exceptions. Users with appropriate authority can override the budget exceptions on this page.
Access the Req Budget Check page (Purchasing, Requisitions, Budget Check, Req Budget Check ).
To budget check requisitions, select REQ_PREENC in the Trans Type field.
196 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
Process Options
Values are:
All: Select to budget check all requisitions.
Some: Select to display the From and To fields. Budget checks all requisitions that match the range specified in the From and To fields.
Value: Select to display the Req ID field. Budget checks the requisition that matches the ID specified in the Req ID field.
date)
Values are:
All: Select to budget check all requisitions.
Some: Displays the From and To fields. Budget checks all requisitions for which creation dates fall within the dates specified in the From and To fields.
Value: Displays the Req Date field. Budget checks requisitions for which creation dates match the date specified in the Req Date field.
When you create online requisitions, you can budget check them in realtime by clicking the Budget Check button on the Maintain Requisitions - Requisition page. This invokes the Commitment Control Budget
Processor process by remote call.
See Also
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Commitment Control Budget Processor Process in PeopleSoft
Chapter 19, "Creating Requisitions Online," Creating Requisition Header Information, page 440
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Budget check purchase orders using the Commitment Control Budget Processor process.
Budget check purchase orders using online pages.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
197
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Page Name
Budget Check Request
Maintain Purchase Order -
Purchase Order
PO_LINE
Purchase Order Exceptions
KK_XCP_HDR_PO1
Purchase Order Line Drill
Down
KK_DRL_PO1_SEC
Line Exceptions
Purchase Order (NP)
Exceptions (purchase order non-prorated exceptions)
KK_XCP_HDR_PO1N
NonProrated Purchase
Order Line Drill Down
Definition Name
PO_KK_CHECK_REQ
KK_XCP_LN_PO1
KK_DRL_PO1N_SEC
Navigation
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Check, PO
Budget Check Request
Usage
Run the Comm. Ctrl.
Budget Processor process for purchase orders. You must enable commitment control for PeopleSoft
Purchasing.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Add/Update POs,
Maintain Purchase Order -
Purchase Order
Enter or change purchase order information online.
Commitment Control,
Review Budget Check
Exceptions, Purchasing and
Cost Management, Purchase
Order, Purchase Order
View budget check exceptions for purchase orders. Users with appropriate authority can override the budget exceptions on this page.
Click the View
Exception Details button on the Purchase Order
Exceptions page for transaction headers for a specific purchase order.
View line details for purchase orders with budget exceptions.
Commitment Control,
Review Budget Check
Exceptions, Purchasing and
Cost Management, Purchase
Order, Line Exceptions
View lines on a purchase order with budget check exceptions. Users with appropriate authority can override the budget exceptions on this page.
Commitment Control,
Review Budget Check
Exceptions, Purchasing and
Cost Management, Purchase
Order Non-prorated,
Purchase Order (NP)
Exceptions
View budget check exceptions for non-prorated purchase orders. Users with appropriate authority can override the budget exceptions on this page.
Click the View
Exception Details button on the Purchase Order (NP)
Exceptions page for transaction headers for a specific non-prorated purchase order line.
View line details for nonprorated purchase orders with budget exceptions.
198 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8
Page Name
Line Exceptions
Definition Name
KK_XCP_LN_PO1N
Using Commitment Control
Navigation Usage
Commitment Control,
Review Budget Check
Exceptions, Purchasing and
Cost Management, Purchase
Order Non-prorated, Line
Exceptions
View lines on a nonprorated purchase order with budget check exceptions. Users with appropriate authority can override the budget exceptions on this page.
Access the Budget Check Request page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Budget Check, PO Budget Check
Request).
To budget check prorated purchase orders, select PO_POENC in the Trans Type field.
To budget check non-prorated purchase orders, select PO_POENCNP in the Trans Type field.
Process Options
ID)
Values are:
All: Budget checks all purchase orders.
Some: Select to display the From and To fields. Budget checks all purchase orders that match the range specified in the From and To fields.
Value: Select to display the PO ID field. Budget checks the purchase order that matches the ID specified in the PO ID field.
date)
Values are:
All: Select to budget check all purchase orders.
Some: Displays the From and To fields. Budget checks all purchase orders for which creation dates fall within the dates specified in the From and To fields.
Value: Displays the PO Date field. Budget checks purchase orders for which creation dates match the date specified in the PO Date field.
When you create online purchase orders, you can budget check them in realtime by clicking the Budget
Check button on the Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order page. This invokes the Commitment Control
Budget Processor process by remote call.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
199
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
See Also
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Commitment Control Budget Processor Process in PeopleSoft
Chapter 28, "Creating Purchase Orders Online," Creating Purchase Order Headers, page 684
You can now perform budget check and ChartField edit validations for your procurement card transactions during the Statement Load process and online processing. Use the budget processor to invoke budget check and ChartField edits after staged data is loaded into the Statement Load process and when users use the
Reconcile Statement component.
•
You can use the budget check or the ChartField Edit validation process during:
•
The Statement Load process
If you enable commitment control for procurement cards, the system validates the budget rows. If rows are not budget checked, the budget status is N (not checked). If a row fails the budget check, the budget status is E (error). If rows pass the budget check, the budget status is V (valid).
If you selected edit combination options on the Purchasing Options page, the system performs ChartField edit combinations based on the ChartField Editing template. The system indicates a status of V (valid for passing rows) or R (recycle for rows that fail).
Online processing
If you enable commitment control for procurement cards, the system performs ChartField edits and budget-check validations after the users modify the distribution information and click the Save button on the Reconcile Statement page.
The system also validates for ChartField combinations on the Distribution Templates page. Once a user modifies and saves information on this page, the system automatically uses the budget processor to check for valid ChartFields.
page.
Users can access the Budget Check Exceptions page to fix all rows that did not pass budget check. All failed rows must be fixed before successfully passing budget check.
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Budget check procurement cards during the Statement Load process.
Budget check procurement cards using the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page.
200 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications"
Page Name
Load Statement
Reconcile Statement -
Procurement Card
Transactions
Budget ChartField
Validation
Budget Check Exceptions
KK_XCP_HDR_PO3
Source Transactions -
Definition
Definition Name
RUN_CC_LOADTRANS
CC_RECON_WB
CC_KK_CHECK_REQ
KK_SOURCE_TRAN1
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Load Statement
Usage
Run the ProCard Load
Statement Application
Engine process
(PO_CCLOADLD) to load the statement lines from the staging table into the statement tables and to perform auto-reconciliation using the settings that you defined on the Procurement
Card Load Statement
Options page.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reconcile, Reconcile
Statement, Reconcile
Statement - Procurement
Card Transactions
Review, manage, and approve procurement card transactions loaded by the
ProCard Load Statement process. You can view all of the procurement card transactions that you have been granted authority to access on the Card Data page.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Budget ChartField
Validation
Run the Comm. Cntrl
Budget Processor process for the procurement cards in batch mode.
Commitment Control,
Review Budget Check
Exceptions, Purchasing and
Cost Management,
Procurement Card, Budget
Check Exceptions
Review procurement card transactions that failed the budget check process.
Commitment Control,
Define Control Budgets,
Source Transactions, Source
Transactions - Definition
Define source transactions for commitment control.
Note. Select Planned as the value for the Commitment
Control Amount Type field.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
201
Using Commitment Control
Page Name
Budget Definitions -
Control Budget Options
Definition Name
KK_BUDG1
Chapter 8
Navigation Usage
Commitment Control,
Define Control Budgets,
Budget Definitions, Budget
Definitions - Control
Budget Options
Establish budgetary controls.
Note. If you select Entries
Must Balance on the
Control Budget Options page, enter a default account value for at least one setID for budget entry offsets.
You must also enter a source transaction offset account for each source transaction type that affects this budget definition.
Access the Load Statement page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Process Statements, Load Statement).
See Also
Access the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards,
Reconcile, Reconcile Statement, Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions).
When you create modify procurement cards using the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page, you can budget check them in realtime when you save the page. This invokes the Commitment Control
Budget Processor process by remote call.
This section provides an overview of budget period-end processing and discusses how to run budget periodend processes.
202 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
Because a budget period can span a calendar or fiscal year, PeopleSoft uses the term period-end universally and applies it to the end of a budget period, the end of a fiscal year, or the end of a calendar year.
The budget period-end processes enable you to continue budgets across budget periods or fiscal years. You may have budgets that stay in force for more than one fiscal period. You may have project budgets that span more than one calendar year. Consequently, you may want to keep budgets in force across these time frames.
The commitment control feature in PeopleSoft Purchasing provides you with two options.
You can keep a budget active beyond the end of a fiscal period, allowing purchasing transactions to reference that budget and to remain unaffected by fiscal period-end accounting procedures. This option is useful for project-related budgets that are finite in scope.
You can also close a budget at the end of a budget period and reestablish it in the next period while keeping all outstanding transactions active into the next budget period. This option is useful for ongoing accounts and budgets that you want to infuse with additional funds at regular intervals. You can end one period and start the next one with new amounts in selected budgets. You do not lose your outstanding transactions from the previous budget period, which saves you from having to enter them all over again in the new budget period.
PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to roll these transactions over into the new budget period automatically by using these budget period-end business processes.
•
•
Budget period-end processes differ from fiscal period-end processes. Your fiscal period-end closing entries have no effect on the commitment control ledgers. Therefore, fiscal period-end closing entries do not invoke the Commitment Control Budget Processor process for budget checking.
The first period-end business processes are the close processes for requisitions and purchase orders that remove outstanding requisitions and purchase orders from your budget.
The other aspect of these processes involves use of the PO Rollover1 (PO_POROLL1) and PO Rollover2
(PO_POROLL2) Application Engine processes.
These processes enable you to budget check distribution lines against budgets with expiring periods and then roll funds over to new periods.
See Also
Chapter 34, "Closing Purchase Orders," page 1003
Chapter 24, "Closing Requisitions," page 575
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
203
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Page Name
Close Requisitions
Close PO
PO Rollover
Purchase Order Selection
PO_ROLLOVER_SEARCH
Purchase Order Details
PO Rollover1
Budget Check Request
PO Rollover2
Definition Name
RUN_REQRECON
RUN_PORECON
PO_ROLLOVER
PO_ROLLOVER_LN
RUN_POROLL1
PO_KK_CHECK_REQ
RUN_POROLL2
Navigation
Purchasing, Requisitions,
Reconcile Requisitions,
Close Requisitions
Usage
Run the Close Requisitions process and produce the
Close Requisition SQR report (PORQ009).
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Reconcile POs,
Close Purchase Orders,
Close PO
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, PO Rollover
Workbench, PO Rollover
Run the Close Purchase
Order process and produce the Close Purchase Order
SQR report (POPO008).
Select purchase orders to rollover and change their statuses to Pending before running the PO Rollover1 process. Check the roll status of the purchase orders.
Click the Selection Criteria link on the PO Rollover page.
Use the filters to choose purchase orders for consideration for rollover.
Click the Secondary
Lines button on the PO
Rollover page.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, Request PO
Rollover1, PO Rollover1
View additional details for purchase orders listed on the Purchase Order
Selection page.
Run the PO Rollover1 process.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Check,
Budget Check Request
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, Request PO
Rollover2, PO Rollover2
Run the Commitment
Control Budget Processor process.
Run the PO Rollover2 process.
This section provides an overview of purchase order rollover process and discusses how to:
•
Create a data set for retrieval by the purchase order rollover workbench.
204 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select and qualify purchase orders for rollover.
Review purchase order details.
Run the PO Rollover1 process.
Run the PO Rollover2 process.
Run the PO Roll Open Encumbrance process.
Run the Non Qualified PO Listing process.
Using Commitment Control
If you are using commitment control, you can use purchase order rollover to budget check distribution lines against budgets with expiring budget periods and then roll funds over to new budget periods. PeopleSoft
Purchasing enables you to select specific purchase orders to rollover.
Purchase orders that are canceled, fully vouchered, on hold, in process, or have not been successfully budget checked are not qualified for rollover. In addition, distribution lines that are canceled, closed or fully liquidated (that is, the commitment control close flag (KK_CLOSE_FLAG) is set to Y) do not qualify for rollover.
The system places strict requirements on purchase orders and their interdependence with accounts payable, receiving, and commitment control before it makes the purchase orders eligible for rollover. To assist you in reviewing details about why the purchase order is not qualified for rollover and provide you a way to manage exceptions across a large data set, the system provides two options for working with rollover exceptions.
First, you can use the PO Rollover View page to define specific fields that create data sets that you can use to review purchase order rollover information. A search ID value is used to define a data set. As an example of creating a data set, you might want to include only those purchase orders where the Project ChartField is within a range or you might want to exclude purchase orders where the Project ChartField is populated.
When you run the PO_POROLLVW process, the system creates the search ID that you define. You can then use the PO Rollover Workbench to retrieve the search ID with the corresponding rollover details. You can also use the workbench to identify purchase orders that you do not want to rollover. The system filters these purchase orders out for future iterations of the POROLLVW process.
The next rollover exception option enables you to view which purchase orders are not qualified for rollover.
To view the purchase orders, you run the POROLLEXP process to create the PO Rollover Exceptions report.
You can run the report from within the PO Rollover Workbench, the PO Rollover View page, or the PO
Rollover page, or you can use the Non Qualified PO Listing menu option. The report displays the nonqualified purchase orders and their associated documents. To populate the tables to produce the PO Rollover
Exceptions report, run the PO Rollover view process to select the disqualified orders.
process sets the PO distribution status to Complete.
See Also
Chapter 28, "Creating Purchase Orders Online," page 671
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
205
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Page Name
PO Rollover View
Definition Name
RUN_POROLLVW
PO Rollover (purchase order rollover)
Purchase Order Details
POs Not Budget Checked
PO_ROLL_REQ_FIN
PO Rollover1
Budget Check Request
PO Rollover2
Roll Open Encum (roll open encumbrance)
RUN_POROLLO
Run Roll Exception
PO_ROLLOVER
PO_ROLLOVER_LN
RUN_POROLL1
PO_KK_CHECK_REQ
RUN_POROLL2
RUN_ROLL_EXCEPTION
Navigation
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, Request PO
Roll View, PO Rollover
View
Usage
Create a data set for retrieval by the purchase order rollover workbench by initiating the Rollover
View (PO_POROLLVW)
Application Engine process.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, PO Rollover
Workbench, PO Rollover
Select purchase orders to rollover and change their status to Pending before running the PO Rollover1 process. Check the roll status of purchase orders.
Click the Secondary
Lines button for any row on the PO Rollover page.
View additional details for purchase orders listed on the PO Rollover page.
Click the POs to Budg Chk for Finalizing link on the
Purchase Order Details page.
View details about purchase orders that have yet to reach a budget check status of
Valid, thus enabling requisition finalization.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, Request PO
Rollover1, PO Rollover1
Run the PO Rollover1 process.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Check,
Budget Check Request
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, Request PO
Rollover2, PO Rollover2
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, Request PO
Roll Open Encum
Run the Commitment
Control Budget Processor process.
Run the PO Rollover2 process.
Run the PO Roll Open
Encum process.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Budget Year End
Processing, Non Qualified
PO Listing
Run the Non Qualified PO
Listing process.
206 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
Access the PO Rollover View page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Budget Year End Processing, Request PO
Roll View, PO Rollover View).
Request PO Roll View (1 of 2)
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
207
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
208
Request PO Roll View (1 of 2)
processing times on the purchase order rollover workbench can be substantial.
The PO Rollover View page enables you to limit the information contained in a data set. You use the page to define selection criteria for the PO_POROLLVW process. Along with limiting basic information, such as a business unit, a buyer, or a purchase order, you can limit the data set to ChartField values. For example, you can limit the data set to a specific ChartField or a range of ChartFields.
In addition, you can limit information in data sets using logic operands against a ChartField. These operands include, for example, Begins with,Equal, and Less than. So if you want to include ChartFields for a specific fund affiliate, you would use the In operand. The system displays a General Ledger Business Unit field that you use to select a fund affiliate to include in the data set.
Enter a search ID for this data set. The search ID is used to retrieve the data set on the PO Rollover page.
selected data will be overwritten. PeopleSoft recommends a unique search ID for each different set of search criteria.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
Roll Status
The following rules apply to purchase order selection:
•
•
•
When you select Rolled and None and a purchase order has both statuses, the line becomes available for selection. All distributions with these statuses appear with the appropriate roll error on the More Details tab on the Purchase Order Details page. The rolled distributions are not included in the rollover processes:
When you select None and a purchase order has distributions that have previously been rolled, only the distributions that have not been rolled appear. The lines are available for selection on the PO Rollover page.
When you select Rolled, any rolled distributions appear on the PO Rollover page, but they are not available for selection there.
Once you select a purchase order and it is in Pending or Mid Roll status, it does not appear again unless you select those specific statuses. You cannot select lines that are in Mid Roll status on the PO Rollover page.
Rollover page, is available for selection, and is not selected for staging again. Therefore, successive applications of the filters on this page should be more restrictive.
Select this check box to find purchase orders that have no other roll status, because they have not yet been selected for rolling, or they have been selected and then removed from the selection process.
Select this check box to find purchase orders that have been selected for rolling.
Select this check box to find purchase orders on which you have run the PO
Rollover1 process. Purchase orders with this header status are protected from all actions except budget checking and rollover. Purchase orders with this status cannot be copied into vouchers.
Select this check box to find purchase orders that have been rolled.
Select this check box to find purchase orders that have been identified during the
PO Rollover1 process as being in error and, therefore, are not eligible to continue the Rollover process. When you want to include disqualified purchase orders, the program does not delete them from the processing results. Selecting this check box is useful for customers who want to see the documents that may require additional work before the year-end roll.
Select to hold the selected purchase orders from rolling over when you know that there is additional work to be done on the order. For purchase orders to be eligible to set to Hold from Rollover, they should be in a roll status of None or
Pending. When purchase orders are in a Hold status they are not qualified for PO
Rollover 1 (PO_POROLL1) or PO Rollover 2 (PO_POROLL2) rollover processing.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
209
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Exception Report
Use this grid box to indicate that you want to run the PO Rollover Exceptions report and to define the sort method for the report.
Select to also run the PO Roll Exceptions report when you run the PO Roll View process. Exception types are made up of the rollover error and information associated with the error. For each rollover error type, the report displays the error title and information. Examples of exception types include "Invalid budget status on PO" and "Invalid budget status on PO and voucher."
Select to sort the PO Rollover Exceptions report by exception type. The system sorts the report first by Search ID and business unit, then by exception type, and finally by purchase order keys.
Select to sort the PO Rollover Exceptions report by purchase order ID. The system first sorts the report by Search ID and business unit, then by purchase order ID, and finally by exception type.
Other Information
Click this button to initiate the PO_POROLLVW process that creates the data set that you can select on the PO Rollover page.
See Also
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Running the PO Rollover1 Process, page 213
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Running the PO Rollover2 Process, page 214
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using ChartFields,"
Understanding PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartFields
Access the PO Rollover page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Budget Year End Processing, PO Rollover
Workbench, PO Rollover).
Purchase orders that have been received or partially received, but not yet vouchered are available for selection for purchase order rollover processing on the PO Rollover page. To retain the relationship between the purchase order and the receipt, the PO Rollover2 process updates the purchase order distribution number on the receipt distribution to match the new purchase order distribution number.
210 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
However, if there is one receipt for the purchase order that has been partially vouchered, the PO Rollover page is unable to maintain the relationship between the associated documents. Therefore, the purchase order is not available for selection for purchase order rollover processing. The Roll Status field is set to Part Vchrd
(partially vouchered) and the Roll Error field on the Purchase Order Details page is set to One receipt
partially vchrd (one receipt partially vouchered). A receipt is considered partially vouchered if the sum
(quantity or amount) of all associated vouchers is less than the amount or quantity on the single receipt.
Purchase orders that you selected on the PO Rollover View page appear if they qualify for rollover. Purchase orders that are canceled, fully vouchered, on hold, in process, or that have not been successfully budget checked do not qualify for rollover and do not appear on this page.
Distribution lines do not appear if they are canceled, closed, or fully liquidated (that is, if the commitment control close flag is set to Y), because they are not qualified for rollover.
reselect it if it appears again on this page and is available for selection. Otherwise, the system removes the line from staging.
Select the search criteria then click the Search button. If you select only a business unit, then multiple search IDs will display. If multiple search IDs contain the same purchase order number then that purchase order will display multiple times on the page. If you select a business unit and a search ID, then only the data from the specific search ID will display on the page.
Click to access the Run Roll Exception page where you can define report values for the PO Roll Exception report. This report provides a list of purchase orders that are not qualified for the rollover. The system uses a combination of the user
ID and business unit to determine the run control ID for the report, and you can define the business unit and search ID for the report.
When running the PO Rollover1 process, you can choose to finalize requisitions associated with the purchase orders selected for the process.
To help you prepare for requisition finalization, this field provides the finalization qualification status of the requisition associated with the purchase order that you selected for purchase order rollover processing. Values are:
Not Qualified: Requisition is not qualified for finalization.
No Requisition: There is no requisition associated with the selected purchase order.
Qualified: The associated requisition qualifies for finalization. A requisition qualifies for finalization when all purchase orders with the same requisition key fields have reached a budget check status of Valid.
Not Applicable: The distribution has an associated requisition; however, it has already been rolled.
not available when the Keep PY Encumbrances Open option is selected for the purchase order.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
211
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
Displays the roll status for a purchase order. The roll status is the current state of a purchase order. When rolling over purchase orders, the system budget checks distribution lines against budgets with expiring budget periods and then roll funds over to new budget periods.
Displays the encumbrance balance when commitment control is installed. When you create a purchase order, commitment control liquidates the pre-encumbrance balance from the requisition and establishes an encumbrance for the purchase order. You can view budget details for the purchase order. Click the
Encumbrance Balance link to access the PO Accounting Entries Inquiry where you can select a General Ledger business unit and commitment control ledger group to use as a budget inquiry.
year encumbrances open)
Displays whether the prior year remaining encumbrance is open or closed. If Y appears in the field, the encumbrance is closed. If N appears in the field, the prior year remaining encumbrances for the purchase order is open. You can update the value by selecting the purchase order and clicking the PY Encum Open or the PY
Encum Close button.
Click the Secondary Lines button for any row to access the Purchase Order
Details page. Use the Purchase Order Details page to view additional details for the purchase order.
year encumbrances open)
Click to keep the prior year remaining encumbrances open for the selected purchase orders. When you click the button, the system displays a Y in the PY
Encum Open field in the Budget Year End Details grid.
Warning!
If you select this option, remaining purchase order encumbrances for the prior year are not liquidated, and cannot be liquidated going forward.
If you select this option, you can perform purchase order rollover in one step using the PO Roll Open Encum process. Purchase order rollover processing can be completed in one step, because budget checking is not required for the prior year's encumbrances before the creation of the distributions for the new budget period.
year encumbrances close)
Click to close the prior year remaining encumbrances for the selected purchase orders. When you click the button, the system displays a N in the PY Encum
Open field in the Budget Year End Details grid. If you used the PY Encum Open button to check selected lines, you can undo the selection using this button.
Click to hold the selected purchase orders from rolling over. Purchase orders eligible to be set to Hold from Rollover should be have a roll status of None or
Pending. After you click the button, the system places the selected purchase orders in a Hold status. The system saves your updates when you click Save.
When purchase orders are in a Hold status they are not qualified for PO Rollover
1 or PO Rollover 2 rollover processing.
212 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8
Using Commitment Control
Click to release the selected purchase orders from Hold status. After you click the button, the system places the select purchase orders in a None status and they will become eligible for future rollover processes. Only purchase orders with a
Hold status are updated when you click Save. When in a None status, and a purchase order has distributions that have previously been rolled, only the distributions that have not been rolled appear for the purchase order details. The lines are available for selection on the PO Rollover page.
Select the purchase orders for the rollover processes and then click the Save button. After you click the Save button the system changes the roll status of those purchase order to Pending.
status of Pending from a specific search ID, the status will not display as Pending when you retrieve the other data sets. You will need to recreate the data sets by re-executing PO_POROLLVW to display any updates to the statuses.
Access the Purchase Order Details page.
More Details Tab
Select the More Details tab.
orders to budget check for finalizing)
Select to access the POs Not Budget Checked page, where you can view details about purchase orders that have not yet reached a budget check status of Valid.
Bringing the budget check status of these purchase orders to Valid enables the associated requisition to be finalized by the PO Rollover1 process.
Rollover error code. Values are:
IPO: Invalid budget status (purchase order).
IVC: Invalid budget status (voucher).
N: No error.
PV: Invalid budget status (purchase order and voucher).
PVR: Invalid budget status. Purchase order and voucher items received.
R: Rolled.
REC: Items received but not vouchered.
VR: Invalid budget status; voucher and items received.
Access the PO Rollover1 page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Budget Year End Processing, Request PO
Rollover1, PO Rollover1).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
213
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
The PO Rollover1 process adjusts amounts and quantities on current distributions to enable the budget processor to liquidate the selected purchase orders. The process then creates new distribution lines with the rolled amounts and quantities. The new distribution lines are held in a staging table until you run the PO
Rollover2 process. It also returns outstanding amounts and quantities to the corresponding requisition and modifies various flags and statuses in the PO_HDR, PO_LINE_DISTRIB, and PO_LINE_DIST_NP tables in preparation for the Commitment Control Budget Processor process.
continue to the PO Rollover2 process.
box is clear on the PO Rollover page.
Select to finalize qualified requisitions associated with the purchase orders selected for processing by the PO Rollover1 process. A requisition qualifies for finalization when all purchase orders containing the requisition key fields have reached a budget check status of Valid.
If this option is selected and a processed requisition does not qualify for finalization, remaining quantities and amounts are returned to the requisition.
Click to access the Run Roll Exception page where you can define report values for the PO Roll Exception report. This report provides a list of purchase orders that are not qualified for the rollover. The system uses the run control ID from the PO Rollover1 page to assign the run control ID for the report.
See Also
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Commitment Control Budget Processor Process in PeopleSoft
Access the PO Rollover2 page.
The PO Rollover2 process breaks the relationship between the rolled purchase order and the prior year's transactions in the commitment control tables and to close all distributions not rolled.
The PO Rollover2 process updates the KK_ROLLED field in the KK_SOURCE_HDR commitment control table to Y for all rolled purchase orders. This update to KK_ROLLED prevents the budget processor from processing and modifying the existing transaction. Instead, the budget processor assigns the purchase order a new transaction ID the next time the rolled purchase order is budget checked. The budget processor bypasses distributions created in prior budget periods.
Once the budget check process is complete, you must run the PO Rollover2 process. The run control page provides the option to complete the rollover process by business unit or by individual purchase orders.
The process closes or cancels the old distribution lines by setting the DISTRIB_LN_STATUS field to C
(completed) or X (canceled). Select X only if the entire amount of the distribution was rolled over. The data held in the staging tables is then inserted into the PO_LINE_DISTRIB and PO_LINE_DIST_NP tables.
214 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
Rollover2 process.
See Also
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Commitment Control Budget Processor Process in PeopleSoft
Access the Roll Open Encum page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Budget Year End Processing, Request PO
Roll Open Encum).
the PO Rollover page.
The PO Roll Open Encum process combines PO Rollover1 and PO Rollover2 processing, along with functionality that keeps rolled remaining encumbrances open in the prior budget year. The process makes changes to the rolled distributions that prevent the budget processor from re-validating and liquidating them in the prior budget year. This functionality enables you to track unexpended amounts by individual purchase orders during a budget period without returning unexpended amounts to the budget.
In one step, the process adjusts amounts and quantities down to what has been vouchered on the distribution and creates new distributions for unvouchered amounts. These actions can be completed in one step, because budget checking rolled distributions in the prior budget year is not required, as the intent of the process is to prevent the liquidation of the remaining encumbrances.
Because budget checking of rolled distributions in the prior budget year is not performed when using this process, finalizing associated requisitions is not an option.
Run the budget processor after the PO Roll Open Encum process to budget check newly created distributions and to create their encumbrances in the new budget period.
Enter the range of budget dates assigned to purchase orders that you want to roll into a new budget date.
Enter the new budget date that you want to assign to purchase orders successfully rolled by the process.
Access the Run Roll Exception page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Budget Year End Processing, Non
Qualified PO Listing).
Use this page to create the PO Rollover Exceptions report. The report displays the non-qualified purchase orders and their associated documents.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
215
Using Commitment Control Chapter 8
To populate the tables that produce the report, you need to run the PO Rollover View process to create a data set on which to run the report. The report is also available as an XML Publisher report.
You can also access the Run Roll Exception page using the PO Rollover View and PO Rollover 1 pages and by using the PO Rollover Workbench.
Select a business unit upon which to base the include the Exception report when you
Select a search ID. A search ID is made up of a data set that you define on the PO
Rollover View page. The system uses the data set to create the PO Rollover
Exceptions report. The report contains the purchase orders that are not qualified for rolling over.
Select to sort the PO Rollover Exceptions report by exception type. Exception types are the kinds of errors that prevent purchase orders from rolling over. The system sorts the report first by purchase order ID and business unit, then by exception type, and finally by purchase order keys. An example of an exception type is when a budget status on the purchase order is not valid.
Select to sort the PO Rollover Exceptions report by purchase order ID. The system first sorts the report by purchase order and business unit, then by purchase order ID, and finally by exception type.
To facilitate ChartField Security functionality, Oracle delivers PeopleSoft Purchasing with components that are already set up for use with ChartField security. You can deactivate the settings, modify the settings, or add security for components. ChartFields are the fields that store charts of accounts and provide the system with the basic structure to segregate and categorize transactional and budget data. PeopleSoft Purchasing enables you to secure specific accounts to prevent unauthorized users from viewing or editing financial information. The ChartField Security feature provides the framework for you to define the ChartField security method and configure and maintain security for specific PeopleSoft Purchasing ChartField fields and records.
You can define the security method based on users, roles, and permission lists.
Customers can assign a group of users, roles, or permission lists to a rule in one page using a default effective date. The rule applies to all products. Customers can assign many rules to a user, role, or permission list in one page. Different rules can be assigned to different products for one user.
Chartfields are secured at the distribution level on the purchase order and requisition entry transactions.
Values for ChartFields on the Purchase Order Defaults page for the purchase order header are not secured.
When you create a transaction, the distribution values may default onto the transaction. When you save the transaction, the ChartField security will validate to ensure that the user can create and maintain documents using those secured ChartField values.
By default, most components in PeopleSoft Purchasing are secured when the product itself is enabled. You can activate or inactivate ChartField security for certain Purchasing components that include transactions, such as data entry for purchase orders and requisitions, search lists, inquiries, and prompts.
216 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Using Commitment Control
The core system for establishing ChartField security is described in the PeopleSoft Application
Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook. Also, the book provides descriptions of the Purchasing components and pages affected by ChartField security.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing ChartFields."
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing ChartFields," Securing
ChartFields for PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
217
This chapter provides an overview of document tolerances and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
Set up document tolerances.
Run document tolerances with budget checking.
Run document tolerances without budget checking.
Review document tolerance exceptions and overrides.
Document tolerance checking compares the balance of all subsequent documents distributions tied to the requisition distribution based on a tolerance tied to a specific ChartField. The fund code ChartField is usually the one used in the document tolerance checking process. For example, a 100 USD requisition distribution has a fund code 100 which has a 10 percent tolerance. If two purchase orders were entered against this requisitions distribution, one for 50 USD and a second for 75 USD, the first purchase order would pass document tolerance checking but the second purchase order would fail. In this case, the total against the requisitions distribution would be 125 USD exceeding the 10 percent tolerance. If you have the proper authorization, you can override the document tolerance checking and continue processing the purchase order.
You can run the Document Tolerance process either with or without enabling commitment control.
If you enable commitment control and document tolerance for the business unit, and you then initiate budget checking, the system runs the Document Tolerance Checking Application Engine process (FS_DOC_TOL) first and then it runs the Comm Cntrl Budget Processor Application Engine process (FS_BP).
If any amounts, quantities, general ledger business units, or ChartFields are modified on a purchase order after the document tolerance is checked, either manually or using the POCREATE or POCHNG processes, the system resets the document tolerance status to Not Chk'd (not checked).
The setup for document tolerances is the same for both PeopleSoft Payables and PeopleSoft Purchasing.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Document Tolerances.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
219
Running Document Tolerances Chapter 9
If you enable commitment control and document tolerance for the business unit, you run document tolerance by initiating the Comm Cntrl Budget Processor Application Engine process (FS_BP) on the Maintain
Purchase Order - Purchase Order page. The system runs the Document Tolerance Checking process and then the Comm Cntrl Budget Processor process.
You can check a purchase order document tolerance status on the Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order page.
This section discusses how to check document tolerances.
Page Name
Maintain Purchase Order -
Purchase Order
Definition Name
PO_LINE
Navigation
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Add/Update POs,
Maintain Purchase Order -
Purchase Order page
Usage
Enter or change purchase order information online.
Access the Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Add/Update POs,
Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order page).
Click the Budget Check button to run the Comm Cntrl Budget Processor process for this purchase order. This button appears only if you have enabled commitment control for PeopleSoft Purchasing and the purchase order has not been subjected to budget checking. This button is not available if you have run the Comm Cntrl Budget Processor process on the purchase order.
If you enable commitment control and document tolerance checking for the business unit and you initiate the budget checking process, the system runs the
Document Tolerance process then the Comm Cntrl Budget Processor process.
batch process using the Budget Check Request page. If you do so and document tolerance checking is enabled for the business unit, you must ensure that the commitment control source transaction definitions for purchase order transactions are defined, so that only purchase orders that have passed document tolerance checking are eligible for budget checking.
220 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Running Document Tolerances
(document tolerance status)
If you enable document tolerance checking, the system displays the document tolerance status. Values are:
Valid: The purchase order has passed document tolerance checking.
Not Chk'd (not checked): The purchase order requires document tolerance checking. If any amounts, quantities, or ChartFields are modified after the document tolerance is checked, the system resets the document tolerance status to
Not Chk'd.
Error: Exceptions are generated for the purchase order during document tolerance checking. You can override document tolerance exceptions on the
Document Tolerance Exceptions - Doc To Exception page.
If you do not enable commitment control but enable document tolerance, you initiate document tolerance checking using the Document Tolerance Request page.
This section lists the page used to run document tolerances without budget checking.
Page Name
Document Tolerance
Definition Name
DOC_TOL_RUN_CNTRL
Navigation
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Verify Document
Tolerance, Document
Tolerance
Usage
Initiate the Document
Tolerance Checking process. The system checks the transaction for document tolerance exceptions.
This section discusses how to:
•
•
View and override document tolerance exceptions.
View document tolerance override history.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
221
Running Document Tolerances Chapter 9
Page Name
Document Tolerance
Exceptions - Doc Tol
Exception
Document Tolerance
Override - Override Log
Definition Name
DOC_TOL_EXCPT
DOC_TOL_OVR_LOG
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Review PO
Information, Document
Tolerance Exceptions, Doc
Tol Exception
View and update document tolerance exceptions.
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Review PO
Information, Doc Tolerance
Override History, Override
Log
View and update document tolerance exceptions.
Access the Document Tolerance Exceptions - Doc Tol Exception page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Review
PO Information, Document Tolerance Exceptions, Doc Tol Exception).
Exceptions
Displays the rule ID and description of the match rule that produced the exception.
Details
(predecessor document amount)
Displays the amount of the predecessor document (purchase order).
liquidated amount)
Displays the sum total of all source documents (purchase orders) linked to the predecessor document. If you have multiple purchase orders tied to the same requisition, the Document Tolerance process calculates the tolerance against the sum total of all of the purchase orders tied to this requisition rather than the amounts of the individual purchase orders. An individual purchase order may be within the tolerance, but if the sum total of the linked purchase orders exceeds the tolerance, the purchase order will not pass document tolerance checking.
The tolerance amount that you defined on the Document Tolerance page.
222 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Running Document Tolerances
Displays the tolerance percent that you defined on the Document Tolerance page.
defined percentage) to calculate the tolerance. If the amount of the source document exceeds the lower defined amount, the purchase order does not pass document tolerance checking and the system generates an exception.
document amount tolerance amount)
Displays the amount of the source document (purchase order), plus any defined tolerance amount.
document tolerance percent amount)
Displays the amount of the source document (purchase order), plus any defined tolerance percentage amount.
Displays the amount of the source document (purchase order).
monetary amount)
converted amount)
Displays the converted amount of the source document (purchase order). The system converts the source document to the predecessor document general ledger business unit base currency to calculate the tolerance.
Displays the predecessor document general ledger business unit base currency.
Displays the currency of the source document (purchase order).
Select to override this exception and make the transaction available for further processing.
Access the Document Tolerance Override - Override Log page (Purchasing, Purchase Orders, Review PO
Information, Doc Tolerance Override History, Override Log).
The fields on this page are the same as the fields on the Document Tolerance Exceptions - Doc Tol Exception page except for User ID and DateTime, which provide an audit trail of exceptions that have been overridden.
Displays the user who overrode this exception on the Document Tolerance
Exceptions - Doc Tol Exception page.
Displays the date and time that the designated user overrode this exception on the
Document Tolerance Exceptions - Doc Tol Exception page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
223
This chapter provides an overview of entry events in PeopleSoft Purchasing and discusses how to:
•
•
•
Set up PeopleSoft Purchasing entry events.
Generate PeopleSoft Purchasing entry events.
Drill down to the general ledger to view entry event journal entries.
Entry events are shorthand codes that are assigned to a transaction's distribution lines and enable you to post accounting entries to the general journal with minimal end-user input. Entry events post standard and supplemental accounting entries to the general ledger. These are based on accounting lines generated during budget checking or document posting.
Entry events are used to satisfy federal accounting requirements. PeopleSoft Purchasing is delivered with a set of entry event codes, and you can define additional entry event codes if necessary.
•
Entry events are enabled using the Installation Options component.
•
•
If you choose not to enable entry events, the Entry Event field does not appear on the pages.
If the use of entry events is optional, any default value set at the business unit level appears but can be overridden.
If the use of entry events is required, the Entry Event field appears, business unit defaulting occurs, and an error appears if the field is left blank when you save the page.
You can override the default value but cannot leave the field blank.
PeopleSoft uses a common function to process entry events for PeopleSoft General Ledger, PeopleSoft
Payables, PeopleSoft Purchasing, PeopleSoft Receivables, and PeopleSoft Billing.
transactions.
The processor is accessed through run control components for requisitions, purchase orders, and receipts.
The event entries that you generate can be viewed using the accounting line entries components. Drillback into the general ledger is provided through EE Journal Entries inquiries.
PeopleSoft Purchasing supports entry events in these areas:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
225
Using Entry Events Chapter 10
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Requisitions
•
If there is a default entry event code for the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit, then this default automatically populates on the header defaults, line defaults, and the distribution line levels. Users can override the business unit default value at any of these levels.
Entry event codes are defined by account codes, and the appropriate account code automatically populates whenever an entry event code is used and no other account code already exists.
Requisition loader
When you run the Requisition Loader process, entry events found in the requisition loader defaults override entry event defaults found at the business unit level or on the Requisition Loader page.
•
Purchase order
•
If you select entry event defaults at the business unit level, they appear by default to the header and distribution levels, where the user can override them.
If the Account field is blank, the default account for that particular entry event appears. If the Account field is not blank, it is not overridden by the account tied to the entry event.
Maintain distribution
Users can also enter an entry event directly on the Maintain Purchase Order - Distributions for Schedule page.
Purchase order express
Entry events function on the Express Purchase Order - Purchase order page in the same manner as on the
Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order and Maintain Purchase Order - Schedules pages.
Procurement cards
Any applicable entry event default value appears on the Procurement Card Limits and Restrictions page, and on the Account Distribution page. This entry event is carried over to PeopleSoft Payables through the
Voucher Stage process.
Receipt accrual
The user has the option of using the default value or overriding it on the Receipt Accrual page. If the user selects override, the entry event specified always overrides any default value.
AutoSelect process
The Auto Select process enables you to source the organization requisitions automatically. The process also passes the entry event from the requisition to the staging area.
Build Inventory Demand process
If the Build Inventory Demand process results in the creation of a purchase order, the entry event is passed to the staging area.
226 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Entry Events
•
PO Calculations and Create Purchase Orders processes
The purchasing system uses the PO Calculation and Create Purchase Orders processes to source requisitions to purchase orders. They also pass the entry event from the requisition to the purchase order.
The Create Purchase Orders process validates the entry event code from the requisition. If that entry event code is not valid for the purchase order, the Create Purchase Orders process overrides the value with the entry event code defined at the business unit level for purchase orders.
The Entry Event Generator process (FS_EVENTGEN) processes entry events for all PeopleSoft products that use entry events, which include PeopleSoft General Ledger, PeopleSoft Payables, PeopleSoft
Purchasing, PeopleSoft Receivables, and PeopleSoft Billing.
PeopleSoft Purchasing users access the process through components specific to requisitions, purchase orders, and receipts. The process uses setup data to create additional accounting transactions in a separate accounting record.
This diagram shows the entry event process flow:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
227
Using Entry Events Chapter 10
228
Entry event process flow
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Entry Events
See Also
Chapter 10, "Using Entry Events," Selecting Entry Event Defaults, page 231
Chapter 28, "Creating Purchase Orders Online," Entering Distribution Information, page 768
Chapter 11, "Managing Procurement Cards," Running the Voucher Load Process, page 302
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Building Inventory Demand Transactions, page 840
Chapter 29, "Using Purchase Order Sourcing," Running the PO Calculations Process, page 844
Chapter 41, "Using Receipt Accrual," page 1189
Chapter 41, "Using Receipt Accrual," Viewing Receipt Accrual Accounting Line Entries, page 1198
Chapter 20, "Using the Requisition Loader," Reviewing and Correcting Purchasing Requisition Loader
Chapter 10, "Using Entry Events," page 225
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Using Requisition Loader Defaults and Overrides
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Enable entry events for PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Select entry event defaults.
Entry event codes are delivered for PeopleSoft Purchasing. In addition, PeopleSoft enables you to define your own entry event codes.
transactions (pre-encumbrances and encumbrances) by selecting transaction rows from the commitment control detail ledger group. To enable this, you must select the commitment detail ledger for the commitment control detail ledger group when you assign commitment control ledger groups to a business unit and a general ledger detail ledger group using the Ledgers for A Unit component.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
229
Using Entry Events
See Also
Chapter 10, "Using Entry Events," page 225
Chapter 10
Page Name
Ledgers for a Unit -
Definition
Ledgers for a Unit -
Commitment Control
Options
Entry Event
Entry Event Defaults
Definition Name
BUSINESS_UNIT_LED1
BUSINESS_UNIT_LED5
INSTALLATION_EE
BUS_UNIT_PM_EE
Navigation
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, General Ledger,
Ledgers For A Unit,
Definition
Usage
Select the general ledger detail ledger group for which you want to enable commitment control.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, General Ledger,
Ledgers For A Unit,
Commitment Control
Options
Enable commitment control for a business unit and general ledger detail ledger group.
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Install, Installation
Options
Click the Entry Event link in the General Options group box.
Select purchasing entry events for purchase orders, requisitions, and procurement cards.
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Business Unit
Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition
Click the Entry Event
Defaults link on the
Purchasing Definition -
Business Unit Definition page.
Select default entry events at the business unit level.
Note. The link does not appear unless entry events are enabled.
Access the Entry Event page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Install, Installation Options, and click the
Entry Event link in the General Options group box).
230 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10
Using Entry Events
•
•
Select the entry event option for PeopleSoft Purchasing. Values are:
•
No EE (no entry event): Entry events cannot be used. Entry event fields will be hidden.
Optional: Entry events can be used but are not required. Entry event fields appear. Default entry event codes appear.
Required: You must use entry events. If the Entry Event field appears on a page, you must select a value or an error appears when you save the page.
Access the Entry Event Defaults page (Setup Financials/Supply Chain, Business Unit Related, Purchasing,
Purchasing Definition , and click the Entry Event Defaults link on the Purchasing Definition - Business Unit
Definition page).
Select from the available options to choose default entry event codes for purchase orders, requisitions, and procurement cards. Before selecting a default, you may need to review the defined codes.
See Also
Chapter 10, "Using Entry Events," Setting Up PeopleSoft Purchasing Entry Events, page 229
This section discusses how to generate PeopleSoft Purchasing entry events.
Purchase Orders, and Receipts.
Page Name
Entry Event Run Request
Definition Name
PST_EE_RUN_REQUEST
•
•
Navigation
•
Purchasing,
Requisitions, Entry
Event Request
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Entry Event
Request
Purchasing, Receipts,
Entry Event Request
Usage
Run the Entry Event
Generator Application
Engine process
(FS_EVENTGEN).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
231
Using Entry Events Chapter 10
Access the Entry Event Request page (Purchasing, Requisitions, Entry Event Request).
Process Request Parameters
Enter an identifier for the request.
Enter a description of the request.
Select the process for which you want to generate entries. This field is required.
The entry event generator determines whether each selected document is eligible for the process, based on the entry event code assigned to the document.
Values are:
PO Purchase Order (PO Purchase Order posting)
Requisition Posting
Receipt Accrual
Select the process options based on the entry event process that you selected.
Values are:
All Units: All business units.
Document: A document that you select in the Selection Criteria group box.
Unit: A business unit you select in the Selection Criteria group box.
Selection Criteria
You can use these fields to limit the process to one business unit or one document. The documents available for the Document field depend on the selection in the Entry Event Process field.
This section lists the pages used to drill down to the general ledger system to view entry event journal entries.
232 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Entry Events
Page Name
PO Purchase Order
Drillback (purchase order purchase order drillback)
Definition Name
EE_PO_DRILL
PO Requisition Drillback
EE_REQ_DRILL
PO Receipt Accrual
Drillback
EE_RCV_DRILL
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Purchase
Orders, Review PO
Information, EE Journal
Entries, PO Purchase Order
Drillback
Drill down to the general ledger and view entry event journals for the purchase orders.
Purchasing, Requisitions,
Review Requisition
Information, EE Journal
Entries, PO Requisition
Drillback
Drill down to the general ledger and view entry event journals for the requisitions.
Purchasing, Receipts,
Review Receipt
Information, Entry Event
Journal Drill Down, PO
Receipt Accrual Drillback
Drill down to the general ledger and view entry event journals for the receipts.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
233
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
235
This chapter provides an overview of the procurement card business process and discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set up procurement card installation options.
Establish procurement card security.
Define cardholder profile.
Define card issuers.
Define preferred vendors.
Define preferred unit of measure (UOM).
Define merchant category code (MCC) blocked.
Define Visa transaction type codes.
Define procurement card mapping.
Set up procurement card load statement options.
Stage procurement card statements using PeopleSoft Integration Broker.
Stage procurement card statements in a flat file format.
Using the credit card data enterprise integration point (EIP).
Using the Procurement Card Load EIP.
Stage standard delivered bank format statements.
Handle statement staging errors.
Load procurement card statements to application tables.
Run the Bank Statement Workflow Application Engine process (PO_CCSTMT_WF).
Reconcile procurement card transactions manually.
Run the Grace Period Expired Application Engine process (PO_CCEXP_WF).
Resolve disputed transactions.
View the statement summary.
Stage procurement card transactions for voucher processing.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
237
Managing Procurement Cards
•
Analyze procurement card information.
Chapter 11
The procurement card feature supports credit card purchases made by card holding employees in your organization and enables you to reduce the number of small purchases that go through your procurement department. You must have PeopleSoft Payables installed to implement the procurement card feature in
PeopleSoft Purchasing.
This diagram illustrates the basic flow of the procurement card business process from staging the electronic procurement card statement to the application tables through to the voucher staging table.
238 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Procurement card business process flow
Select this check box if you want to show the full credit card number on the page or report. This check box appears cleared by default. This check box will only appear on a page if you are associated with a role that has Unmask Card Number rights for procurement cards.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
239
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Select the card issuer. In most cases, this is the name of the bank that issues the card.
Enter the procurement card account number. After you enter the full card number the system will encrypt the card number and display the masked card number in this field. For example, if you enter 6755-8867-6666-6755, the system will display ************6755 as the masked card number. The number of digits that are visible for the card number is based on the Number of Digits to Display field setting you specify on the Installation Options - Purchasing page.
To modify the encrypted card number, you can enter a full card number again or modify just the visible digits.
For more information about PeopleSoft encryption technology see "Encrypting
Text With PSCipher" and "Securing Data with PeopleSoft Encryption
Technology" in the Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Security
Administration.
Plus, you can perform a partial search on the card number field. The maximum number of digits that you can perform a partial search against is based on the
Number of Digits to Display field setting as well. For example, if the number of digits to display is 4, and you enter 1234 in the card number field, the system will use %1234 to search for the corresponding card numbers. The system compares against the right most digits. If you enter 12345 the system won't be able to find any corresponding card number matches.
If there are multiple cards with the same suffix and they are owned by the same employee, then the employee ID and name will appear in the header of the page.
However, if they are owned by different employees, then employee ID and name will not appear.
Amount and associated currency billed for the statement line.
Location to which payment for the selected lines is to be distributed.
Source of the purchased goods or services.
quantity)
Displays the purchase order quantity of each item purchased for this statement line. If there's no purchase order associated with the statement or the quantity is unknown, the purchase order quantity automatically changes to 1.
Displays the date when each statement line has been processed and posted by the card issuer.
A PeopleSoft user who has access rights to procurement card transactions.
Unique number captured by the merchant at the point of sale to help identify the transaction.
A procurement card role carries a unique set of access rights.
240 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Select the role name that you want to filter the report by. The roles available for selection, are those roles that belong to the current user that also have cards assigned to them. It does not include those roles that have no cards assigned to them.
Address to which the goods that you purchased were shipped. Used to identify applicable taxes if you decide to have the system calculate the sales or use tax for the statement.
Statement line status. Values are:
Staged: Statement from the bank is loaded into the staging tables by the Load
ProCard Stage process.
Initial: Statement has been staged in the statement table and the cardholders have been notified through the Bank Statement Workflow process. After each notice has been successfully sent to a cardholder, the system updates its status to Initial if it was Staged.
Verified: Statement is waiting to be reviewed. After verification, the statement line status changes to Approved. Currently, the verified status does not have any significant meaning by itself. However, it can be used in an environment where tighter control is required. The cardholder can only set the status to Verified and another person has to approve it and set the status to Approved.
Approved: Statement is ready to be picked up by the voucher process. Only those statement lines that are approved are pushed to the voucher staging tables.
Closed: Statement has been pushed to the voucher staging table.
Not Closed: Any transactions that are not in the voucher staging table.
Error: Procurement card transaction that failed voucher edit.
A set of tax authorities that comprises all taxes that apply within a particular geographical location. In this US, tax codes are state, country, city, and other special jurisdictions. This field is informational on the procurement card transaction.
Amount of the purchase and the source amount (in its local currency) charged by the vendor. The amount and currency may be different than the billing amount and currency that the cardholder is liable to pay.
date)
Date when the goods were purchased.
A tax on the estimated market value added to a product or material at each stage of its manufacture or distribution.
cycle pass into the invoice and VAT reporting structures.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
241
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
See Also
Chapter 11, "Managing Procurement Cards," Establishing Procurement Card Security, page 242
Chapter 11, "Managing Procurement Cards," Setting Up Procurement Card Installation Options, page 242
This section lists the page used to set up your procurement card installation options.
installation options. These options determine procurement card controls that are used throughout the procurement card life cycle.
Page Name
Installation Options -
Purchasing
Definition Name
INSTALLATION_PO
Navigation
Set Up Financials/Supply
Chain, Install, Installation
Options, Purchasing
Usage
Define general purchasing controls, such as autonumbering parameters, maximum quantities for quantity price breaks, and the maximum number of rows that are to appear in scroll areas; define requisition loader parameters, such as maximum lines loaded; and define procurement card controls, such as the number of digits that are to appear for a procurement card.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications," Defining Purchasing Installation Options
This section provides an overview of procurement card security and discusses how to:
•
Assign users to procurement card roles.
242 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
•
•
•
•
•
Register procurement card roles.
Assign access rights to procurement card roles.
Assign proxy roles for different procurement cards.
Set up universal SpeedCharts.
Assign universal SpeedCharts to multiple procurement cards.
Managing Procurement Cards
The procurement card functionality enables your organization to define user roles and user-role access throughout the procurement card process. With increased role security, you can control the level of information that is accessed by users, manage the assignments of different procurement cards, and setup proxies and default accounting distributions. PeopleSoft delivers six procurement card roles and several predefined access rights with the system, so that you can establish your organizational role and role access parameters easily.
You do not need to use the predefined procurement card roles that PeopleSoft Purchasing provides. You can establish your own roles that match your environment. PeopleSoft Purchasing delivers these predefined roles so that you can quickly begin using the procurement card functionality.
For backward compatibility during upgrade, the system converts your existing proxies and assigns them to the procurement card administrator role. You can view this system conversion using the Assign Proxies page in
PeopleSoft Purchasing. In addition, to complete the proxy assignment you must manually assign each proxy
(PeopleSoft user) using PeopleTools security functionality to the procurement card administrator role
(CC_ADMINISTRATOR). This is done using the User Profiles - Role page.
See Chapter 11, "Managing Procurement Cards," Assigning Users to Procurement Card Roles, page 245.
PeopleSoft Predefined User Roles
PeopleSoft delivers the following predefined user roles with the system: Administrator, Approver,
Reconciler, Reviewer, PO User (purchase order user), and Req User (requisition user).
Page Name
User Profiles - Roles
Definition Name
USER_GENERAL
Navigation Usage
PeopleTools, Security, User
Profiles, User Profiles, User
Profiles - Roles
Assign users to procurement card roles.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
243
Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name Definition Name
Register Procurement Card
Roles
CC_ROLE
Procurement Card Access
Rights
Assign Proxies
CC_RIGHTS1
Select Procurement Cards CC_PROXY_BY_USER1
Assign Proxies CC_PROXY_COPY
Copy/Move Exceptions
CC_PROXY_BY_USER2
SpeedChart
Assign SpeedCharts
CC_PROXY_BY_USER
SPEEDCHART
CC_ASSIGN_SPEEDCH
Chapter 11
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Security, Register
Roles, Register
Procurement Card Roles
Usage
Identify roles for the procurement card module.
You can create your own
PeopleSoft roles for the procurement card module.
After registering them here on this page, they can be used in the procurement card module.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Security, Assign
Access Rights, Procurement
Card Access Rights
Assign individual access rights for each procurement card role.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Security, Assign
Proxies
Each PeopleSoft user who is a member of a procurement card role can be assigned to multiple cards with different roles.
Click the Select
Procurement Cards link on the Assign Proxies page or the Assign SpeedCharts page.
Search and assign additional procurement cards to the proxy user.
Click the Copy to or Move to buttons on the Assign
Proxies page
(CC_PROXY_BY_USER).
Select the user you want to copy to or move to the proxy role. This user will acquire the proxy role for the procurement cards selected in the Assign
Proxies page.
Click the OK button on the
Assign Proxies page
(CC_PROXY_COPY).
Review and override copy or move exceptions from one proxy user to another.
Define SpeedCharts.
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Management, SpeedChart
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Security, Assign
SpeedCharts
Assign SpeedCharts for each procurement card.
244 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Assign Proxies
Definition Name
CC_CARD _DATA4
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Definitions,
Cardholder Profile,
Cardholder Profile - Card
Data
Click the Proxies link on the
Cardholder Profile - Card
Data page.
Assign users (proxies) and the role associated with the selected cardholder.
See Also
"Securing Data with PeopleSoft Encryption Technology" and "Encrypting Text With PSCipher," Enterprise
PeopleTools PeopleBook: Security Administration
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications," Defining Purchasing Installation Options
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing Your System," Understanding
PeopleSoft Application Security
Access the User Profiles - Role page (PeopleTools, Security, User Profiles, User Profiles, User Profiles -
Roles).
See Also
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Security Administration
Access the Register Procurement Card Roles page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Security, Register Roles,
Register Procurement Card Roles).
When you register user roles, the system links those roles to the procurement card module.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing Your System," Understanding
PeopleSoft Application Security
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
245
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Access the Procurement Card Access Rights page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Security, Assign Access
Rights, Procurement Card Access Rights).
246
Procurement Card Access Rights page
Use this page to link access rights to procurement card roles. Access rights determine how users access different components in the procurement card module.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to review the statement only. With this right, this role has no authority to modify the statement.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to run procurement card reports.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to change the status of the statement to 0 - Staged.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to change the status of the statement to 2 - Verified.
page, the statement can no longer be modified.
Users cannot change the status of any transaction that is already set to Verified,
Approved, or Closed. For transactions that need to be reverified, users with approval rights must set their status to Staged.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to change the status of the statement to 3 - Approved.
page, the statement can no longer be modified.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to update the distribution by selecting one of the predefined SpeedCharts that are assigned to this card.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to update the distribution by selecting one of the predefined SpeedCharts that are assigned to this card or by entering the ChartField information manually.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to modify transactions that are not verified or approved.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to modify transactions that are not approved.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to modify transactions that are approved.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to resolve transactions that failed the voucher edit.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to view the full credit card number.
Plus, with this right, you have the option of printing the full credit card number on any of the procurement card reports or displaying it on any of the procurement card inquiry pages.
Assign Proxies, Assign SpeedCharts, and Cardholder Profile.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to modify any information on the Card Data page in the Cardholder Profile component.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
247
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to add, change, or delete proxy assignments in the Cardholder Profile component.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to add, change, or delete accounting distribution assignments in the Cardholder Profile component.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to assign a procurement card as a payment method when creating a requisition.
procurement card on purchase order)
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to assign a procurement card as a payment method when creating a purchase order.
Select this check box to give this role
— users
— the access rights to override a vendor card that was previously entered for a purchase order. The vendor card appears by default from the vendor profile and this role has the rights to override that value if the vendor is also set to allow override.
Access the Assign Proxies page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Security, Assign Proxies).
248 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Assign Proxies page
Select this check box if you would like this procurement card to appear as the default when defining the requestor on the Requestor Setup page. The selection you make here also appears on the Requestor Setup page. Establishing it here accomplishes the same thing as establishing it on the Requestor Setup page.
The selection you make here will also appear on the Cardholder Profile - Card
Data: Assign Proxies page.
requester using the Requester Setup page.
Select this check box if you would like this procurement card to appear as the default when defining the buyer on the Buyer Setup page. The selection you make here also appears on the Buyer Setup page. Establishing it here accomplishes the same thing as establishing it on the Buyer Setup page.
The selection you make here will also appear on the Cardholder Profile - Card
Data: Assign Proxies page.
using the Buyer Setup page.
Click this button to apply the same role to multiple procurement cards for the proxy user.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
249
Managing Procurement Cards
Chapter 11
Click this button to remove selected cards from the current proxy user. This proxy user can no longer access transactions for those cards.
Click this button to copy access rights to another user.
Click this button to transfer access rights to another user.
When you move access rights to another user, the system copies the procurement card list from the current user to the target user and removes the cards from the original user list.
different roles are identified as exceptions. You can override exceptions on the
Exceptions page.
Access the SpeedChart page (Setup Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Procurement Options,
Management, SpeedChart).
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining SpeedCharts
Access the Assign SpeedCharts page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Security, Assign SpeedCharts).
250 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Assign SpeedCharts page
Click the associated link to view the details of SpeedCharts within a given setID.
When you click this link the SpeedChart Detail page appears.
Select this link to assign additional procurement cards to the SpeedChart. When you click this link the Select Procurement Cards page appears.
business units that are tied to the same setID.
To define cardholder profiles, use the Cardholder Profile component (CC_EE_PROFILE).
•
•
•
•
This section provides an overview of the Personal Employee Enterprise Integration Point (EIP) and discusses how to:
View cardholder personal data.
Define cardholder card data.
Define vendor card vendors.
Define proxies.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
251
Managing Procurement Cards
•
•
Define default account distributions.
Restrict cardholder purchases by commodity code.
Chapter 11
The employee accessible in this setup may be a result of an interface with PeopleSoft Human Resources or another external human resources package. The external interface is created by using the personal employee
EIP. The interface within PeopleSoft is accomplished using the Load Employee Data page.
You can also receive employee procurement card data from PeopleSoft Human Resources. These EIPs enable
PeopleSoft Expenses and PeopleSoft Purchasing to send and receive basic cardholder data to and from
PeopleSoft Human Resources. When one application changes a record, an EIP automatically updates and synchronizes tables in the other applications.
This table lists service operations that contain code used to send and receive information between the databases:
Service Operation
CORPORATE_CARD_DATA_FU
LLSYNC
Records
CC_CARD_DATA_EX
Description
Full data load of employee corporate card account data.
CORPORATE_CARD_DATA_SY
NC
CC_CARD_DATA_EX
CORPORATE_CARD_FULLSYN
C
CC_CARD_TBL_EX
CORPORATE_CARD_SYNC CC_CARD_TBL_EX
Incremental update of corporate card account data.
Full data load of corporate card vendors.
Incremental update of corporate card vendors.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Expenses 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating With Other PeopleSoft Products"
252 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Personal Data
Definition Name
CC_PERSONAL_DATA
Card Data
Vendors
Assign Proxies
Default Accounting
Distribution
SpeedChart Detail
Restricted Purchase
Cardholder Information
CC_CARD_DATA
CC_CARD_DATA5
CC_CARD_DATA4
CC_CARD_DATA2
CC_SPEEDCH_DTL
CC_CARD_DATA3
RUN_POY8000
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Definitions,
Cardholder Profile, Personal
Data
View cardholder information, such as personnel status and home address. This is a displayonly page and is shared by
PeopleSoft Expenses and
PeopleSoft Purchasing.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Definitions,
Cardholder Profile, Card
Data
Enter card issuer, card number, and set the transaction limits for that card.
Click the Vendors link on the Card Data page.
Define vendors and the card options for these vendors.
Click the Proxies link on the
Card Data page.
Define who can access this procurement card and identify the rights that they have.
Click the Default Distrib
(default distribution) link on the Card Data page.
Enter accounting distribution defaults for single-line distribution or assign SpeedCharts for multiline distributions.
Click the Show SpeedChart link on the Default
Accounting Distribution page.
View the details of the
SpeedChart.
Click the Commodity Codes link on the Card Data page.
Set restrictions on the card by limiting the amount that the cardholder can spend on a specific commodity.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Cardholder
Information
Run the Cardholder
Information multiprocess job (POY8000). This process will generate the
Cardholder Information
Crystal report (POY8000).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
253
Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Purchase Exceptions
Definition Name
RUN_POY8010
MCC Exceptions (merchant category code exceptions)
RUN_POY8064
Chapter 11
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Purchase
Exceptions
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, MCC
Exceptions
Usage
Run one of these multiprocess jobs: Exceed
Limit-Per-Trans (POY8010) which will generate the
Exceed Limit-Per-Trans
Crystal report (POY8010),
Exceed Limit-Per-Cycle
(POY8011) which will generate the Exceed Limit-
Per-Cycle Crystal report
(POY8011), Exceed Trans-
Per-Day (POY8012) which will generate the Exceed
Trans-Per-Day Crystal report (POY8012), Exceed
Trans-Per-Cycle
(POY8013) which will generate the Exceed Trans-
Per-CycleCrystal report
(POY8013), or
Unauthorized Commodity
(POY8014) which will generate the Unauthorized
Commodity Crystal report
(POY8014).
Run the MCC Exceptions multiprocess job
(POY8064). This process will generate the MCC
Exceptions Crystal report
(POY8064).
Access the Personal Data page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Definitions, Cardholder Profile, Personal
Data).
Displays the cardholder personnel status, such as employee, consultant, contractor, or any other designation that your organization uses. Appears by default from human resources and cannot be changed.
254 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Displays the cardholder home telephone number.
Managing Procurement Cards
Access the Card Data page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Definitions, Cardholder Profile, Card Data).
Card Data
Select the Card Data tab.
Select the procurement card issuer.
Select the card type for this procurement card.
Additional Information
Select the Additional Information tab.
Select this check box if this card is a vendor card. Once you select this check box the Vendors link becomes available.
Click this link to access the Vendors page. Use this page to assign the vendor and card options for this vendor card.
This will simultaneously update the vendor location with the same data (like requestor in assign proxies). This relationship can be maintained in either place.
Credit Limits
Select the Credit Limits tab.
(Optional) Enter the maximum credit limit for the credit card.
(Optional) Enter the maximum amount that a cardholder can spend every month.
(Optional) Enter the maximum amount that a cardholder can spend for each transaction.
Select the currency for the credit limit fields.
Transaction Limits
Select the Transaction Limits tab.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
255
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Enter the number of transactions that a cardholder can perform in a month.
Enter the number of transactions that a cardholder can perform in a day.
Access the Vendors page (click the Vendors link on the Card Data page).
Select this check box if you want this vendor card to appear as the payment method for this vendor and location on a purchase order. If selected this vendor card will appear by default on the purchase order.
Select this check box if this vendor card for this vendor and location can be overridden on a purchase order.
•
•
•
•
•
Select the dispatch option for this vendor location. Options are:
•
Charge to Card on File: Select this option to have "Charge to credit card" print in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print SQR report (POPO005).
Contact Buyer: Select this option to have the buyer's name and phone number print in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print report. For example,
"*Please contact John Smith 925-694-3863 for payment information."
Contact Cardholder: Select this option to have the card holder's name and phone number print in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print report. For example, "*Please contact John Smith 925-694-3863 for payment information."
Default: Select this option to use the dispatch option on the purchase order.
Include Masked Card Info (include masked card information): Select this option to have the masked card number, card type, and expiration date appear in the header portion of the PO Dispatch/Print report.
No Reference: Select this option to have no procurement card information print on the PO Dispatch/Print report.
The system will also update the fields on the Cardholder Profile and Assign
Proxies pages with the selection you make here.
Access the Assign Proxies page (click the Proxies link on the Card Data page).
256 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Managing Procurement Cards
Select the user authorized to reconcile procurement card statements for the selected card. Creating a user ID enables you to have a centralized reconciliation team that has the authority to review and edit an individual cardholder's statement. Individual cardholders cannot reconcile their own statements unless they have been set up as their own proxy.
Select an appropriate role for the designated proxy. Each role carries a set of access rights.
This check box setting appears by default from the Assign Proxies page when defining the security for the proxy. If this check box is selected, this is the procurement card that will appear as the default when defining the requestor on the Requestor Setup page.
If you make any changes to this check box, the setting will automatically be reflected in the Assign Proxies page when defining the security for the proxy and automatically be reflected in the Requestor Setup page.
This check box setting appears by default from the Assign Proxies page when defining the security for the proxy. If this check box is selected, this is the procurement card that will appear as the default when defining the buyer on the
Buyer Setup page.
If you make any changes to this check box, the setting will automatically be reflected in the Assign Proxies page when defining the security for the proxy and automatically be reflected in the Buyer Setup page.
Access the Default Accounting Distribution page (click the Default Distrib (default distribution) link on the
Card Data page).
Distribution Choices
Select this option to assign a single account distribution for the procurement card transactions. This option is selected when the page appears.
box.
Select this option to assign multi-line distributions for the procurement card transactions.
enabled.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
257
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Use Multi-Line Distribution
Select SpeedCharts that can be used for this card when reconciling the statement.
Each SpeedChart can carry one or multiple distribution lines. Select a default
SpeedChart that is used in the ProCard Load Statement process to create default accounting distribution lines.
loading statement data.
Access the Restricted Purchase page (click the Commodity Codes link on the Card Data page).
Select the commodity for which you want to set a cardholder purchasing restriction. Only commodity codes defined for the setID associated with the default business unit that you selected on the Card Data page are available.
Enter the maximum amount that the cardholder can spend on the commodity.
per transaction)
Enter the maximum amount that the cardholder can spend per transaction on the commodity.
To define card issuers, use the ProCard Card Issuers component (CC_CARD_TBL).
This section discusses how to define procurement card issuers.
Page Name
Card Issuer
Definition Name
CC_CARD_TBL
VAT Defaults Setup
VAT_DEFAULTS_DTL
Navigation
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard Card
Issuers, Card Issuer
Usage
Enter details about the procurement card providers and link these details to a vendor ID.
Click the VAT Defaults link on the Card Issuer page.
View VAT defaults.
258 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Page Name
Card Issuer - Setup
Prepayment ChartFields
Definition Name
CC_CARD_TBL_CF
Managing Procurement Cards
Navigation Usage
Click the Setup Prepayment
ChartFields link on the Card
Issuer page.
Define prepayment voucher
ChartFields.
Access the Card Issuer page (Setup Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard Card Issuers, Card Issuer).
Card Issuer page (1 of 2)
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
259
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
260
Card Issuer page (2 of 2)
Credit Card Provider Record
(PeopleSoft Payables business unit)
Select the PeopleSoft Payables business unit that will be used for the prepayment voucher and for staging reconciled transactions.
Select this check box if you want to load itemized data for the procurement card transactions associated with this card issuer. Examples of level three data is additional information related to a transaction such as, car rental, lodging, and passenger itinerary information.
Select this check box to indicate that the procurement card provider record includes sales tax, if applicable.
Select this check box to indicate that the procurement card provider record includes value-added taxes, if applicable.
added tax default)
Click this link to access the VAT Defaults Setup page, where you can set VAT tolerances to check the difference between the calculated VAT amount and the amount entered on the bank statement.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Working with VAT."
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Prepayment Voucher Default
Select this check box if you want to create a prepayment voucher for the procurement card statement amount.
•
Select the prepayment voucher option. Values are:
•
Auto Apply: Select this option to have the system use the accounting entry template for the debit side of the transaction. If you select this option you can not select the prepayment voucher ChartFields on the Card Issuer - Setup
Prepayment ChartFields page.
Specify: Select this option if you want to specify the ChartFields to be used for the prepayment voucher. This option also creates a reference ID so that only transactions from the same statement as the prepayment will be drawn down for that prepayment.
Once you select a prepayment voucher option the Setup Prepayment ChartFields link becomes available.
Select the payment terms for the prepayment voucher.
Click this link to access the Card Issuer - Setup Prepayment ChartFields page.
Use this page to define prepayment ChartFields.
Expenses Level 3 Options
This group box enables you determine how many days you would like to delay importing hotel transactions into the system. This enables level 3 data to be available if it comes in a separate file.
Select to indicate that you want to load level 3 data for expenses. If you select the check box, the system loads level 3 data. If the check box is deselected, the system does not load level 3 data for expenses. The default value is deselected.
Enter the number of days that determine how long to wait to load hotel information. This allows time for the summary or detail data to be imported if it is sent in a separate file from the main transaction. All other transactions will flow through, but the hotel transactions will be moved into a staging table and will not be available until the appropriate number of days have passed. Delay days will have a default value of zero (blank).
Credit Card Import Hierarchy
Use this group box to determine what type of data to import.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
261
Managing Procurement Cards
Chapter 11
Select to have the system check for detail data. If detail data exists, the system imports the data as well as the main transaction. If there is no detail data, the system checks for summary data, and if it finds that data imports it as well as the main transaction. If neither types of data are available, the system imports only the main transaction. All is the default value for the group box.
Select to have the system attempt to import the detail data. If detail data is not available, the system only imports the main transaction. The system does not check for summary data. If the detail data amount is not available or the total does not match, the system only imports the main transaction data.
Select to have the system attempt to import summary data. If summary data is not available, the system only imports the main transaction.
Statement as Approved VAT Receipt
If the card issuer is an approved provider for claiming tax credit from procurement card statements, select the name of the country that uses credit card statements in lieu of actual receipts for VAT reporting.
When the country is listed, the ProCard Load Statement Application Engine process (PO_CCLOADLD) sets the Claiming Tax Credit field to Yes, indicating that the electronic statement can be used as evidence of VAT for claiming VAT recovery. When this is the case, no additional receipt documentation is required for VAT reporting purposes. The system performs appropriate calculations of
VAT rebate and recovery for these lines.
When the country does not allow electronic versions of the procurement card statement to serve as evidence of VAT recovery, the user has the option to indicate whether a VAT receipt exists on the Reconcile Statement - Procurement
Card component.
To define preferred vendors, use the Preferred Vendors component (CC_VNDR_XREF).
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Define preferred vendors.
Maintain a list of preferred vendors.
262 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
List of Merchants
Definition Name
CC_VNDR_NM
Vendor Search
Preferred Vendors
Non-Preferred Supplier
VENDOR_LOOKUP_SEC
CC_VNDR_XREF
RUN_POY8061
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Definition, Preferred
Vendors
Use the fields on the
Preferred Vendors page and click Search to display a particular vendor, or leave the fields blank and click
Search to display all vendors.
Displays a merchant or list of merchants with whom the cardholders have made purchases. To qualify as a preferred vendor, a merchant has to be mapped to a vendor set up in the system. After you enter and save the required information, the data is moved to the preferred vendor list.
Click the Vendor Lookup link on the List of
Merchants page.
Search for vendors.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Definitions,
Preferred Vendors
On the Preferred Vendors page, search for a vendor or vendors.
Maintain or change the relationship between a merchant and a preferred vendor. The preferred vendors are those from whom you want the cardholders to purchase.
On the List of Merchants page, select the Preferred
Vendors tab.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Non-
Preferred Supplier
Run the Non-Preferred
Supplier multiprocess job
(POY8061). This process will generate the Non-
Preferred Supplier Crystal report (POY8061).
Access the List of Merchants page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Definition, Preferred Vendor, List of
Merchants).
Displays the merchant names that come from each line on the bank statement.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
263
Managing Procurement Cards
Select the vendor setID for the vendor that you want to associate with the merchant.
Select the vendor that you want to associate with the merchant.
Select the vendor location.
Chapter 11
Access the Preferred Vendors page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Definitions, Preferred Vendor, Preferred
Vendors).
Use the fields on this page to edit the preferred vendors that you defined on the List of Merchants page.
To define preferred UOM, use the UOM Mappings component (CC_UOM_XREF).
This section discusses how to:
•
•
Define preferred UOM.
Maintain preferred UOM.
Page Name Definition Name
List of Merchant UOM (list of merchant unit of measure)
CC_UOM_NM
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Definitions, UOM
Mappings, List of Merchant
UOM
Some vendors are capable of entering level three data
(line item information); therefore, UOM may show up for some statement lines.
Displays a list of UOM that comes from the bank statement. Once the corresponding UOM is entered, data is moved to the preferred UOM when you save this page.
264 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Page Name
Preferred UOM
Definition Name
CC_UOM_XREF
Managing Procurement Cards
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Definitions, UOM
Mappings, Preferred UOM
Usage
Maintain the translation between the merchant UOM and system UOM (stored in
UNITS_TBL). The statement load process is based on the information that you entered here to convert the UOM.
Access the List of Merchant UOM page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Definitions, UOM Mappings, List of Merchant UOM).
Displays the UOM used by the merchant.
Displays the UOM mapped to the merchant UOM.
Access the Preferred UOM page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Definitions, UOM Mappings, Preferred
UOM).
Use the fields on this page to edit the preferred UOM that you defined on the List of Merchant UOM page.
To define blocked MCC's, use the ProCard Blocked MCCs component (CC_MCC_BLOCKED).
This section lists the pages used to define MCC blocked.
within the blocked category code. This information is used for reporting purposes only within PeopleSoft.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
265
Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Blocked MCC (blocked merchant category code)
Definition Name
CC_MCC_BLOCKED
Merchant Category Group EX_VIS_MCG_MAP
Chapter 11
Navigation
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard
Blocked MCCs, Blocked
MCC
Usage
Blocks purchases made within the specified MCC.
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Expenses, Mapping,
Merchant Category Group
Map MCCs to merchant category groups.
To define Visa transaction type codes, use the Visa ProCard Transaction Codes component
(CC_VISA_TTYPE).
This section lists the page used to set up Visa transaction type codes.
Page Name
Visa Transaction Codes
Definition Name
CC_VISA_TTYPE
Navigation
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard Visa
Transaction Codes, Visa
Transaction Codes
Usage
Enter a code provided by
VISA to indicate debit or credit transactions.
To define procurement card XML maps, use the ProCard MasterCard XML Map component
(CC_MC_XML_MAP).
This section list the pages used for procurement card mapping.
266 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Country Code
Currency Code
MasterCard XML Map
Definition Name
EX_COUNTRY_MAP_PNL
EX_CURRNCY_MAP_PNL
CC_MC_XL_MAP
Navigation
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard
Country Map, Country
Code
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard
Currency Map, Currency
Code
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard
MasterCard XML Map,
MasterCard XML Map
Usage
Map the incoming countries associated with transactions to PeopleSoft countries.
Map the incoming currencies associated with transactions to PeopleSoft currencies.
Define the MasterCard
XML mapping to the
PeopleSoft mapping.
To setup procurement card load statement options, use the ProCard Load Statement Options component
(CC_RECON_OPT).
This section discusses how to define load statement options.
Page Name
Load Statement Options
Definition Name
CC_RECON_OPT
Navigation
Setup Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Procurement Options,
Purchasing, ProCard Load
Statement Options, Load
Statement Options
Usage
Set criteria for handling transactions with small amounts and for enabling the system to match and populate purchase order data.
Access the Load Statement Options page (Setup Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Procurement
Options, Purchasing, ProCard Load Statement Options, Load Statement Options).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
267
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Load Statement Options page (1 of 2)
268
Load Statement Options page (2 of 2)
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Small Amount Criteria
Select a small amount criteria status. Values are: Verified,Approved, or the field is blank. If it is blank, the default status is Staged. For tighter control, you can set the status to either blank or Verified. The statement line must be approved before you send it to PeopleSoft Payables.
Enter an amount for the small amount criteria. Indicates the upper limit of the criterion.
Select a currency for the small amount criteria.
ProCard Auto-Recon Options
(allow system to match and populate purchase order data)
Select this check box to request that the system automatically match the transaction data with the existing purchase order information to populate purchase order data.
Criteria to Find Matching Purchase Orders
Select this check box to match the transactions with the purchase order header.
The system attempts to match the entire purchase order information.
Select this check box to match the transactions with the purchase order line.
Select this check box to match the transactions with the purchase order line schedule.
Select a date for the purchase order header, line, or schedule. To match by schedule, values are: PO Date and Ship Date.
Transactions Charged to a Vendor Card
Select a status when the purchase order amount is not the same as the amount on the statement but is within the tolerance percentages and when the purchase order amount equals the transaction amount. Values are: Verified,Approved, or the field is blank. If it is blank, the default status is Staged.
Enter a percentage for the upper limit that exceeds the matching amount.
over)
under)
Enter a percentage for the lower limit that falls short of the matching amount.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
269
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Transactions with a Valid PO ID (transactions with a valid purchase order ID)
Select a status when the purchase order amount is not the same as the amount on the statement but is within the tolerance percentages and when the purchase order amount equals the transaction amount. Values are: Verified,Approved, or the field is blank. If it is blank, the default status is Staged.
Enter a percentage for the upper limit that exceeds the matching amount.
over)
under)
Enter a percentage for the lower limit that falls short of the matching amount.
Transactions without a Valid PO ID
Select a status when the purchase order amount is not the same as the amount on the statement but is within the tolerance percentages and when the purchase order amount equals the transaction amount. Values are: Verified,Approved, or the field is blank. If it is blank, the default status is Staged.
Enter a percentage for the upper limit that exceeds the matching amount.
over)
under)
Enter a percentage for the lower limit that falls short of the matching amount.
PO Statuses to Include
Select the purchase order statuses to be included for the transactions. You can select Dispatched.Approved, or both. The system only considers those purchase orders that include purchase order statuses. The default selects both Dispatched and Approved.
You can load procurement card statements in XML format to your CC_TRANS_EC staging tables using
PeopleSoft Integration Broker. If your inbound statement file complies with neither VISA Commercial
Format, MasterCard Custom Data File, nor US Bank data layouts, you can use this approach to load your statement file.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Supply Chain Management Integration 9.1 PeopleBook, "Understanding PeopleSoft
Supply Chain Management Enterprise Integration Points"
Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: Integration Broker
270 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
You can load procurement card statements in flat-file format to your CC_TRANS_EC staging tables. If your inbound statement file complies with neither VISA Commercial Format, MasterCard Custom Data File, nor
US Bank data layouts, you can use this approach to load your statement file.
To receive the flat-file statement into your system, you must first define an inbound file rule. This rule enables you to use the Inbound File Publish process to load data into your CC_TRANS_EC staging tables.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Electronic Data Interchange 9.1 PeopleBook, "Understanding Electronic Data
Interchange"
This section provides an overview of the Credit Card Data EIP and discusses how to set up the Credit Card
Data EIP.
The Credit Card Data EIP sends corporate card data to an external system.
Use this asynchronous full data publish and component publish EIP to provide your external customers with credit card data from your purchasing system.
It's first published using the full data utility, then incrementally when the component associated with it is saved.
PeopleSoft delivers the service operations in PeopleSoft Integration Broker with a default status of Inactive.
You must activate each service operation before attempting to send or receive data from a third-party source or another PeopleSoft system, such as CRM.
Before you can use the Credit Card EIP, you must:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
271
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
1. Setup the service operation within PeopleSoft Integration Broker and Enterprise Components:
Use the information in the table below and refer to the setup instructions in the PeopleSoft Enterprise
Supply Chain Management Integration 9.1 PeopleBook, "Implementing Integrations" chapter, Setting Up
Service Operations section.
Service Operation Direction and Type Handlers
CorporateCardDataFullSync
Chunking
Available?
No CORPORATE_CARD_DAT
A_FULLSYNC
Inbound and
Outbound
Asynchronous
Integrates
With
third-party system
CORPORATE_CARD_DAT
A_SYNC
No third-party system
CORPORATE_CARD_DAT
A_SYNC
Inbound and
Outbound
Asynchronous
CORPORATE_CARD_FUL
LSYNC
Inbound and
Outbound
Asynchronous
CorporateCardFullSync No third-party system
CORPORATE_CARD_SYN
C
Inbound and
Outbound
Asynchronous
CorporateCardSync No third-party system
2. Address any special setup steps defined for this EIP
This section provides an overview of the Procurement Card Load EIP and discusses how to use the
Procurement Card Load EIP.
The Procurement Card Load EIP is an asynchronous batch subscribe service operation that uploads procurement card statements from your procurement card vendors.
Run the Procard Statement Load Application Engine process (PO_CCLOADLD) to move the data from staging tables to application tables.
272 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Load Statement
Data Collection Setup
Data Def Maint (Data
Definition Maintenance)
Definition Name
RUN_CC_LOADTRANS
BCT_SETUP_FS
EO_EIP_CTL_MAINT
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Load Statement
Usage
Run the ProCard Load
Statement process to load the statement lines from the staging table into the statement tables and to perform autoreconciliation using the settings defined on the Procurement Card
Load Statement Options page.
SCM Integrations, Setup,
Data Collection, Data
Collection Setup
Set the option to keep transaction log history for electronic data collection transactions and to set the default file suffix.
SCM Integrations,
Transaction Error Handling,
Maintain Data Definitions,
Data Def Maint (data definition maintenance)
View data detail or correct errors for service operations that contain data rather than transactions.
PeopleSoft delivers the service operations in PeopleSoft Integration Broker with a default status of Inactive.
You must activate each service operation before attempting to send or receive data from a third-party source or another PeopleSoft system, such as CRM.
Before you can use the Procurement Card Load EIP, you must:
1. Setup the service operation within PeopleSoft Integration Broker and Enterprise Components:
Use the information in the table below and refer to the setup instructions in the PeopleSoft Enterprise
Supply Chain Management Integration 9.1 PeopleBook, "Implementing Integrations" chapter, Setting Up
Service Operations section.
Service Operation Direction and Type Handlers
PROCUREMENT_CARD_L
OAD
Inbound
Asynchronous
ProcurementCardLoad
Chunking
Available?
No
Integrates
With
third-party system
2. Run the ProCard Statement Load process to move the service operation data from the staging tables to application tables.
3. Use the Data Def Maint page to view service operation data and correct error messages that are picked up in the processing of the service operation.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
273
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
This section discusses how to run the ProCard Data Loader Application Engine process (PO_CCPRDSTG).
Page Name
ProCard Stage
Definition Name
RUN_CC_PCRDSTG
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Load ProCard Stage,
ProCard Stage
Load the bank statement
(transactions) into the staging tables using the
ProCard Data Loader process. If the data source is
VISA, it triggers the
PO_CCVISA subprocess to load the Visa Commercial
Format compliant data file.
If the data source is US
Bank, it triggers the
PO_CCUSBANK subprocess to load the US
Bank compliant data file. If the data source is
MasterCard, it triggers the
PO_CCMC subprocess to load the MasterCard
Custom Data Format compliant data file.
Access the ProCard Stage page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Process Statements, Load ProCard Stage,
ProCard Stage).
274 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
ProCard Stage page
Select the credit card vendor that issues the credit card.
Select to determine what file layout to use. If the bank statement is in VISA
Commercial Format, then you should select VISA Commercial Format. If the bank statement is in US Bank format, then you should select USBank Layout. If the bank statement is in MasterCard format, then you should select MasterCard
Custom Data Format.
Enter the file name and the full path of the file. The directory specified has to be accessible by the PeopleSoft Process Scheduler server.
Today's date appears by default. Select the billing date to use for staging the statements.
This field selection appears by default from the Card Issuer page. It is display only and cannot be modified on this page.
Card Custom Data Format data sources.
See Also
Chapter 11, "Managing Procurement Cards," Defining Procurement Card Issuers, page 259
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
275
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
This section discusses how to handle staging errors.
Staging errors can arise when loading your procurement card statement data to the staging tables. For example, you can use this page to address invalid credit card vendor information and invalid credit card numbers.
Page Name
Correct Errors
Definition Name
CC_STG_ERR
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Correct Errors
Usage
Correct errors for data in the staging table. Statement lines cannot be loaded in the statement tables if the credit card vendor or credit card account number are incorrect.
Access the Correct Errors page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Process Statements, Correct Errors).
Displays the type of staging errors. Values are: Account, Vendor, or Both. An account error indicates that the cardholder number is invalid or not on file. A vendor error indicates the vendor name is invalid in the vendor table. An error for both error refers to both the account and vendor error. If there's a stage error, the employee ID does not appear.
This section provides an overview of the ProCard Load Statement process and discusses how to run the
ProCard Load Statement process.
•
The ProCard Load Statement Application Engine process (PO_CCLOADLD) has different functions, including:
Automatically reconcile between procurement card statements and Purchase Orders using the criteria you define on the Load Statement Options page and then loading those statements to application tables.
276 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
•
Load the statements to be manually reconciled by you using the Reconcile Statement component.
Once statement lines have been loaded successfully, the status of the lines is set to Staged, and the statement lines are ready for review using the Reconcile Statement component. After loading the statement lines into the statement tables, you can run the Bank Statement workflow process to notify cardholders. However, you are not required to run that process. Each cardholder needs an email ID in order to be notified. For each bank statement line that has not been approved, the system sends an email message to the corresponding cardholder. If the status of the statement line is Staged, then it changes to
Initial.
•
Create prepayment vouchers for the procurement card statements.
After the ProCard Load Statement process runs it creates prepayment vouchers in the voucher staging tables. You will then need to run the Voucher Build process to create the prepayment voucher in
PeopleSoft Payables.
Perform budget validation for the statement lines.
•
•
This function validates the existing budget rows for the ChartField combinations associated with the procurement cards. This budget validation process has no budgetary impact nor does it validate remaining budget balances.
See Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," page 179.
Calculate VAT amounts for the statement lines.
Reconciling Statements Automatically
The system reconciles the statement lines by reconciling:
•
•
•
•
Transactions based on small amount criteria.
Transactions charged to a vendor card.
Transactions with a valid purchase order ID.
Transactions without a valid purchase order ID.
into the statement tables and set the statement status. For tighter commitment control, you can create purchase orders for procurement card purchases. The automatic reconciliation process reduces the manual efforts to reconcile between these two sets of transactions.
Reconciling Transactions Based on the Small Amount Criteria
To reconcile based on small amount criteria:
1. If the statement line involves a small amount and is not part of a purchase order, the system only considers the small amount criteria and assigns a statement status associated with When billing amount is
<=.
2. If the statement line fails to meet any of the criteria, the status automatically changes to Staged.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
277
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Reconciling Transactions Charged to a Vendor Card
To reconcile transactions charged to a vendor card:
1. If there is a purchase order with a valid vendor card in the statement, the system automatically copies the entire purchase order including line, schedule, and distribution information into the statement tables.
information.
2. The system splits the statement lines automatically.
3. If there is a discrepancy between the statement line amount and the purchase order amount, the system prorates the purchase order amount with respect to the statement line amount, because the statement line amount is what you are liable to pay.
4. If the transaction amount matches the purchase order amount, the system assigns a statement status associated with When purchase order amount is = billing amount.
Because this is a perfect match, you can set the status to Approved, and the cardholder does not need to reconcile it manually.
5. If the purchase order amount is within the tolerance range (percentage over and percentage under), the system assigns a statement status associated with When purchase order amount is within tolerances.
6. If the statement amount is neither the same as the purchase order amount nor within the tolerance range, the system considers the small amount criteria and assigns a statement status associated with When billing amount is <=.
7. If the statement line fails to meet any of the criteria, the status automatically changes to Staged.
Reconciling Transactions with Purchase Order ID
To reconcile transactions with a valid purchase order ID:
1. If there is a purchase order with a valid ID in the statement, the system automatically copies the entire purchase order including line, schedule, and distribution information into the statement tables.
information.
2. The system splits the statement lines automatically.
3. If there is a discrepancy between the statement line amount and the purchase order amount, the system prorates the purchase order amount with respect to the statement line amount, because the statement line amount is what you are liable to pay.
4. If the transaction amount matches the purchase order amount, the system assigns a statement status associated with When purchase order amount is = billing amount.
Because this is a perfect match, you can set the status to Approved, and the cardholder does not need to reconcile it manually.
5. If the purchase order amount is within the tolerance range (percentage over and percentage under), the system assigns a statement status associated with When purchase order amount is within tolerances.
278 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
6. If the statement amount is neither the same as the purchase order amount nor within the tolerance range, the system considers the small amount criteria and assigns a statement status associated with When billing amount is <=.
7. If the statement line fails to meet any of the criteria, the status automatically changes to Staged.
Reconciling Transactions Without Purchase Order ID
To reconcile transactions without a valid purchase order ID:
1. If you do not select Allow System to match and populate PO data, the system does not attempt to copy purchase order information into the statement tables for these transactions.
If the statement line amount meets the small amount criteria, the system assigns a statement status accordingly. The distribution information comes directly from the cardholder profile.
2. If you select Allow System to match and populate PO data, the system attempts to match the statement line with purchase order by header, then by line, and finally by schedule based on the settings in the Load
Statement Options.
If the match results in no purchase order or multiple purchase orders, the system does not bring in any purchase order information, and it uses the distribution information from the cardholder profile.
3. If there is a purchase order whose date and amount is the same as the transaction date and amount on a statement line, then the system brings in the entire purchase order information including line, schedule, and distribution.
4. If there is no purchase order with the same date and amount, but there is a purchase order with the same date and the amount is within tolerance range, then the system also brings in the entire purchase order information including line, schedule, and distribution.
5. If there are multiple purchase orders that meet the matching criteria, the system does not copy the purchase order information and must reconcile this statement line manually.
However, when you are reconciling this statement line manually those purchase orders become candidates for you to pick from on the purchase order information page.
6. If the statement line fails to meet any of the criteria, the status automatically changes to Staged.
In cases where there is no purchase order available to copy to the transaction, the system applies any field defaults from the appropriate defaulting hierarchy, including the cardholder profile and the VAT defaulting hierarchy, to complete the data on the Procurement Card transaction. These data elements are available to review and override on the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card component.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
279
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
from the purchase order. In cases where a purchase order is not linked to the transaction, the system uses the following logic to derive the Ship To Address, Ship From Address, and Seller's Location fields in order to complete the VAT defaulting and calculation process:
Ship To Address: Use the ship to address on the CC_TRANS_LINE table to derive the ship to country and state. This appears by default from the cardholder profile.
Seller's Location: If the merchant address is available in the CC_TRANS_LINE, use the merchant country and state to derive the seller's country and state. Otherwise, if the merchant vendor cross-reference exists, use the ordering address of vendor in the CC_TRANS_LINE to derive seller's country and state.
Ship From Address: If the merchant and vendor relationship does exist, use the default ship from location defined in the vendor to determine the Ship From Country and State fields. If this relationship is not available, the Merchant Address fields are used. Finally, if no merchant address was transmitted on the transaction, use the ship to address.
Page Name
Load Statement
Definition Name
RUN_CC_LOADTRANS
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Load Statement
Usage
Run the ProCard Load
Statement process to load the statement lines from the staging table into the statement tables and to perform autoreconciliation using the settings that you defined on the Load
Statement Options page.
Access the Load Statement page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Process Statements, Load Statement).
Displays the number of statement line records in the staging table waiting to be loaded into the application table.
Displays the number of statement line records that did not successfully load from the staging tables to the application tables after the ProCard Load Statement process. Use the Correct Errors page to view and handle these errors.
Displays the total number of records in the staging table that are ready to be loaded. This includes the total rows in the staging tables and the total rows with errors in the staging tables.
Select this check box to delete statement line records from the staging table that were successfully loaded to the statement tables.
280 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
This section lists the page used to run the Bank Statement Workflow process.
Page Name
Bank Statement Workflow
Definition Name
PO_CCSTMT_WF
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Bank Statement Workflow
Usage
Notifies the cardholder that the bank statement has arrived. Upon notification, you can reconcile the statement. The statement remains at the same status that it was before you ran the Bank Statement
Workflow
(PO_CCSTMT_WF) process.
This section discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Review and approve procurement card transactions.
Defining account distributions.
Define statement line purchase order details.
Enter statement line tax information.
Split statement lines.
Use distribution templates.
View tax information for a distribution.
View VAT line information.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
281
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Page Name Definition Name
Reconcile Statement Search CC_RECON_SRCH
Reconcile Statement -
Procurement Card
Transactions
Reconcile Statement -
Merchant Details
CC_RECON_WB
CC_RECON_MERCHANT
ProCard VISA Trans Detail
Reconcile Statement - Visa
Transaction Details
CC_RECON_VISA
ProCard MasterCard Trans
Reconcile Statement -
MasterCard Transaction
Details
CC_RECON_MC
Reconcile Statement -
MasterCard Transaction
Details
CC_RECON_MC_5300CU
Reconcile Statement - Line
Comments
CC_RECON_COMMENT
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reconcile, Reconcile
Statement, Reconcile
Statement Search
Enter search criteria for the procurement card transactions you want to reconcile.
Click the Search button on the Reconcile Statement
Search page.
Review, manage, and approve procurement card transactions loaded by the
Load Statement process.
You can view all of the procurement card transactions that you have been granted authority to access on the Cardholder
Profile - Card Data: Assign
Proxies page.
Click the Merchant Name link on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement
Card Transactions page.
Review merchant or preferred vendor crossreference information.
Click the Line Details button for a Visa transaction on the Reconcile Statement
- Procurement Card
Transactions page.
View the details of the Visa transaction.
Click the Line Details button for a MasterCard transaction on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement
Card Transactions page.
View the details of the
MasterCard transaction.
Click the Show Details button for a corporate card line item detail associated with a MasterCard transaction on the ProCard
MasterCard Trans
Reconcile Statement -
MasterCard Transaction
Details page.
View the details associated with the MasterCard transaction.
Click the Comments button on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement
Card Transactions page.
Enter comment text that remains with the associated procurement card transaction line.
282 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Page Name
Reconcile Statement -
Account Distribution
Credit Card Distribution
VAT
Reconcile Statement -
Purchase Details
Sales/Use Tax
Category Search
Definition Name
CC_TRANS_DIST
CC_TRANS_DIST_VAT
CC_RECON_PO
View Category Hierarchy
CAT_PARENTAGE_SEC
Purchase Order Pick List
CC_TRANS_SUT
CAT_SEARCH_SEC
CC_POPICKLIST
Managing Procurement Cards
Navigation
Click the Distribution button on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement
Card Transactions page.
Usage
Split accounting distributions or override defaults for a statement line.
The key difference between this page and the
Distribution
Templates/Reset Status page is that this page affects one statement line at a time.
Click the Distribution
VAT button on the
Reconcile Statement -
Account Distribution page.
View the distribution VAT details that are associated with your procurement card transactions.
Click the Purchase Order link on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement
Card Transactions page.
Click the Sales/Use Tax link on the Reconcile
Statement - Purchase
Details page.
(Optional) Define any purchasing attributes applicable to a statement line.
Enter optional tax information related to the statement line. This data is not passed to PeopleSoft
General Ledger and is for informational purposes only.
Click the Category Search link on the Reconcile
Statement - Purchase
Details page.
Search for and select an appropriate category ID for the item when entering an ad hoc item. The search for the category ID is done using a category hierarchy tree.
Click the View Hierarchy link on the Reconcile
Statement - Purchase
Details page.
View information about where a category resides in the entire catalog tree hierarchy.
Click the PO Pick List link on the Reconcile Statement
- Purchase Details page.
Select a purchase order from a list of candidates that meet the criteria specified on the Procurement Card
Load Statement Options page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
283
Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name Definition Name
Reconcile Statement - Split
Transaction
CC_RECON_SPLIT
Reconcile Statement -
Distribution Template
CC_RECON_TEMPLATE
Credit Card Transaction
Line VAT
Account Summary
CC_TRANS_LINE_VAT
RUN_POY8050
Chapter 11
Navigation Usage
Click the Split Line link on the Reconcile Statement -
Procurement Card
Transactions page.
Enter a description to supplement level-one information given by your card provider or split the original statement line into multiple lines where you can record details of each item purchased.
To split accounting lines or override default values only, use the Reconcile
Statement - Account
Distribution page.
Click the Distribution
Template link on the
Reconcile Statement -
Procurement Card
Transactions page.
Click the Line VAT button on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement
Card Transaction page.
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Account
Summary
Change accounting distributions for all of the selected lines at once. You might use this feature to assign the same SpeedChart to several statement lines from a particular merchant.
View the VAT line details that are associated with your procurement card transactions.
Run one of these multiprocess jobs: Purchase
Summary by Issuer
(POY8050) which will generate the Purchase
Summary by Issuer Crystal report (POY8050), Purchase
Summary by Merchant
(POY8051) which will generate the Purchase
Summary by Merchant
Crystal report (POY8051), or Purchase Summary by
Employee (POY8052) which will generate the
Purchase Summary by
Employee Crystal report
(POY8052).
284 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Page Name
Purchase Details
Definition Name
RUN_POY8030
Managing Procurement Cards
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Purchase
Details
Usage
Run one of these multiprocess jobs: Purchase
Detail by Issuer (POY8030) which will generate the
Purchase Detail by Issuer
Crystal report (POY8030),
Purchase Detail by
Merchant (POY8031) which will generate the
Purchase Detail by
Merchant Crystal report
(POY8031), or Purchase
Detail by Employee
(POY8032) which will generate the Purchase Detail by Employee Crystal report
(POY8032).
Access the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards,
Reconcile, Reconcile Statement, Reconcile Statement Search, and click the Search button on the Reconcile
Statement Search page).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
285
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
286
Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions
Transaction
Click the linked merchant name to access the Reconcile Statement - Merchant
Details page. Use this page to view the source of the purchased goods.
Click the Line Details button to access the ProCard VISA Trans Detail Reconcile
Statement - Visa Transaction Details or ProCard MasterCard Trans Reconcile
Statement - MasterCard Transaction Details pages. Use these pages to view the details for the Visa or MasterCard transaction.
loading with Visa or MasterCard data files.
Click the Comments button to enter comments for the reconcile statement line.
Click the Distribution button to access the Reconcile Statement - Account
Distribution page, where you can modify the account distribution for a procurement card.
Displays the status of the ChartField edits.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Billing
Select the Billing tab.
reference)
Enter additional information about the goods purchased.
Displays the amount billed on the statement line.
Displays the prepayment voucher associated with the transaction.
If your records disagree with the billing amount, enter the amount difference.
This does not mean that your organization is not liable for the purchase, but rather acts as a notation that the user reconciling this account must follow up with the merchant or procurement card vendor to settle the disputed amount. If you enter an amount, the statement line is visible on the Review Disputes - Dispute page until it has been identified as collected.
Displays the status of the disputed amount. If clear, the dispute is still open. If selected, the dispute has been identified as collected or closed on the Review
Disputes - Dispute page.
VAT
Select the VAT tab.
Displays whether the purchased item is a good or service.
Displays the VAT entity associated with PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit from the PeopleSoft Purchasing business unit.
Displays the amount of VAT included on the statement line.
Displays the amount of VAT that the system calculates.
Indicates whether the statement line is to be used as proof for recovery of VAT.
This field is automatically selected if statements issued by the card provider are defined as approved VAT receipts for the VAT reporting country. If you select this field, no additional VAT receipt is required to enable VAT recovery and rebate amounts to be calculated. If this field is not selected, you must indicate that a separate VAT receipt is available to enable the calculation of VAT recovery and rebate amounts.
If the Claiming Tax Credit check box is not selected, this field indicates whether a separate VAT receipt is available as proof for recovery of VAT. Select this field to indicate that no VAT receipt is available. This causes zero VAT recovery and rebate amounts to be recorded.
Click the Line VAT button to navigate to the Credit Card Transaction Line VAT page to review and possibly change the line VAT information.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
287
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Updating Transaction Status
You can change the status of a card transaction for individual lines or for many lines in mass.
To update the status of an individual line, select a value in the Status field.
To update the status for multiple lines at once, click the check box next to each line and use the buttons at the bottom of the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page to change the status to the appropriate value. You have authority to change statuses based on your procurement card roles and access rights granted to those roles defined on the Procurement Card Access Rights page.
Performing Budget Validation on Transactions
There are two ways to perform budget validation against transactions on this page if you are using commitment control. You have the option to perform budget validation on all the transactions when you save the page or you can select transactions and then perform budget validation on those transactions when you click the Validate Budget button.
page if you are using commitment control for procurement cards.
Select to indicate that you want the system to initiate the Comm. Cntrl. Budget
Processor (commitment control budget processor) Application Engine process
(FS_BP) when you save the page. This page initiates the Comm. Cntrl. Budget
Processor process but only a portion of the processing (budget validation) within that process is performed. This process validates the existing budget rows for the
ChartField combinations associated with the procurement cards. This process has no budgetary impact nor does it validate remaining budget balances and finds errors in the ChartField combinations before they are found downstream in accounts payable.
After budget validation is finished, the system will change the budget status on the transactions to either Valid or Error.
After you select one or more transactions click this button to initiate the Comm.
Cntrl Budget Processor process. By clicking this button you initiate the Comm.
Cntrl. Budget Processor process but only does a portion of the processing (budget validation) within that process is performed. This process validates the existing budget rows for the ChartField combinations associated with the procurement card. This process has no budgetary impact nor does it validate remaining budget balances.
When you click this button, the page will indicate that the process is being performed. The page will flash "processing" until the process has finished performing the budget validation for the document. After the process is finished, the system will change the budget status on the transactions to either Valid or
Error.
Budget Validation on Save check box is selected.
288 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"
Chapter 8, "Using Commitment Control," Budget Checking Procurement Cards, page 200
Access the Reconcile Statement - Account Distribution page (click the Distribution button on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page).
Displays the cost of the item purchased on the selected statement line.
Select a predefined distribution template to apply to the statement line.
ChartFields
You can manually override the distribution information for the statement line by changing any of the distribution field values in the scroll area.
the ChartFields or liquidate method on this page.
order you are not able to modify the PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit, project related fields
(PeopleSoft Project Costing business unit, project, and activity), and asset information.
Details/Tax
Select the Details/Tax tab.
and use tax applicable)
Tax method applied to the statement line. Appears by default from the Sales/Use
Tax page.
and use tax percentage)
Tax percentage that the system uses to calculate the use tax for the statement line.
Calculated tax amount for the statement line. Appears by default from the
Sales/Use Tax page.
Access the Reconcile Statement - Purchase Details page (click the Purchase Order link on the Reconcile
Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
289
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
order schedule)
The value of this field is Y (yes) if the purchase order ID came from a transaction on the bank statement. If the purchase order ID is missing or is generated by the system during the Auto Recon process, the value in this field is N (no). You can only modify the purchase order related data if the field value is N.
Displays the purchase order number associated with the statement line. This purchase order number is either an original purchase order on the bank statement, one that is populated by the system during the auto reconciliation process, or entered directly by the cardholder.
this page. If this credit card has never been used on purchase orders, then all qualified purchase orders will be listed in the prompt. However, if this credit card has been used on purchase orders, then only those purchase orders paid by this card will be available in the prompt.
Displays the line number of a purchase order.
Displays the schedule number of a purchase order.
Select a vendor ID for either a 1099 merchant or non-1099 merchant. At times, a procurement card may be used to purchase services from a 1099 merchant.
Identifying the 1099 merchant as an authorized vendor ensures that you establish a valid tax reporting ID for the vendor. You can also set up vendors that are non-
1099 merchants. Identifying the non-1099 merchant vendor may be useful when renegotiating corporate contracts with a supplier.
Select the location address for the vendor.
For reporting, select an item ID that represents the internally classified part number for goods purchased with the procurement card.
If you do not want to enter an item ID, you can select an applicable item category for reporting purposes.
For reporting purposes, enter the vendor item ID.
Displays the cost of the goods on the statement line.
This check box setting appears by default from the Procurement Card Issuer page.
Select this check box to designate that tax was paid to the merchant at the point of sale. If tax was paid, no further documentation is required.
Maintenance WO (maintenance work order)
If the purchase order selected is associated with a PeopleSoft Maintenance Management work order the fields in this section will appear. You can modify the work order information that appears on this page or you can enter the work order information using this page.
290 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
(PeopleSoft Maintenance
Management business unit)
Select the PeopleSoft Maintenance Management business unit associated with the work order you want to associate with the procurement card transaction.
Select the work order you want to associate with the procurement card transaction.
(resource line number)
Select the task number associated with the work order.
Select the resource type associated with the work order. Types are: Labor,
Material, and Tools.
Select the resource line number associated with the work order.
After you enter the work order information, the system will populate the account distributions on the
Reconcile Statement - Account Distributions page based on the work order distribution template.
Access the Sales/Use Tax page (click the Sales/Use Tax link on the Reconcile Statement - Purchase Details page).
Select the tax applicability for the statement line. Most procurement card purchases typically use the sales or use tax method. Values are:
Direct Pay: Use tax is not calculated on the purchase order. The invoice is not created with use tax, but a line is written to the general ledger for the amount that the buyer pays directly to the state.
The use tax amount is calculated and displays on the Sales/Use Tax Information
For Schedule page and the Sales/Use Tax Details For Distribution page. The use tax amount will not display on the Maintain Purchase Order - Purchase Order page or the PO Total Amount Details page.
Exempt: Item purchased is exempt from sales and use tax.
Exonerated: Buyer does not have to pay sales tax. Tax is not calculated on the purchase order and PeopleSoft Payables does not pay taxes.
Sales Tax: Calculate and apply sales tax on the purchase order.
Use Tax: Calculate and apply use tax on the purchase order.
Select the location code of the final destination where the purchased goods are to be used. The system calculates sales and use tax amounts based on this information.
Enter the tax code. The tax code determines tax rate (or the sales and use tax code percent) used in the tax calculation.
use tax code percentage)
If you do not know the SUT destination or the tax code, you can enter the tax percent for the transaction.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
291
Managing Procurement Cards
Chapter 11
If you entered the correct tax code information or SUT code percentage, it calculates and displays the use tax.
Access the Reconcile Statement - Split Transaction page (click the Split Line link on the Reconcile Statement
- Procurement Card Transactions page).
Reconcile Statement - Split Transaction page
Enter text describing the purchase reflected on the line. You may want to state what item was actually purchased.
If you have split the transaction by description and want to split the line by amount as well, enter the appropriate amounts in this field for each line.
However, the amounts must add up to the original amount.
If you have split the transaction by description and want to split the line by percentage as well, enter the appropriate percentages in this field for each line.
However, the percentages must add up to 100%.
Access the Reconcile Statement - Distribution Template page (click the Distribution Template link on the
Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card Transactions page).
Select the SpeedChart to assign to the distributions of all selected statement lines.
Alternatively, you can manually assign distributions for all selected lines by entering distribution information.
292 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Access the Credit Card Transaction Line VAT page (click the Line VAT button on the Reconcile Statement -
Procurement Card Transaction page).
Expanding and Collapsing Sections
To manage your VAT data more efficiently, you can expand and collapse sections to this page, which makes it easier for the user to manage.
Click the expand button to scroll to and access every section on the page. You can also expand one or more sections by clicking the arrow next to the section's name.
Click to collapse all sections displaying only the header information. If you expand one or more sections, you can click the arrow next to the section's name to collapse the section.
Physical Nature
Displays the default physical nature for transactions. Values are: Goods or
Services.
VAT Locations
Displays the vendor ship from location country. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this determines the VAT treatment.
If the ship from country is defined as tracking VAT by state or province, it displays the vendor ship from location state. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this determines the VAT treatment.
Displays the ship to location country. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this is used to determine the VAT treatment.
If the ship to country is defined as tracking VAT by state or province, it displays the ship to location state. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this is used to determine the VAT treatment.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
293
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
VAT Defaults
If the transaction is for a service, it displays the VAT service type of Freight or
Other. The value in this field determines whether or not the special rules for freight transport within the European Union apply. The default value comes from the PeopleSoft Purchasing VAT defaulting hierarchy.
If the transaction is for a service, it displays the usual place of supply (such as the place where VAT is usually liable) for the service. This value helps to determine the place of supply country and the VAT treatment. Values are: Buyer's
Countries, Supplier's Countries, or Where Physically Performed. The default value comes from the PeopleSoft Purchasing VAT defaulting hierarchy.
Displays the country for which this VAT is to be reported. This is the VAT
Entity VAT registration country and determines many of the VAT defaults.
If the reporting country requires that VAT be tracked by state or province, this field displays the state within the reporting country that is used to retrieve values from the VAT Defaults table.
Displays the registration country and ID of the vendor.
Displays the exception granted to the VAT entity. Values are: None, Exonerated, or Suspended. This value is specified on the VAT entity registration.
If applicable, displays the ID of the VAT exception certificate that may have been issued to the VAT entity.
Indicates how VAT is calculated. Values are:
Gross: The system calculates VAT before it applies any early payment discounts.
Net: The system calculates VAT after it deducts early payment discounts. If there are two percentage discounts, the system uses the larger of the two when it calculates VAT. The system does not use discount amounts, only discount percentages.
The default value comes from the VAT entity registration driver.
Select this check box to enable the recalculation of VAT at payment time to allow for any early payment discounts, if you are calculating VAT at gross. This causes the system to adjust the VAT amount at the time of payment if the discount has been taken. This is set on the VAT entity registration driver.
294 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Displays the declaration point for a good or service when you want VAT transaction information to be recognized for reporting purposes. Values are:
Invoice: VAT is recognized at time of invoice.
Payment: VAT is recognized at time of payment.
Delivery: VAT is recognized on delivery.
This value may be set at several levels in the VAT hierarchy: VAT entity registration, business unit options, vendor, or vendor location.
Displays the VAT rounding rule. The value comes from the VAT country, VAT entity, vendor or vendor location drivers. Values are:
Natural Round: Amounts are rounded normally (up or down) to the precision specified for the currency code. For example, for a currency defined with two decimal places, 157.4659 would round up to 157.47, but 157.4649 would round down to 157.46.
Round Down: Amounts are rounded down. For example, for a currency defined with two decimal places, 157.4699 would round down to 157.46.
Round Up: Amounts are rounded up with a rounding precision to one additional decimal place. For example, for a currency defined with two decimal places,
157.4659 would round up to 157.47, but 157.4609 would round down to 157.46.
Determines the split between recoverable (taxable) and nonrecoverable
(nontaxable) VAT.
For Canadian public sector, the use type also determines the rebate of the nonrecoverable VAT. VAT rebates are calculated based on statutory rebate rates that are established for each public service body.
The value comes from the VAT defaulting hierarchy, either from the item, item business unit, item category, vendor location, vendor, or purchasing options.
If selected, the system includes any freight amounts in the VAT basis by calculating VAT on the merchandise amount, plus any freight amount. This option is only available for exclusive VAT calculation. The value comes from the
VAT entity registration driver.
If selected, the system includes any miscellaneous charge amounts in the VAT basis by calculating VAT on the merchandise amount, plus any miscellaneous charge amount. This option is only available for exclusive VAT calculation. The value comes from the VAT entity registration driver.
If the Claiming Tax Credit check box is not selected, this field indicates whether a separate VAT receipt is available as proof for recovery of VAT. Select this field to indicate that no VAT receipt is available. This causes zero VAT recovery and rebate amounts to be recorded.
Select whether to indicate that the goods on transaction lines associated with the
VAT driver are domestic reverse charge goods.
default value.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
295
Managing Procurement Cards
Chapter 11
Displays the VAT treatment. Complex algorithms determine the VAT treatment.
Values are:
Domestic Goods Purchase: If the ship from and ship to countries are the same, and the vendor is registered for VAT, the transaction is treated as domestic.
Domestic Service Purchase: If the buyer and seller are both located in the country where the VAT is liable, the transaction is treated as domestic
EU Goods Purchase: If the ship from and ship to countries are different, the system determines whether both countries are located within the European
Union. If so, the system looks at the VAT registration for each trading partner to determine whether the transaction should be treated as an intra-European Union purchase, domestic, or outside the scope of VAT.
EU Service Purchase: If each trading partner is located and registered in different
European Union countries, and the VAT on a service is liable in the buyer's country, the transaction is treated as a self-assessed European Union services purchase.
Self-Assess Goods Import: If the ship from country is different from the ship to country and either or both of the countries are located outside of the European
Union, and the vendor is not registered in the ship to country, the transaction would be treated as an import. If the flag on the entry in the VAT Country table for the VAT reporting country indicates that VAT on imports should be selfassessed, the transaction is treated as a self-assess goods import, and both input and output VAT are recorded.
Self-Assess Service Import: If each trading partner is located and registered in different countries, and the VAT on a service is liable in the buyer's country, the transaction is treated as a self-assessed services import.
Zero-rated Goods Import: If the ship from country is different from the ship to country and either or both of the countries are located outside of the European
Union, and the vendor is not registered in the ship to country, the transaction would be treated as an import. If the flag on the entry in the VAT Country table for the VAT reporting country indicates that only input VAT should be recorded on imports, the transaction is to be treated as a zero-rated goods import.
Outside of Scope: If the supplier is not registered for VAT, or if the VAT is liable in a country other than the VAT reporting country, the transaction is treated as outside the scope of VAT.
No VAT Processing: For transactions where the physical nature is goods, if the ship to country has not been defined as a VAT country and the VAT reporting country on the transaction is blank, no VAT information is recorded.
Within PeopleSoft detail, VAT treatment values on the transaction lines are used to apply the precise defaults applicable to the transaction lines. The treatment is determined based the rules that are applicable to the transaction.
296 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Managing Procurement Cards
Displays the VAT status. Values are:
Taxable
Exempt (not subject to VAT)
Outside of Scope of VAT
Suspended
Exonerated
Not Applicable (valid only when VAT treatment is no VAT processing)
Displays the VAT code that defines the rate at which VAT is calculated for this line.
Displays the rate at which the transaction is charged VAT.
Displays the code that categorizes and classifies this transaction for VAT reporting and accounting.
Adjust/Reset VAT Defaults
Any changes that you make to fields on this page may affect VAT defaults on this page. For accuracy and consistency, use the following fields to adjust affected VAT defaults or to reset all VAT defaults. Adjusting or resetting VAT defaults only affects fields within the VAT Defaults group box.
Click this button to have the system adjust the VAT defaults that are affected by your changes. All changes that you have made to VAT defaults on this page that affect other VAT defaults on this page are retained.
Click the i button to list the fields that are to be adjusted.
Defaults button after changing any defaults on the VAT page.
Use to specify the levels to reset when you click the Reset All VAT Defaults button. Values are:
All lower levels: Resets all VAT defaults at lower levels for this page.
This and all lower levels: Resets all VAT defaults on this page and at any lower levels of this page.
This level only: Resets all VAT defaults on this page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
297
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Click to have the system reset the VAT defaults based on the levels value that you selected. Any changes that you have previously made to VAT defaults is lost.
does not necessarily mean that they are reset to their original values. For example, the user may not have changed any VAT default values, but if a VAT driver field changes, reset redetermines all of the defaults based on the new driver value.
VAT Calculations
Displays the amount on which the VAT is calculated in the transaction currency.
If VAT is being calculated at net, this amount is net of any discounts.
Displays the system calculated VAT amount in the transaction currency.
Displays the amount of VAT stated on the credit card statement.
This is the amount transmitted by the merchant on the inbound credit card statement. This amount is compared to the system-calculated VAT amount. If the override VAT amount is outside of the calculated VAT amount, plus the VAT tolerance amounts defined on the VAT driver tables for procurement cards, an exception is noted in the field for the tax dispute amount.
See Also
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"
This section lists the page used to run the Grace Period Has Expired process.
Use this process to notify the cardholders that there are transactions that need to be approved or reconciled.
298 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Grace Period Expired
Workflow
Definition Name
CC_BK_EXP_PRCS_WF
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Grace Period Expired
Workflow
Usage
Run this process to notify users who did not reconcile their statements on time.
Upon notification, cardholders must change the statement status to
Approved.
This section discusses how to view and resolve procurement card transaction amount disputes.
Page Name
Review Disputes Search
Review Disputes -
Procurement Card
Transactions
Review Disputes - Line
Comments
Definition Name
CC_RECON_SRCH
CC_TRANS_DISPUTE
CC_TRANS_COMNT_SEC
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reconcile, Review
Disputes, Review Disputes
Search
Enter search criteria for the disputed transaction.
Click the Search button on the Review Disputes Search page.
View and resolve disputed transactions. The statement lines that appear on this page are lines with a dispute amount where the Credit
Collected check box has been cleared.
Click the Comments button on the Review
Disputes - Procurement
Card Transactions page.
Enter comment text that remains with the associated procurement card transaction dispute.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
299
Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name
Expected Credits
Definition Name
RUN_POY8020
Credit Detail By MCG
(Credit Detail By Merchant
Category Group)
RUN_POY8060
Chapter 11
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Expected
Credits
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Credit
Detail By MCG
Usage
Run the Expected Credits multiprocess job
(POY8020). This process will generate the Expected
Credits Crystal report
(POY8020).
Run the Credit Detail by
MCG multiprocess job
(POY8060). This process will generate the Credit
Detail By MCG Crystal report (POY8060).
Access the Review Disputes page.
Dispute Amount
Select this check box to indicate that you have received the credit for the disputed amount. When you select the Collected check box, the transaction no longer appears on the Dispute page.
Displays the difference in the amount between your records and the transaction amount. Appears by default from the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card
Transactions page.
Appears by default from the Reconcile Statement - Procurement Card
Transactions page, but you can change it here.
This section discusses how to view the statement summary.
300 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Page Name Definition Name
Review Statement Selection
Criteria
CC_TRANS_LDSFETCH
Statement Summary
CC_TRANS_LDSUMMARY
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Review Bank
Statement, Review
Statement Selection Criteria
Enter selection criteria for statements you want to view.
Click the Search button on the Review Statement
Selection Criteria page.
Use this page to view statement summary by credit card vendor, billing date, or statement status.
Access the Statement Summary page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Review Bank Statement, Review
Statement Selection Criteria, and click the Search button on the Review Statement Selection Criteria page).
Displays the statement status for the statement summary. Values include All
Trans (all transactions), Approved, Closed, Initial, Not Closed, Staged, and
Verified.
Displays the voucher ID. Only statements with a Closed status may have a voucher ID. To obtain a voucher ID, you must first create a voucher.
This section discusses how to run the voucher load process.
Use the ProCard Load Voucher Stage Application Engine process (PO_CCVSHRSTG) to populate data into the new staging tables for the Voucher Build process.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
301
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Page Name
Voucher Stage
Definition Name
RUN_CC_VCHRSTG
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Process Statements,
Load Voucher Stage,
Voucher Stage
Usage
Use the ProCard Load
Voucher Stage process to move approved transactions to the voucher staging tables. Data in the
CC_TRANS_LINE table is written into the Voucher
Line staging table
(VCHR_LING_STG) and data in the
CC_TRANS_DIST table is written into the Voucher
Distribution staging table
(VCHR_DIST_STG).
Access the Voucher Stage page (Purchasing, Procurement Cards, Process Statements, Load Voucher Stage,
Voucher Stage).
Process Request Parameters
Select the credit card vendor that you want to process.
Select the billing date for the statements that you want to process. The PeopleSoft
Purchasing system validates the billing date against the dates passed by the credit card provider.
Select the method to create the vouchers. Values are By Business Unit or By
Credit Card Number.
Select the business unit for the statements that you want to pay.
Enter the invoice number for the statement. The invoice number is restricted to
22 characters.
(maximum voucher lines)
Enter the maximum number of lines created into a single voucher.
Transaction Status Criteria
Select this option to process only the transactions that are approved.
302 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Managing Procurement Cards
Select this option to process transactions that are not closed (this includes transactions that are not approved nor verified).
Budget Status Criteria
Select this option to process only the transactions that pass budget validation.
Select this option to process transactions that were never budget checked.
ChartField Status Criteria
Select this option to process transactions that fail the ChartField combination edits.
This section lists the pages used to analyze procurement card information.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
303
Managing Procurement Cards Chapter 11
Page Name
Purchase Exceptions
Definition Name
RUN_POY8010
Credit Detail By MCG
(Credit Detail By Merchant
Category Group)
RUN_POY8060
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Purchase
Exceptions
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Credit
Detail By MCG
Usage
Run one of these multiprocess jobs: Exceed
Limit-Per-Trans (POY8010) which will generate the
Exceed Limit-Per-Trans
Crystal report (POY8010),
Exceed Limit-Per-Cycle
(POY8011) which will generate the Exceed Limit-
Per-Cycle Crystal report
(POY8011), Exceed Trans-
Per-Day (POY8012) which will generate the Exceed
Trans-Per-Day Crystal report (POY8012), Exceed
Trans-Per-Cycle
(POY8013) which will generate the Exceed Trans-
Per-CycleCrystal report
(POY8013), or
Unauthorized Commodity
(POY8014) which will generate the Unauthorized
Commodity Crystal report
(POY8014).
Run the Credit Detail by
MCG multiprocess job
(POY8060). This process will generate the Credit
Detail By MCG Crystal report (POY8060).
304 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11
Page Name
Non-Preferred Supplier
Definition Name
RUN_POY8061
Top Supplier Chains
Top Merchant Category
MCC Exceptions (merchant category code exceptions)
RUN_POY8062
RUN_POY8063
RUN_POY8064
Managing Procurement Cards
Navigation
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Non-
Preferred Supplier
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Top
Supplier Chains
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, Top
Merchant Category
Purchasing, Procurement
Cards, Reports, MCC
Exceptions
Usage
Run the Non-Preferred
Supplier multiprocess job
(POY8061). This process will generate the Non-
Preferred Supplier Crystal report (POY8061).
Run the Top Supplier
Chains multiprocess job
(POY8062). This process will generate the Top
Supplier Chains Crystal report (POY8062).
Run the Top Merchant
Category multiprocess job
(POY8063). This process will generate the Top
Merchant Category Crystal report (POY8063).
Run the MCC Exceptions multiprocess job
(POY8064). This process will generate the MCC
Exceptions Crystal report
(POY8064).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
305
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
307
This chapter provides an overview of vendor rebates.
Today's companies are faced with competitive pressures to reduce and manage costs and to have good working relationships with their suppliers. As competition intensifies, the successful management and profitability of vendor rebates is essential.
One of the ways that an organization can improve its profit margin is in the successful analysis, creation, processing, and tracking of vendor rebates in its environment. Vendor rebate information is an extremely valuable asset if you can obtain and use it properly. Without the means to capture and share that information, costly mistakes and loss of money can occur. You need functionality that provides the right information at the right time to the right individuals.
With the vendor rebate functionality of PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can effectively manage vendor rebates and increase revenue. The vendor rebate functionality that resides in PeopleSoft Purchasing integrates with other PeopleSoft applications to give you a complete and overall solution to the full life cycle of the vendor rebate. Through the implementation of the vendor rebate functionality, you can move one step closer to achieving success in managing vendor rebates and tracking the effectiveness of those vendor rebates.
This diagram illustrates the business process flow for vendor rebates were a vendor rebate agreement has been established and a variety of rebate options and PeopleSoft system processes, such as notifications and claims, help manage the rebate process:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
309
Understanding Vendor Rebates Chapter 12
310
Business process flow of vendor rebates and how the process integrates with other applications
The next sections describe the process details.
Vendor Rebate Definition
•
•
The most important step in managing a successful vendor rebate program is the accurate definition of vendor rebate agreements. Using vendor rebate agreements in PeopleSoft Purchasing, you can capture the complex rules that are related to rebates from the supplier in a user-friendly and concise manner. You can define multiple rebate rules within a rebate agreement enabling you to fully define the contractual agreement with the supplier. PeopleSoft Purchasing supports a variety of rebate rules. The rebate rules supported are:
Standard rebate: This type of rebate specifies a rebate factor (percentage or amount) based on the purchase threshold levels you defined during a specified time period. Increases in purchased amounts can reach a higher threshold level, which changes the rebate factor for additional purchases.
Retrospective rebate: This type of rebate specifies a rebate factor (percentage or amount) based on the purchase threshold levels you defined during a specified time period. Increases in purchased amounts can reach a higher threshold level, which changes the rebate factor for additional purchases as well as all the purchases to date, within the specified rebate period.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Understanding Vendor Rebates
•
Growth bonus rebate: This type of rebate is based on a specified increase in purchases for a specific item or item category. For the growth bonus rebate, the user needs to be able to define the items, item categories, or both that will be considered for the growth bonus, the target percentage increase or growth that will trigger the rebate, and the purchase amount or quantity for each item or category that will be the basis to determine the growth percentage. The purchase volume for the current period will be compared to these values to determine whether the growth targets were achieved.
•
Marketing contribution rebate: This type of rebate is based on amounts, with the rebate amount being based on amount or percentage. Unlike the other rebate rules types, the marketing contribution is independent of the purchase transactions. It's a one-time rebate for the life of the rebate agreement.
•
Flat amount rebate: This type of rebate specifies a flat amount based on the purchase threshold levels you defined during the rebate agreement life. Flat rebate amount can be either prorated or not prorated.
See Chapter 13, "Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements," page 313.
Vendor Rebate Association with Purchase Orders
The vendor rebate assignment with purchase orders is another crucial area. When a purchase order is created in PeopleSoft Purchasing, the vendor rebate agreement association will automatically occur. However, due to business constraints in the business world, vendor rebate assignment when the purchase order is created might not be possible due to the availability of the vendor rebate agreement. This is similar to the beginning of a new rebate agreement period when purchase orders need to be released but the vendor rebate agreements are still in a negotiation phase with the supplier.
•
•
•
To support these types of exceptions, the vendor rebate functionality includes the Backdate Vendor Rebates component. Using the Backdate Vendor Rebates component, you can:
Associate vendor rebate agreements with one or more purchase order lines at the same time.
Dissociate vendor rebate agreements from one or more purchase order lines at the same time.
Modify associated vendor rebate agreements line by line for purchase orders.
See Chapter 15, "Maintaining Vendor Rebate Agreement Association with Purchase Orders," page 361.
Vendor Rebate Claims Management
One of the last steps in managing a successful vendor rebate program is to be proactive in claiming rebate amounts from the supplier. When rebates are accrued, you can generate claims for the accrued rebates and inform suppliers of the rebate claims and payment terms. To assist suppliers in paying rebates, suppliers can pay for the rebate using a variety of settlement methods: adjustment voucher, check, credit memo, direct debit, draft, and electronic funds transfer (EFT).
•
•
•
•
PeopleSoft Purchasing provides you with the claims management workbench to assist you with the management of claims and the payment process for these claims. The claims management workbench enables you to:
Review, approve, and generate a formal claim to send to the supplier.
Settle a claim.
Reconcile incoming payments.
Defer a claim to the next payment cycle.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
311
Understanding Vendor Rebates Chapter 12
•
Create deductions or reverse deductions to accommodate overdue payments from the supplier.
Overall, the claims management workbench enables you to track what rebates have been paid and what is due from suppliers. This helps ensure that organizations collect rebate claims in a timely fashion and results in cost savings.
The claims management processes integrate with PeopleSoft Payables and PeopleSoft Receivable to complete the payment cycle.
See Chapter 16, "Managing Vendor Rebate Claims," page 367.
See Chapter 14, "Generating Rebate Accruals," page 345.
Vendor Rebate Effectiveness Evaluation
The final step in managing a successful vendor rebate program is evaluating the profitability of the vendor rebates that are offered from the suppliers. Reviewing this type of information from time to time enables you to make adjustments to the vendor rebate structure and gives you the necessary information so that you can plan and carry out profitable rebates in the future.
PeopleSoft Purchasing provides you with the rebate analysis workbench to assist you with evaluating and determining the effectiveness and profitability of a vendor rebate. Using the rebate analysis workbench, you can perform multiple inquiries to analyze vendor rebates. You can perform rebate threshold analysis and time period analysis, view purchase orders that have not been received that are associated with the vendor rebate, and view accrued rebate details.
See Chapter 14, "Generating Rebate Accruals," page 345.
See Chapter 17, "Analyzing Vendor Rebates," page 401.
312 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
•
•
This chapter provides overviews of vendor rebate agreement statuses and vendor rebate rule types and discusses how to:
Define vendor rebate agreements.
Dispatch vendor rebate agreements.
Multiple statuses can occur for a vendor rebate agreement during the life of the agreement. The available statuses for a vendor rebate agreement and the eligible processes for each status are:
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
313
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
Vendor Rebate Agreement Status Edits, Allowed Actions, Eligible Processes
Open
The user must have entry authority.
Accrual transactions are created and claims are generated:
•
If accruals are created and claims generated (other than canceled claims), the user cannot change rule information for the rebate agreement.
Accrual transactions have been created and no claims have been generated, or claims exist in canceled status: the user can change the rebate rule information.
•
Rebate Agreement references on purchase order but no accrual transactions have been generated:
The user cannot change:
•
•
•
General Details: Vendor,Vendor ID,Currency, and Rate Type. Begin date and expiration date can be modified.
Rebate Options: Corporate Agreement,Eligible PO Business Units,
Include Automatically PO Adhoc Items, and Open Item Rebate
Agreement check boxes. The Open Item Rebate Agreement check box can be selected if it wasn't previously, but it cannot be cleared if previously selected.
Rebate lines and exceptions: The user cannot change or delete an existing rebate line. The user can mark the line inactive. You can add additional lines and exceptions.
Rebate Rules: The user can modify all rebate agreement rules information.
Rebate agreement is not referenced on a purchase order:
The user can change all the information on the rebate agreement.
Approved
•
•
•
The user must have approval authority.
The user cannot modify any rebate information except rebate status and dispatch fields.
•
•
•
Rebate agreements only in approved status can have the following processes run against them:
Rebate agreements can be dispatched.
Accrual transactions can be created.
Claims can be generated.
Claims Reconciliation and the Overdue and Cancel Overdue process can be processed if the rebate agreement is in either an Approved or
Hold status.
314 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Vendor Rebate Agreement Status
Cancel
Edits, Allowed Actions, Eligible Processes
•
•
•
The user must have cancel authority.
The user cannot modify any rebate information except for rebate status.
The user can cancel rebate agreements only if no rebate agreement references are on a purchase order line. If any rebate agreement references are on a purchase order line, clear the references using the Maintain
Purchase Order - Purchase Order page, the Express Purchase Order -
Purchase Order page, or the Backdate Vendor Rebates page.
Hold
•
•
•
•
The user must have hold authority.
The user cannot modify any rebate information except for rebate status.
The user can put the rebate agreement on hold even if rebate references are on the purchase order, accrual transactions have been created, and claims have been generated.
No activity can occur against a rebate agreement that is in a hold status. You can perform payment activities against the rebate agreement, such as Claims
Reconciliation and Overdue and Cancel Overdue processes.
Close
•
•
•
The user must have close authority.
The user cannot modify any rebate information except for rebate status.
•
•
•
The user controls the close action on the rebate agreement irrespective of the rebate references. The system issues warning messages based on the references. It issues individual messages based on the following rebate references:
Pending claims (claims in Open, Approved, Pending Payment, and
Partial Paid statuses).
Accrual transactions that have been created and no claims have been generated or claims have been generated, but they are in a Cancel or
Paid status.
Rebate agreement references on a purchase order and no accrual transactions have been generated.
•
•
•
PeopleSoft Purchasing provides five different vendor rebate rule types that you can associate with a vendor rebate agreement. These vendor rebate rule types are:
Stepped/Standard.
Retrospective.
Flat Amount.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
315
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
•
•
Growth Bonus.
Marketing Contribution.
Stepped/Standard
This is the simplest vendor rebate rule type and is based on amounts or quantities. Standard/Stepped rebate rule types specify a rebate factor percentage that is based on the defined purchase threshold levels during the rebate agreement life. Usually the higher the threshold, the greater the rebate percentage, thus awarding a greater vendor rebate amount for a supplier who makes large purchases.
For example, a rebate agreement is negotiated with a supplier, which states that:
•
•
•
•
•
Purchases between 0 USD and 100,000 USD receive a 1 percent rebate.
Purchases between 100,001 USD and 500,000 USD receive a 2 percent rebate.
Purchases over 500,001 USD receive a 3 percent rebate.
Rebates will be paid quarterly.
The method of payment will be by check.
Assume that the purchases for the quarter were 650,000 USD. The rebate at the end of the quarter would be
13,500 USD.
13,500 USD = ((100,000 USD × .01) + (400,000 USD × .02) + (150,000 USD × .03))
Retrospective
Retrospective rebate rule types are based on amounts or quantities. Retrospective rebate rule types specify a rebate factor percentage that is based on the defined purchase threshold levels during the rebate agreement life. Increases in purchased amounts can reach a higher threshold level, which changes the rebate factor for additional purchases as well as all the purchases to date within the rebate agreement life.
•
•
For example, a rebate agreement is negotiated with a supplier, which states that:
•
•
Purchases between 0 USD and 100,000 USD receive a 1 percent rebate.
Purchases between 100,001 USD and 500,000 USD receive a 2 percent rebate retrospectively back to 1
USD.
Purchases over 500,001 USD receive 3 percent rebate retrospectively back to 1 USD.
Rebates will be paid quarterly.
Assume that the purchases for the quarter were 650,000 USD. The rebate at the end of the quarter would be
19,500 USD.
19,500 USD = (650,000 USD × .03)
Flat Amount
Flat amount rebate rule types are based on amounts or quantities. Flat rebate rule types specify a flat amount based on the defined purchase threshold levels during the rebate agreement life. Flat rebate amount can be either prorated or not prorated.
316 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
For example, a rebate agreement is negotiated with a supplier, which states that:
•
•
•
Purchases between 0 USD and 100,000 USD receive a 1000 USD rebate, prorated.
Purchases between 100,001 USD and 200,000 USD receive a 5000 USD rebate, prorated.
Rebates will be paid quarterly.
Assume that the purchases for the quarter were 150,000 USD. The rebate at the end of the quarter would be
3,500 USD.
3,500 USD = (1,000 USD + 50 percent of 5,000 USD)
This is another example not using prorate option:
•
•
•
Purchases between 0 USD and 100,000 USD receive a 1000 USD rebate, prorated.
Purchases between 100,001 USD and 200,000 USD receive a 5000 USD rebate, not prorated.
Rebates will be paid quarterly.
Assume that the purchases for the quarter were 150,000 USD. The rebate at the end of the quarter would be
6,000 USD.
6,000 USD = (1,000 USD + 5,000 USD)
Growth Bonus
Growth bonus rebate rule types are based on a specified increase in purchases for a specific item or item category. For this rebate rule type, you can define the items, item categories that will be considered for the growth bonus, or both, the target percentage increase or growth that will trigger the rebate, and the purchase amount or quantity for each item or item category that will be the basis to determine the growth percentage.
The purchase volume for the current period will be compared to these values to determine whether the growth targets were achieved. You can also define rebate per growth percentage threshold levels.
•
For example, a rebate agreement is negotiated with a supplier, which states:
•
Receive a 2 percent growth bonus on a particular category (A) of products under the condition that the purchasing turnover has increased by 10 percent or more year on year.
Rebates will be paid quarterly.
Assume that the purchases were:
Category
A
B
Fourth Quarter 2002
400,000 USD
200,000 USD
600,000 USD
Fourth Quarter 2003
450,000 USD
200,000 USD
650,000 USD
Percentage Increase
12.5 percent
0 percent
The rebate at the end of the quarter would be 1,000 USD.
1,000 USD = (50,000 × .02)
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
317
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
Marketing Contribution
Marketing Contribution rebate rule types are based on amounts, with the rebate amount being based on amount or percentage. Unlike the other rebate rules types, the marketing contribution is independent of the purchase transactions. It is a one-time rebate for the entire rebate agreement life.
For example, a contract is negotiated with a supplier for the quarter, which states:
Receive a 1.5 percent marketing contribution on purchases for the previous period.
Assume that the purchases for the previous quarter were 650,000 USD. The rebate at the end of the quarter would be 9,750.00 USD.
9,750 USD = (650,000 USD × .015)
Rebate Agreement Examples
This is an example of a quarterly rebate agreement using retrospective rule with quantity basis and marketing contribution:
A rebate agreement with a supplier contains three items:
Item A: UOM EA
Item B: UOM EA
Item C: UOM CS (CS: case, 1 CS = 4 EA)
The rebate rules for the rebate agreement state:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Purchases between 0 and 10,000 EA receive a 1 percent rebate.
Purchases between 10,000 and 50,000 EA receive a 2 percent rebate retrospectively back to 1 EA.
Purchases over 50,000 EA receive a 3 percent rebate retrospectively back to 1 EA.
Additionally, we receive a 1 percent marketing contribution on purchases for the same quarter last year.
Rebates will be paid quarterly.
Method of payment will be by check.
Assume that the purchases for the same quarter last year were 300,000 USD. The following table illustrates the purchases for the current quarter:
Item
Item A
Item B
Item C
Total Purchase
Quantity
4,000
6,000
4,000
26,000
Unit of Measure
EA
EA
CS
EA
Unit Price
10.00 USD
20.00 USD
50.00 USD
Amount
40,000
120,000
200,000
360,000
318 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
The rebate at the end of the quarter would be 10,200 USD.
10,200 USD = ((360,000 USD × .02) + (300,000 × .01))
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This is another example of rebate agreement using retrospective, marketing contribution, and growth bonus rules combined:
Purchases between 0 USD and 100,000 USD receive a 1 percent rebate.
Purchases between 100,001 USD and 500,000 USD receive a 2 percent rebate retrospectively back to 1
USD.
Purchases over 500,001 USD receive a 3 percent rebate retrospectively back to 1 USD.
Additionally, we receive a 1 percent marketing contribution on purchases for the same quarter in the previous year.
Also, we receive a 2 percent growth bonus on a particular category (A) of products under the condition that the purchasing turnover has increased by 10 percent or more year on year.
Rebates will be paid quarterly.
Method of payment will be by check.
Assume that the purchases for the quarter were 650,000 USD. The purchases for the same quarter last year were 600,000 USD.
Category
A
B
Fourth Quarter 2002
400,000 USD
200,000 USD
600,000 USD
Fourth Quarter 2003
450,000 USD
200,000 USD
650,000 USD
Percentage Increase
12.5 percent
0 percent
The rebate at the end of the quarter would be 26,500 USD.
26,500 USD = (650,000 USD × .03) + (600,000 × .01) + (50,000 × .02)
Before you begin creating vendor rebate agreements, you should:
•
Define vendor rebate agreement authorizations for each rebate manager using the Rebate Authorizations page.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining User Preferences,"
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreement Authorizations.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
319
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
•
•
•
Specify the rebate ID security control option using the Purchase Order Authorizations page.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining User Preferences,"
Defining Purchase Order User Authorizations.
(Optional) Define vendor rebate settlement tolerance settings using the Set Controls - Contracts page.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Procurement
Options," Defining Contract and Vendor Rebate Control Parameters.
Set up automatic numbering for vendor rebate agreement IDs and claim IDs using the Auto Numbering page.
•
•
•
•
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Financials and Supply
Chain Management Common Definitions," Setting Up Automatic Numbering.
Define the accounting entry template for use with vendor rebate agreements using the Accounting Entry
Template page.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Financials and Supply
Chain Management Common Definitions," Creating Accounting Entry Templates.
Define reason codes to be used for claims adjustment using the Reason Codes page.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Financials and Supply
Chain Management Common Definitions," Defining Additional Common Information.
Create bill to customers for each vendor using the Vendor Information - Identifying Information page if the settlement method for the rebate agreement is anything but Adjustment Voucher.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining Vendor
Information," Entering Vendor Identifying Information.
(Optional) Define the matching default hierarchy. The vendor rebate functionality requires the matching functionality to be implemented.
See Chapter 7, "Using Default Hierarchies," Understanding the Matching Default Hierarchy, page 165.
To define vendor rebate agreements, use the Rebate Agreement component (VRBT_AGREEMENT).
This section discusses how to:
•
•
•
•
Define rebate agreements.
Define rebate options.
Update rebate agreement value added tax (VAT) details.
Define rebate rules.
320 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Page Name Definition Name
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Agreement
VRBT_HDR
Rebate Agreement - Copy
Rebate Agreement
VRBT_COPY_SEC
Vendor Search VENDOR_LOOKUP_SEC
Rebate Agreement - Specify
Vendor Locations
VRBT_VNDR_LOC
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Comments
VRBT_COMMENTS
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Activity
VRBT_ACTIVITY
Rebate Agreement - Vendor
Primary Contact Info
VBRT_CNTCTPHNSEC
Navigation Usage
Purchasing, Vendor
Rebates, Rebate Agreement
Define the overall rebate agreement information for the rebate agreement.
Click the Copy From
Existing Rebate Agreement link on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page.
Copy an existing rebate agreement to a new rebate agreement.
Click the Vendor Search link on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page.
Search for the vendor that you want to associate with the rebate agreement.
Click the Specify Vendor
Locations link on the
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page.
Define the vendor locations that apply to the rebate agreement. If you specify vendor locations, then the rebate agreement is applicable to purchase orders that are created for the specific vendor location.
If vendor locations are not defined for the rebate agreement, then the rebate agreement is applicable to purchase orders irrespective of the vendor locations.
Click the Add Comments link on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page.
Define rebate agreement comments.
Click the Rebate Activities link on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page.
Enter activities and the due dates that are associated with the rebate agreement.
Also, you can mark when those activities have been completed.
Click the Primary Contact
Info link on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page.
Review the vendor's primary contacts address and other contact information, such as telephone number and pager number.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
321
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Page Name
Rebate Agreement -
Activity Log
Definition Name
PO_MAINT_POP
Rebate Agreement - Item
Search
PO_ITEM_SEARCH_SP
Category Search
CAT_SEARCH_SEC
Rebate Agreement - Item
Category Exceptions
VRBT_CAT_EXCPTN
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Options
VRBT_OPTIONS
Rebate Agreement -
Eligible PO Business Units
VRBT_BU
Chapter 13
Navigation Usage
Click the Activity Log link on the Rebate Agreement -
Rebate Agreement page.
Review the activity log for this rebate agreement. This page displays the user ID and the date of the individual who entered, modified, and approved the rebate agreement.
•
•
Click the Item Search link on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page.
Click the Search button on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate
Agreement page when you select a line type of item.
Search for items that you want to apply to the rebate agreement.
Click the Search button on the Rebate Agreement -
Rebate Agreement page when you select a line type of category.
Search for categories that you want to apply to the rebate agreement.
Click the Exception link on the Rebate Agreement -
Rebate Agreement page when you select a line type of category.
Define items within a category that do not apply to this rebate agreement.
Purchasing, Vendor
Rebates, Rebate Agreement,
Rebate Options
Define general and settlement rebate options that pertain to the rebate agreement.
Click the Eligible PO
Business Units link on the
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Options page.
Define eligible purchase order business units for the rebate agreement. This page is available if the rebate agreement is not specified as a corporate agreement.
322 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13
Page Name Definition Name
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Agreement Value Added
Tax
VRBT_HDR_VAT
Rebate Agreement -
Receivables ChartFields
VRBT_AR_DIST
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Rules
VRBT_RULES
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Types Explained
VRBT_RULE_INFO
Rebate Agreement -
Distributions for Rebate
Rule
VRBT_RULE_DIST
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Navigation Usage
Click the Header VAT link on the Rebate Agreement -
Rebate Options page.
Update value added tax details for the rebate agreement.
Note. The Header VAT link is available only if the
PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit that is associated with the
PeopleSoft Payables business unit is a VAT entity.
Click the Receivables
ChartFields link on the
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Options page.
Review and override the
ChartFields that are associated with PeopleSoft
Receivables business unit that is associated with the rebate agreement. The system populates by default the ChartFields from the
AR Distribution Code that is defined for the
PeopleSoft Receivables business unit. The
PeopleSoft Receivables
ChartFields are required if the settlement method for the rebate agreement is anything but Adjustment
Voucher.
Purchasing, Vendor
Rebates, Rebate Agreement,
Rebate Rules
Define the different rebate rules that apply to this rebate agreement.
Click the Rebate Types
Explained link on the
Rebate Agreement - Rebate
Rules page.
Displays text explaining the five different types of rebates with examples, namely Standard or
Stepped, Retrospective,
Flat, Growth Bonus, and
Market Contribution.
Click the Rule ChartFields link on the Rebate
Agreement - Rebate Rules page.
Define the ChartField distributions for each rebate rule.
Access the Rebate Agreement - Rebate Agreement page (Purchasing, Vendor Rebates, Rebate Agreement).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
323
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
324
Rebate Agreement - Rebate Agreement page
•
•
•
•
This field appears by default from the User Preferences - Procurement: Rebate
Authorizations page. When you are defining a rebate agreement, the initial default value is either Open or Approved.
Select the overall rebate agreement status. Values are:
•
Approved
Canceled
Closed
Hold
Open
See Chapter 13, "Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements," Understanding Vendor
Rebate Agreement Statuses, page 313.
Click this link to access the Rebate Agreement - Copy Rebate Agreement page.
Use this page to copy an existing rebate agreement to the new rebate agreement.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
General Details
Select the rebate manager for this rebate agreement. Rebate managers are users who are specified with the rebate manager role.
Select the settlement manager for this rebate agreement.
Select the contract to associate with this rebate agreement.
Select the start date for this rebate agreement. The current date appears by default for the begin date.
Select the end date for this rebate agreement.
date.
•
•
•
Select the dispatch method for the rebate agreement. Values are:
•
FAX
Phone
Click this button to dispatch the vendor agreement. The rebate agreement must be approved before you can dispatch it. When you click the button, the system automatically performs the Rebate Dispatch & Email multiprocess job
(VRBTDISP).
Click to access the Rebate Agreement - Specify Vendor Locations page. Use this page to specify specific vendor locations where the rebate agreement ID can be applied when you are creating a purchase order.
For example, suppose you have a vendor ABC and they have three locations:
Location 1, Location 2, and Location 3. You have created a specific rebate agreement ID with this vendor that is applicable only if the purchase order is ordered from Location 2 and Location 3. In this situation, when ordering from
Location 1, they are not eligible for the rebate agreement.
Specifying vendor locations is optional. If you do not specify vendor locations, then the rebate agreement ID can be applied to all the vendor locations from the specified vendor.
Click to access the Rebate Comments page where you can view and add comments about the rebate.
See Chapter 28, "Creating Purchase Orders Online," Entering Purchase Order
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
325
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
(primary contact information)
Click to access the Rebate Activity page where you can view and update activities associated with the rebate. You can enter activities and the due dates and mark when those activities have been completed.
Select to access the Vendor Primary Contact Info page where you can review the vendor's primary contacts address and other contact information, such as telephone number and pager number.
Click to access the Activity Log page where you can review the activity log for this rebate agreement. The page displays the user ID and the date of the individual who entered, modified, and approved the rebate agreement.
Amount Summary
Enter a value if a maximum rebate amount is available for this rebate agreement.
This value is expressed in the rebate agreement currency.
purchase order amount)
Displays the total purchase order amount in the rebate agreement currency. This is the sum of all merchandise amounts per purchase order line that are associated with this rebate agreement.
Displays the total accrued amount for this rebate agreement.
Displays the total claim amount for this rebate agreement.
Displays the total claim amount that was collected from the supplier for this rebate agreement.
Displays the difference between the total accrued rebate and the total claim amount for the rebate agreement (the accrued rebate portion that has not been claimed yet).
Line Items and Categories
Click the Item Search link to access the Rebate Agreement - Item Search page.
Use this page to add multiple items at once to the rebate agreement.
Displays the line number of the rebate agreement. The rebate agreement line indicates which item or item categories are applied to the vendor rebate agreement.
agreement.
326 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13
(search)
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
•
Select the type of line that you are adding to the rebate agreement. Values are:
•
Category
When you select category as the line type, the Category field becomes available for entry and the Item ID field is not available for entry.
Item
When you select item as the line type, the Item ID field becomes available for entry. The category that is associated with the item that you enter appears in the Category field.
Click to search for either item IDs or categories.
If you select a line type of Category, click this button to access the Category
Search page. Use this page to search for categories.
If you select a line type of Item, click this button to access the Rebate Agreement
- Item Search page. Use this page to search for items.
Click this link to access the Rebate Agreement - Item Category Exceptions page.
Use this page to identify the items in the category that you want to exclude from the rebate agreement.
The Exception link appears only when you select a line type of Category.
Access the Rebate Agreement - Rebate Options page (Purchasing, Vendor Rebates, Rebate Agreement,
Rebate Options).
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
327
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
328
Rebate Agreement - Rebate Options page
General Rebate Options
Select this check box if this rebate agreement can be used by all business units.
This check box appears selected by default.
If the check box is clear, then you need to specify at least one eligible PO business unit.
Select this check box if the rebate agreement is open to all items. If you select this check box, you are not able to enter items or categories for the rebate agreement on the Rebate Agreement - Rebate Agreement page.
automatically purchase order ad hoc items)
Select this check box if you want to include description-only items for the rebate agreement.
If the check box is clear, the rebate agreement won't be automatically associated to the purchase order lines with description-only items.
from return to vendor)
Select this check box if you want to generate accruals upon return to vendor shipments for the purchase orders that are associated with this rebate agreement.
Accruals on RTV transactions will have a negative rebate amount.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Select this check box if you want the Generate Vendor Rebate Claims process to include only the rebate accruals with a transaction status of Vouchered.
agreement that is assigned to a purchase order when the purchase order is created. Values are:
•
Direct Shipments Only: Rebate agreement is applied exclusively to the direct shipment transactions.
•
Exclude Direct Shipments: Rebate agreement is applied exclusively to regular purchase order transactions.
•
Include Direct Shipments: Rebate agreements are applied to both regular purchase order transactions and direct shipment transactions.
Select this check box if you want the system to use the rate date of the rebate agreement for the currency conversion. After you select this check box, select the rate date in the Rate Date field.
Select this check box if you want to notify the Rebate Manager by email, worklist, or both when a new claim is generated.
Select this check box if you want to notify the Settlement Manager by email, worklist, or both when a claim is settled through the Claims Management
Workbench.
Settlement Options
(PeopleSoft Payables business unit)
(PeopleSoft General
Ledger business unit)
Select the PeopleSoft Payables business unit to use for the rebate agreements settlement.
(PeopleSoft Receivables business unit)
Select the PeopleSoft Receivables business unit if the settlement method for the rebate agreement is anything but Adjustment Voucher.
The PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit that is associated with the
PeopleSoft Payables business unit appears.
Select the vendor location to apply to adjustment vouchers that are created for a claim settlement. Specifying a vendor location is optional.
This vendor location will be passed to PeopleSoft Payables through the voucher staging process.
Specifying a vendor location can be useful if you want to handle a specific vendor location for rebate differently than the normal ordering vendor location.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
329
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
Select the frequency of the rebate agreement settlement. The schedule IDs that you define on the Maintain Purchase Order - Schedules page are used for the settlement frequency. For example, settlement frequency can be yearly, quarterly, monthly, and so on.
See Chapter 28, "Creating Purchase Orders Online," Creating Purchase Order
Displays the next claim generation date. The system calculates the date based on the rebate agreement begin date and settlement frequency that is selected. You can override this date.
For example, assume that a rebate agreement is being entered on February 1,
2004 (current system date) with a begin date of January 1, 2004 and an expiration date of December 31, 2004 with a settlement method of quarterly. Assume that the schedule is defined as quarterly with a day of the month equal to one for the schedule ID. In this case, the next claims generation date calculated would be
April 1, 2004.
Select the settlement method for the rebate agreement. Values are Adjustment
Voucher,Check,Credit Memo,Direct Debit,Draft, and Electronic Funds Transfer.
(PeopleSoft Receivables payment terms) or AP
(PeopleSoft Payables
Payment Terms)
Depending on the settlement method that you select, you will select either AR
Payment Terms or AP Payment Terms. The system uses this field for the payment due days calculation.
Settlement Tolerances
and Amount Tolerance
These fields appear by default from the values that are defined on the Set
Controls - Contracts page.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Source-to-Settle Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook
, "Defining Procurement Options," Defining Contract and Vendor Rebate Control
Parameters.
These fields appear by default from the values that are defined on the Set
Controls - Contracts page.
Access the Rebate Agreement - Rebate Agreement Value Added Tax page (click the Header VAT link on the
Rebate Agreement - Rebate Options page).
Expanding and Collapsing Sections
To manage the VAT data more efficiently, you can expand and collapse sections on this VAT page making management of the information on this page easier.
330 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Click this button to scroll to and access every section on the page. You can also expand one or more sections by clicking the arrow next to the section's name.
Click this button to collapse all sections displaying only the header information.
If you expand one or more sections, you can click the arrow next to the name of the section to collapse the section.
Physical Nature
Indicates whether an object is a good or a service. Many countries are required to report the sale and purchase of goods separately from services. The default comes from the vendor location in the Settlement Options if specified, or the default vendor location or Goods value if not specified on the vendor location.
VAT Locations
Displays the vendor's ship from location country. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this is used to determine the VAT treatment.
If the ship to country is defined as tracking VAT by state or province, this field displays the vendor's ship from location state. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this is used to determine the VAT treatment.
Displays the ship to location country. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this determines the VAT treatment.
If the ship to country is defined as tracking VAT by state or province, this field displays the ship to location state. In the case of transactions involving goods or freight service transactions, this is used to determine the VAT treatment.
VAT Defaults
Displays the country for which this VAT will be reported. This is the VAT entity
VAT registration country and determines many of the VAT defaults.
If the reporting country requires that VAT be tracked by state or province, this field displays the state within the reporting country that is used to retrieve values from the VAT Defaults table.
Displays the registration country and ID of the vendor.
Displays the exception that is granted to the VAT entity. Values are: None,
Exonerated, or Suspended. This value is specified on the VAT entity registration.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
331
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
Indicates how VAT is calculated. Values are:
Gross: The system calculates VAT before it applies any early payment discounts.
Net: The system calculates VAT after it deducts early payment discounts. If two percentage discounts exist, the system uses the larger of the two when it calculates VAT. The system does not use discount amounts, only discount percentages.
The default value comes from the VAT entity driver.
Select this check box to enable the recalculation of VAT at payment time to allow for any early payment discounts, if you are calculating VAT at gross. This causes the system to adjust the VAT amount at the time of payment if the discount has been taken. This is set on the VAT entity driver in the VAT defaults table.
If applicable, displays the ID of the VAT exception certificate that may have been issued to the VAT entity.
•
•
•
Appears for a good or service when you want VAT transaction information to be recognized for reporting purposes. Values are:
Invoice: VAT is recognized at time of invoice.
Payment: VAT is recognized at time of payment.
Delivery: VAT is recognized on delivery.
This value may be set at several levels in the VAT hierarchy: VAT entity registration, business unit options, vendor, or vendor location.
Displays the VAT rounding rule. The value comes from the VAT country, VAT entity, vendor, or vendor location drivers. Values are:
Nat Rnd (natural round): Amounts are rounded normally (up or down) to the precision that is specified for the currency code. For example, for a currency that is defined with two decimal places, 157.4659 would round up to 157.47, but
157.4649 would round down to 157.46.
Down (round down): Amounts are rounded down. For example, for a currency that is defined with two decimal places, 157.4699 would round down to 157.46.
Up (round up): Amounts are rounded up with a rounding precision to one additional decimal place. For example, for a currency that is defined with 2 decimal places, 157.4659 would round up to 157.47, but 157.4609 would round down to 157.46.
Determines the split between recoverable (taxable) and nonrecoverable
(nontaxable) VAT.
For the Canadian public sector, the use type also determines the rebate of the nonrecoverable VAT. VAT rebates are calculated based on statutory rebate rates that are established for each public service body.
The value comes from the VAT defaulting hierarchy, from the vendor location, vendor, or purchasing options.
332 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
If this option is selected, the system includes any freight amounts in the VAT basis by calculating VAT on the merchandise amount plus any freight amount.
This option is available only for exclusive VAT calculation. The value comes from the VAT entity registration driver.
If this option is selected, the system includes any miscellaneous charge amounts in the VAT basis by calculating VAT on the merchandise amount, plus any miscellaneous charge amount. This option is available only for exclusive VAT calculation. The value comes from the VAT entity registration driver.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
333
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Chapter 13
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Displays the VAT treatment. VAT treatment is determined by a complex set of algorithms. Values are:
Domestic Goods Purchase: If the ship from and ship to countries are the same, and the vendor is registered for VAT, the transaction is treated as domestic.
Domestic Service Purchase: If the buyer and seller are both located in the country where the VAT is liable, the transaction is treated as domestic.
EU Goods Purchase (European Union goods purchase): If the ship from and ship to countries are different, the system determines whether both countries are located within the European Union. If so, the system looks at the VAT registration for each trading partner to determine whether the transaction should be treated as an intra-EU purchase, domestic, or outside the scope of
VAT.
EU Service Purchase (European Union service purchase): If each trading partner is located and registered in a different EU country, and the VAT on a service is liable in the buyer's country, the transaction is treated as a selfassessed EU Services Purchase.
Self-Assess Goods Import: If the ship from country is different from the ship to country and either or both of the countries are located outside of the
European Union, and the vendor is not registered in the ship to country, the transaction would be treated as an import. If the flag on the entry in the VAT
Country table for the VAT reporting country indicates that VAT on imports should be self-assessed, the transaction will be treated as a self-assess goods import, and both input and output VAT will be recorded.
Self-Assess Service Import: If each trading partner is located and registered in a different country, and the VAT on a service is liable in the buyer's country, the transaction is treated as a self-assessed services import.
Zero-Rated Goods Import: If the ship from country is different from the ship to country and either or both of the countries are located outside of the
European Union, and the vendor is not registered in the ship to country, the transaction would be treated as an import. If the flag on the entry in the VAT
Country table for the VAT reporting country indicates that only input VAT should be recorded on imports, the transaction will be treated as a zero-rated goods import.
Outside of Scope: If the supplier is not registered for VAT, or if the VAT is liable in a country other than the VAT reporting country, the transaction is treated as outside the scope of VAT.
No VAT Processing: For transactions for which the physical nature is goods, if the ship to country has not been defined as a VAT country and the VAT reporting country on the transaction is blank, no VAT information will be recorded.
Within PeopleSoft, detail VAT treatment values on the transaction lines are used for applying the precise defaults that are applicable to the transaction lines. The treatment is determined based the rules that are applicable to the transaction.
334 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
•
•
•
•
•
•
Displays the VAT status. Applicability is determined by an algorithm that makes use of the Applicable field in the VAT defaults table, the value of which may be set at almost every level in the PeopleSoft Purchasing VAT defaulting hierarchy.
Values are:
Exempt (not subject to VAT).
Exonerated.
N/A (not applicable): This is valid only when VAT treatment is No VAT
Processing.
Outside (outside scope of VAT).
Suspend.
Taxable.
Displays the VAT code that defines the rate at which VAT is calculated for this schedule. The default value comes from the VAT country, purchase order options, vendor, or vendor location levels in the PeopleSoft Purchasing VAT defaulting hierarchy.
Select this check box to enter vouchers in which VAT is not included on the invoice but is payable to the VAT authority rather than the vendor. In this case, you account for both input and output VAT for the purchase. This is the case for an Intra-EU Acquisition or when you must account for output VAT on a service that is supplied by a foreign supplier. This is also referred to as self-assessing for
VAT. The value comes from an algorithm that uses the treatment and applicability to retrieve the applicable value from the PeopleSoft-delivered VAT system setup data.
Displays the code that categorizes and classifies this transaction for VAT reporting and accounting. The default value comes from the VAT entity registration, purchase order options, vendor, or vendor location levels in the
PeopleSoft Purchasing VAT defaulting hierarchy.
Adjust/Reset VAT Defaults
Any changes that you make to fields on this page may affect VAT defaults on this page. For accuracy and consistency, use the following fields to adjust affected VAT defaults or to reset all VAT defaults. Adjusting or resetting VAT defaults affects only fields that are within the VAT Defaults group box.
Click this button to have the system adjust the VAT defaults that are affected by the changes. All changes that you have made to VAT defaults on this page that affect other VAT defaults on this page will be retained.
Click the i button to list the fields that are to be adjusted.
changing any defaults on the VAT page.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
335
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
Enables you to specify the levels to reset when you click the Reset All VAT
Defaults button. Values are:
All lower levels: Resets all VAT defaults at lower levels for this page.
This and all lower levels: Resets all VAT defaults on this page and at any lower levels of this page.
This level only: Resets all VAT defaults on this page.
Click this button to have the system reset the VAT defaults based on the Levels value that you selected. Any changes that you previously made to VAT defaults will be lost.
mean they are reset to their original values. For example, the user may not have changed any VAT default values, but if a VAT driver field changes, you can click Reset All VAT Defaults to redetermine all defaults based on the new driver value.
Global Options even though some of the information may not be relevant to vendor rebates.
See Also
Purchasing VAT Environments, page 57
PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"
Access the Rebate Agreement - Rebate Rules page (Purchasing, Vendor Rebates, Rebate Agreement, Rebate
Rules).
336 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Rebate Agreement - Rebate Rules page
Rules Summary
The fields in this group box display all the rebate rules that currently exist for this rebate agreement. This is a quick way to view a summary of the rebate rules that are associated with the rebate agreement.
Stepped or Standard Rule Type
To define a stepped or standard rule type:
1. Select Stepped/Standard in the Rebate Rule Type field.
2. (Optional) Enter a description for the rule using the Description field.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
337
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
3. Configure the rule settings.
•
The field selections that you make in the Configure Rule section of the page determine how the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box will appear.
Select a tier basis for the rule using the Tier Basis field. Values are Amount and Quantity.Quantity appears by default.
If you select amount, amount fields appear in the Rebate Tiers group box.
If you select quantity, quantity fields appear in the Rebate Tiers group box. Also, you will need to select a unit of measure that is associated with the quantity in the UOM field.
•
Select a tiers in terms of setting for the rule using the Tiers in Terms Of field. Values are From
(Minimum) and To (Maximum).From (Minimum) appears by default.
If you select From (Minimum), a From column appears in the Rebate Tiers group box.
If you select To (Maximum), a To column appears in the Rebate Tiers group box.
•
Select how the rebate is to be calculated for this rebate rule using the Rebate Calculated As field.
Values are Amount and Percentage.
For stepped/standard rules, the rebate is always calculated as a percentage.Amountis not a valid selection for this rebate rule type.
4. Click the Edit Rebate Tier Table button.
When you click this button, the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box are configured to match the rule settings that you choose previously. Also, the configure rule fields are no longer available for entry.
5. Enter the terms of the rebate using the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box.
•
Enter the From or To quantities or amounts. If you are working with quantities, the UOM field appears. If you are working with amounts, the Currency field appears.
•
Enter the rebate percentage for each rebate rule line using the Rebate % field.
6. (Optional) Edit the rule setting fields.
•
•
•
If you have found that you need to change the fields that appear in the Rebate Tiers group box. Click the
Edit Rule Settings button.
Select the new field values for the rule settings.
Click the Edit Rebate Tier Table button.
Enter the new values for the rebate rule.
7. Enter rule distributions using the Rebate Agreement - Distributions for Rebate Rule page.
Click the Rule ChartFields link.
The rule ChartFields will appear by default from the Accounting Template, but you can override it. The
Generate Vendor Rebate Claims process will retrieve and create claim distribution lines with the
ChartFields from here. Then the claim distribution lines will be passed to PeopleSoft Payables or
PeopleSoft Receivables when the claim is settled.
338 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
8. Save the rebate rule by clicking the Save button.
Flat Amount Rule Type
To define a flat amount rule type:
1. Select Flat Amount in the Rebate Rule Type field.
2. (Optional) Enter a description for the rule using the Description field.
3. Configure the rule settings.
•
The field selections that you make in the Configure Rule section of the page determine how the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box will appear.
Select a tier basis for the rule using the Tier Basis field. Values are: Amount and Quantity.Quantity appears by default.
•
If you select amount, amount fields appear in the Rebate Tiers group box.
If you select quantity, quantity fields appear in the Rebate Tiers group box. Also, you will need to select a unit of measure associated with the quantity in the UOM field.
Select a tiers in terms of setting for the rule using the Tiers in Terms Of field. Values are From
(Minimum) and To (Maximum).From (Minimum) appears by default.
If you select From (Minimum), a From column appears in the Rebate Tiers group box.
If you select To (Maximum), a To column appears in the Rebate Tiers group box.
4. Click the Edit Rebate Tier Table button.
When you click this button, the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box are configured to match the rule settings that you chose previously. Also, the configure rule fields are no longer available for entry.
5. Enter the terms of the rebate using the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box.
•
Enter the From or To quantities or amounts. If you are working with quantities, the UOM field appears. If you are working with amounts, the Currency field appears.
•
Click the Prorate check box to prorate the flat rebate amount.
For example, you define a rule for the purchase amount from 0 to 10,000 USD with the rebate being
100 USD. If the purchase amount is 6,000 USD and the prorate check box on the tier is clear, then the rebate amount is 100 USD. If the prorate check box is selected, then the rebate amount is 60 USD.
•
Enter the flat rebate amount for each rebate rule line using the Rebate Amount field.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
339
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
6. (Optional) Edit the rule setting fields.
•
•
•
If you have found that you need to change the fields that appear in the Rebate Tiers group box. Click the
Edit Rule Settings button.
Select the new field values for the rule settings.
Click the Edit Rebate Tier Table button.
Enter the new values for the rebate rule.
7. Enter rule distributions using the Rebate Agreement - Distributions for Rebate Rule page.
Click the Rule ChartFields link.
The rule ChartFields will appear by default from the Accounting Template, but you can override it. The
Generate Vendor Rebate Claims process will retrieve and create claim distribution lines with the
ChartFields from here. Then the claim distribution lines will be passed to PeopleSoft Payables or
PeopleSoft Receivables when the claim is settled.
8. Save the rebate rule by clicking the Save button.
Growth Bonus Rule Type
To define a growth bonus rule type:
1. Select Growth Bonus in the Rebate Rule Typefield.
2. (Optional) Enter a description for the rule using the Description field.
3. Configure the rule settings.
•
The field selections that you make in the Configure Rule section of the page determine how the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box will appear.
Select a tier basis for the rule using the Tier Basis field. Values are Amount and Quantity.Quantity appears by default.
•
If you select amount, amount fields appear in the Rebate Tiers group box.
If you select quantity, quantity fields appear in the Rebate Tiers group box. Also, you will need to select a unit of measure that is associated with the quantity in the UOM field.
Select a tiers in terms of setting for the rule using the Tiers in Terms Of field. Values are From
(Minimum) and To (Maximum).From (Minimum) appears by default.
If you select From (Minimum), a From column appears in the Rebate Tiers group box.
If you select To (Maximum), a To column appears in the Rebate Tiers group box.
•
Select how the rebate is to be calculated for this rebate rule using the Rebate Calculated As field.
Values are Amount and Percentage.
4. Click the Edit Rebate Tier Table button.
When you click this button, the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box are configured to match the rule settings that you chose previously. Also, the configure rule fields are no longer available for entry.
340 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
5. Enter the items or categories to associate with the growth bonus rule type using the Eligible Items and
Categories for Growth Bonus group box.
Select a line type using the Line Type field. Values are Item and Category.
If you select Item as a line type, then select an item ID and enter a rebate basis amount using the Basis
Amount field.
If you select Category as a line type, then select a category and enter a rebate basis amount using the
Basis Amount field.
If you select item or category as the line type and quantity as the tier basis, then enter an item ID or a category and enter a rebate basis amount as well as a rebate basis quantity.
6. Enter the terms of the rebate using the fields in the Rebate Tiers group box.
•
Enter the From or To quantities or amounts. If you are working with quantities, the UOM field appears. If you are working with amounts, the Currency field appears.
•
Enter the rebate percentage for each rebate rule line using the Rebate % field.
7. (Optional) Edit the rule setting fields.
•
•
•
If you have found that you need to change the fields that appear in the Rebate Tiers group box, click the
Edit Rule Settings button.
Select the new field values for the rule settings.
Click the Edit Rebate Tier Table button.
Enter the new values for the rebate rule.
8. Enter rule distributions using the Rebate Agreement - Distributions for Rebate Rule page.
Click the Rule ChartFields link.
The rule ChartFields will appear by default from the Accounting Template, but you can override it. The
Generate Vendor Rebate Claims process will retrieve and create claim distribution lines with the
ChartFields from here. Then the claim distribution lines will be passed to PeopleSoft Payables or
PeopleSoft Receivables when the claim is settled.
9. Save the rebate rule by clicking the Save button.
Marketing Contribution Rule Type
To define a marketing contribution rule type:
1. Select Marketing Contribution in the Rebate Rule Type field.
2. (Optional) Enter a description for the rule using the Description field.
3. Enter the terms of the rebate using the Previous Period Basis Amount,Rebate Amount, or Rebate %
(rebate percentage) fields.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
341
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements Chapter 13
4. Enter rule distributions using the Rebate Agreement - Distributions for Rebate Rule page.
Click the Rule ChartFields link.
The rule ChartFields will appear by default from the Accounting Template, but you can override it. The
Generate Vendor Rebate Claims process will retrieve and create claim distribution lines with the
ChartFields from here. Then the claim distribution lines will be passed to PeopleSoft Payables or
PeopleSoft Receivables when the claim is settled.
5. Save the rebate rule by clicking the Save button.
Retrospective Rule Type
To define a retrospective rule type, follow the same procedure as you would to define a stepped or standard rule type. The only difference is that you select a Rebate Rule Type of Retrospective.
This section provides an overview of vendor rebate agreement dispatch and discusses how to dispatch vendor rebate agreements.
You can dispatch a vendor rebate agreement in two ways. You can dispatch a rebate agreement online using the Rebate Agreement - Rebate Agreement page or you can dispatch rebate agreements using the batch
Rebate Dispatch & Email multiprocess job.
Use the Vendor Rebate Agreement Dispatch page to schedule a background batch job that dispatches a single rebate agreement or multiple rebate agreements that meet the selection criteria. After rebate agreements have been successfully dispatched, their statuses are updated to Dispatched.
See Also
Chapter 13, "Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements," Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements, page 320
342 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Page Name
Vendor Rebate Agreement
Dispatch
Definition Name
RUN_DISP_POVRBT100
Navigation
Purchasing, Vendor
Rebates, Rebate Dispatch,
Vendor Rebate Agreement
Dispatch
Usage
Initiate the Vendor Rebate
Dispatch SQR Report process (POVR100), Rebate
Dispatch Email Application
Engine process
(PO_VR_EMAIL), or
Rebate Dispatch & Email multiprocess job
(VRBTDISP).
Access the Vendor Rebate Agreement Dispatch page (Purchasing, Vendor Rebates, Rebate Dispatch, Vendor
Rebate Agreement Dispatch).
Vendor Rebate Agreement Dispatch page
Process Request Parameters
Select the vendor rebate agreement setID.
Select a vendor rebate agreement.
Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
343
Defining Vendor Rebate Agreements
Chapter 13
Select a fax cover page if some of the rebate agreements that you are dispatching are to be sent by fax. Define fax cover letters in the system on the Fax Cover
Letters page.
The Vendor Rebate Dispatch process writes to the fax control file the file name that is associated with the selected cover letter combined with the cover letter file extension that you defined on the Dispatch Configuration page.
you use. Please consult the fax software vendor to identify the limitations and capabilities of the fax cover page support in the software.
Dispatch Methods to Include
Select which dispatch methods to include in this run of the process. Selected values are used only as a part of the data selection criteria. To change the method by which the rebate agreement is to be dispatched, you must modify the dispatch method on the Rebate Agreement - Rebate Agreement page.
Miscellaneous Options
Select to perform a test run of the dispatch. When you select this option, the process runs, but the rebate agreements that are processed do not appear in
Dispatched status, and the rebate agreements are printed with the word
Unauthorized at the bottom. This enables you to test the email or fax setup without updating the system.
Select to produce a printed copy of each processed rebate agreement. If any of the processed rebate agreements are by phone, fax, or email, the system prints a hard copy for review.
Select to print the word Duplicate on each rebate agreement.
344 Copyright © 1992, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
This chapter provides an overview of the Rebate Accrual process and discusses how to generate rebate accruals.
The Rebate Accrual Application Engine process (PO_VRBTACCR) calculates earned rebates for transactions that are related to purchase orders, such as receipts, vouchers, and return to vendors (RTVs).
The Rebate Accrual process identifies all purchase order lines that have vendor rebate agreements defined.
Then the system finds all associated receipts, vouchers, and RTVs to calculate the rebate and generate accrual records for those source transactions based on the rebate agreement terms and rules. During the processing of the different transactions, the system converts amounts and quantities to the currency and rule unit of measure on the vendor rebate agreement. The sum of these amounts and quantities becomes the basis for calculating the vendor rebate. The basis is referred to as the rebateable amount and rebateable quantity.
The rebate accrual records provide visibility to the rebate manager on the estimated earned rebates for analysis purposes, but also serve as the basis for the